2010 GMC Canyon Owner Manual
In Brief ........................................................... 1-1
Instrument Panel ........................................ 1-2
Initial Drive Information
............................... 1-3
Vehicle Features
...................................... 1-15
Performance and Maintenance
................... 1-17
Seats and Restraint System ............................. 2-1
Front Seats ............................................... 2-2
Rear Seats .............................................. 2-10
Safety Belts ............................................. 2-13
Child Restraints
....................................... 2-35
Airbag System
......................................... 2-64
Restraint System Check
............................ 2-81
.....................................
3-1
Features and Controls
Keys
........................................................ 3-2
Doors and Locks
....................................... 3-5
Windows ................................................. 3-10
Theft-Deterrent Systems ............................ 3-13
Starting and Operating Your Vehicle
........... 3-16
Mirrors .................................................... 3-36
Storage Areas
......................................... 3-40
Sunroof
.................................................. 3-42
M
Instrument Panel ............................................. 4-1
Instrument Panel Overview .......................... 4-3
Climate Controls
...................................... 4-16
Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators
........ 4-18
Driver Information Center (DIC)
.................. 4-33
Audio System(s) ....................................... 4-42
Driving Your Vehicle ....................................... 5-1
Your Driving, the Road, and the Vehicle
....... 5-2
Towing
................................................... 5-41
Service and Appearance Care .......................... 6-1
Service ..................................................... 6-3
Fuel ......................................................... 6-5
Checking Things Under the Hood
............... 6-10
Rear Axle
............................................... 6-47
Four-Wheel Drive
..................................... 6-48
Front Axle
............................................... 6-49
Headlamp Aiming ..................................... 6-50
Bulb Replacement
.................................... 6-50
Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement
......... 6-55
Tires
...................................................... 6-57
Appearance Care
................................... 6-102
Vehicle Identification
............................... 6-110
Electrical System
.................................... 6-111
Capacities and Specifications
................... 6-118
Maintenance Schedule ..................................... 7-1
Maintenance Schedule ................................ 7-2
Customer Assistance Information .................... 8-1
Customer Assistance and Information
........... 8-2
Reporting Safety Defects ........................... 8-14
Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy
........... 8-16
Index ................................................................ 1
Canadian Owners
Canadian Owners
(Propriétaires Canadiens)
A French language copy of this manual can be obtained
from your dealer/retailer or from:
On peut obtenir un exemplaire de ce guide en français
auprès du concessionnaire ou à l’adresse suivante:
GENERAL MOTORS, GM, the GM Emblem, GMC,
the GMC Truck Emblem, and the name CANYON are
registered trademarks of General Motors Corporation.
Helm, Incorporated
P.O. Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207
1-800-551-4123
This manual describes features that may or may not be
on your specific vehicle either because they are options
that you did not purchase or due to changes subsequent
to the printing of this owner manual. Please refer to the
purchase documentation relating to your specific vehicle
to confirm each of the features found on your vehicle.
For vehicles first sold in Canada, substitute the name
“General Motors of Canada Limited” for GMC wherever
it appears in this manual.
Numéro de poste 6438 de langue française
www.helminc.com
Index
To quickly locate information about the vehicle, use the
index in the back of the manual. It is an alphabetical
list of what is in the manual and the page number where
it can be found.
Keep this manual in the vehicle for quick reference.
Litho in U.S.A.
Part No. 25848174 A
©
2009 General Motors Corporation. All Rights Reserved.
iii
Safety Warnings and Symbols
A circle with a slash
through it is a safety
symbol which means
“Do Not,” “Do not do this,”
or “Do not let this happen.”
Warning Messages found on vehicle labels and in this
manual describe hazards and what to do to avoid
or reduce them.
Danger indicates a hazard with a high level of risk
which will result in serious injury or death.
Warning or Caution indicates a hazard that could result
in injury or death.
{ WARNING:
These mean there is something that could hurt
you or other people.
Notice: This means there is something that could
result in property or vehicle damage. This would not
be covered by the vehicle’s warranty.
iv
Vehicle Symbols
The vehicle has components and labels that use symbols
instead of text. Symbols are shown along with the text
describing the operation or information relating to a
specific component, control, message, gage, or indicator.
M : This symbol is shown when you need to see your
owner manual for additional instructions or information.
* : This symbol is shown when you need to see a
service manual for additional instructions or information.
Vehicle Symbol Chart
.:
Fuel Gage
Here are some additional symbols that may be found on
the vehicle and what they mean. For more information
on the symbol, refer to the index.
+:
Fuses
9:
Airbag Readiness Light
#:
Air Conditioning
!:
Antilock Brake System (ABS)
g:
Audio Steering Wheel Controls or OnStar®
$:
Brake System Warning Light
":
I:
Charging System
Cruise Control
B:
Engine Coolant Temperature
O:
Exterior Lamps
#:
Fog Lamps
i:
j:
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer
LATCH System Child Restraints
*:
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
::
Oil Pressure
}:
Power
/:
Remote Vehicle Start
>:
Safety Belt Reminders
7:
Tire Pressure Monitor
F:
Traction Control
M:
Windshield Washer Fluid
v
✍ NOTES
vi
Section 1
Instrument Panel ..............................................1-2
Initial Drive Information ....................................1-3
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System ................1-4
Door Locks ....................................................1-4
Tailgate ........................................................1-5
Windows .......................................................1-6
Seat Adjustment .............................................1-7
Heated Seats .................................................1-9
Head Restraint Adjustment ...............................1-9
Safety Belt ...................................................1-10
Sensing System for Passenger Airbag .............1-10
Mirror Adjustment .........................................1-11
Steering Wheel Adjustment ............................1-12
Interior Lighting ............................................1-12
Exterior Lighting ...........................................1-13
Windshield Wiper/Washer ...............................1-14
Climate Controls ...........................................1-14
In Brief
Vehicle Features .............................................1-15
Radio(s) ......................................................1-15
Satellite Radio ..............................................1-16
Driver Information Center (DIC) .......................1-16
Cruise Control ..............................................1-17
Power Outlets ..............................................1-17
Performance and Maintenance .........................1-17
Traction Control System (TCS) .......................1-17
StabiliTrak® ..................................................1-18
Tire Pressure Monitor ....................................1-18
Engine Oil Life System ..................................1-19
Driving for Better Fuel Economy .....................1-19
Roadside Assistance Program ........................1-20
OnStar® ......................................................1-20
1-1
Instrument Panel
Manual Transmission shown, Automatic Transmission similar
1-2
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
Outlet Adjustment on page 4-18.
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever on page 4-4.
Instrument Panel Cluster on page 4-19.
Hazard Warning Flashers on page 4-3.
Passenger Side Airbag. See Airbag System on
page 2-64.
Exterior Lamps on page 4-10. Fog Lamps on page 4-12
(If Equipped). Exterior Cargo Lamps on page 4-13.
Parking Brake on page 3-30.
Horn on page 4-3.
StabiliTrak® System on page 5-6 and Four-Wheel
Drive on page 3-25.
Audio System(s) on page 4-42.
K. Cigarette Lighter (If Equipped). See Ashtray(s) and
Cigarette Lighter on page 4-16.
L. Climate Control System on page 4-16.
M. Accessory Power Outlet(s) on page 4-15.
N. Passenger Airbag Status Indicator on page 4-23.
O. Glove Box on page 3-40.
Initial Drive Information
This section provides a brief overview about some of
the important features that may or may not be on your
specific vehicle.
For more detailed information, refer to each of the
features which can be found later in this owner manual.
1-3
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
System
Door Locks
The RKE transmitter is used to lock and unlock the
doors from up to 9 meters (30 feet) away from the
vehicle.
Lock or unlock the door from the outside with the key in
the driver or front passenger door or press the LOCK
or UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter.
Press UNLOCK to unlock
the doors and press LOCK
to lock them.
Press L to sound the horn and to flash the exterior
lamps for 30 seconds.
Lock and unlock feedback can be personalized.
See Keys on page 3-2 and Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) System Operation on page 3-3.
1-4
Manual Door Locks
Lock the door from the inside by moving the manual
lever on the door forward or rearward.
Power Door Locks
Tailgate
Press L or U on the switch on the armrest to lock or
unlock the doors.
For more information see:
• Door Locks on page 3-5
• Power Door Locks on page 3-6
Open the tailgate by pulling up on the outside handle
while pulling the tailgate down.
On vehicles with a locking tailgate, use the ignition key
to unlock it.
For more information see Tailgate on page 3-8.
1-5
Windows
Power Windows
Manual Windows
Use the window crank to open and close each window.
Press or pull up on the front of the switch to open or
close the window.
For more information see:
• Manual Windows on page 3-10
• Power Windows on page 3-11
1-6
Seat Adjustment
Power Seats
Manual Seats
To adjust the seat using the control on the outboard
side of it:
1. Lift the bar to unlock the seat.
2. Slide the seat to the desired position and release
the bar.
• Slide the horizontal control forward or rearward.
• Move the front or rear of the horizontal control
up or down.
• Move the entire horizontal control up or down.
1-7
Reclining Seatbacks
Use the vertical control on the outboard side of the seat
to raise or recline the seatback by moving the control
forward or rearward.
Power Lumbar
Press and hold the front or rear of the control on the
outboard side of the seat until you have the desired
lumbar support.
For more information see:
•
•
•
•
1-8
Manual Seats on page 2-2
Power Seats on page 2-3
Reclining Seatbacks on page 2-5
Power Lumbar on page 2-4
Heated Seats
Head Restraint Adjustment
Head Restraints
Do not drive until the head restraints for all occupants
are installed and adjusted properly.
See Head Restraints on page 2-8.
With the ignition on, press the top of the switch on the
outboard side of the seat to turn the heat on at the high
setting.
Press the bottom of the switch to turn the heat to the
low setting, and put it in the center position to turn
the heat off.
For more information see Heated Seats on page 2-4.
1-9
Safety Belt
Sensing System for Passenger
Airbag
The passenger sensing system, if equipped, will turn off
the right front passenger frontal airbag under certain
conditions. The driver airbags are not affected by this.
If the vehicle has one of the passenger airbag status
indicators pictured in the following illustrations, then the
vehicle has a passenger sensing system.
The passenger airbag status indicator will be visible on
the instrument panel when the vehicle is started.
Refer to the following sections for important information
on how to use safety belts properly.
•
•
•
•
Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone on page 2-13.
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly on page 2-18.
Lap-Shoulder Belt on page 2-27.
Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH)
on page 2-46.
1-10
United States
Canada
See Passenger Sensing System on page 2-73 for
important information.
Mirror Adjustment
Manually fold the mirrors inward to prevent damage
when going through an automatic car wash. To
fold, push the mirror toward the vehicle. Push the mirror
outward, to return to its original position.
Exterior Mirrors
Vehicles with power
outside mirrors have
controls located on the
driver door.
Interior Mirror
The automatic dimming inside rearview mirror will
automatically reduce the glare of lights from behind the
vehicle. See Manual Rearview Mirror on page 3-36.
1. Move the selector switch to the L (left) or R (right)
to choose the driver or passenger mirror.
2. Press one of the four buttons located on the control
pad to move the mirror to the desired direction.
3. Return the selector switch to the center position
once the mirrors are adjusted.
1-11
Steering Wheel Adjustment
Interior Lighting
Dome Lamps
The dome lamps, located in the front and cargo area of
the vehicle, come on when any door is opened.
Turn the dome lamps on by turning the thumbwheel,
located next to the exterior lamps control, all the way up.
In this position, the lamps remain on whether a door
is opened or closed.
Reading Lamps
Press the lens on the lamps to turn each reading lamp
on or off.
These lamps will not come on with the dome lamps.
To adjust the steering wheel:
1. Hold the steering wheel and pull the lever
toward you.
2. Move the steering wheel up or down into a
comfortable position.
3. Release the lever to lock the wheel in place.
Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving.
1-12
• Dome Lamp Override on page 4-14.
• Instrument Panel Brightness on page 4-13.
• Exit Lighting on page 4-14.
Exterior Lighting
For more information, see:
•
•
•
•
•
Exterior Lamps on page 4-10
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) on page 4-11
Automatic Headlamp System on page 4-12
Fog Lamps on page 4-12
Exterior Cargo Lamps on page 4-13
O : Turns off all exterior lamps including the Daytime
Running Lamps (DRL).
AUTO: Automatic operation of the headlamps and
other exterior lamps at normal brightness.
; : Manual operation of the parking lamps and other
exterior lamps.
2 : Manual operation of the headlamps and other
exterior lamps.
1-13
Windshield Wiper/Washer
Climate Controls
8:
N:
D. Air Conditioning
A. Temperature
E. Air Recirculation
Control
B. Fan Control
C. Air Delivery Mode
Control
See Climate Control System on page 4-16.
Use for a single wiping cycle.
Delays wiping cycle. Move the band to adjust the
frequency of wipes.
6:
1:
9:
Slow wipes.
Fast wipes.
Turns the wipers off.
Windshield Washer: Push the paddle on top of the
multifunction lever to spray washer fluid on the
windshield.
See Windshield Wipers on page 4-5 and Windshield
Washer on page 4-6.
1-14
Vehicle Features
q TUNEr:
Radio(s)
q SEEK r: Press to go to the previous or to the next
station and stay there.
Turn to select radio stations.
For more information about these and other radio
features, see Audio System(s) on page 4-42.
Setting Preset Stations
Radio stations are stored as presets.
For vehicles with an XM radio, a maximum of
30 stations can be stored as presets using the
six numbered pushbuttons.
If the radio does not have XM, up to 18 stations
(six FM1, six FM2, and six AM), can be programmed on
the six numbered buttons.
See Setting Preset Stations under Radio(s) on page 4-43.
Radio with CD (MP3/WMA)
PWR: Press to turn the system on and off.
q VOLr:
Turn to increase or decrease the volume.
BAND: Press to switch between FM1, FM2, AM,
or XM1 or XM2 (if equipped). The selection displays.
Setting the Clock
To set the time and date for the radio with
CD (MP3/WMA):
Press and hold the HR button until the correct hour
displays. Press and hold the MIN button until the correct
minute displays. The time can be set with the ignition
on or off.
1-15
To synchronize the time with an FM station broadcasting
Radio Data System (RDS) information, press and
hold the HR and MIN buttons at the same time until
RDS TIME displays. To accept this time, press and hold
the HR and MIN buttons, at the same time, for another
two seconds. If the time is not available from the station,
NO UPDAT (update) displays.
RDS time is broadcast once a minute. After tuning to an
RDS broadcast station, it could take a few minutes
for the time to update.
For detailed instructions on setting the clock for your
specific audio system, see Setting the Clock on
page 4-43.
Satellite Radio
XM is a satellite radio service that is based in the 48
contiguous United States and 10 Canadian provinces.
XM satellite radio has a wide variety of programming
and commercial-free music, coast-to-coast, and in
digital-quality sound.
A fee is required to receive the XM service.
For more information, refer to:
• www.xmradio.com or call 1-800-929-2100 (U.S.)
• www.xmradio.ca or call 1-877-438-9677 (Canada)
1-16
See “XM Satellite Radio Service” under Radio(s) on
page 4-43 and XM Radio Messages on page 4-60.
Driver Information Center (DIC)
The DIC is located on the instrument panel cluster. It
displays the status of many vehicle systems and enables
some features to be personalized.
Use the trip reset stem located on the instrument panel
cluster to scroll through the available functions. For
more information, see DIC Operation and Displays on
page 4-33.
Vehicle Personalization
Some vehicle features can be personalized through the
DIC. These features include:
• Language: English, Spanish, or French
• Automatic Door Locks
• RKE Feedback
For more information, see DIC Operation and Displays
on page 4-33.
Cruise Control
Power Outlets
The cruise controls are
located at the end of the
multifunction lever.
The accessory power outlets can be used to connect
electrical equipment, such as a cellular phone.
The vehicle may have an accessory power outlet
located below the climate control system and on the
rear of the center console.
See Accessory Power Outlet(s) on page 4-15.
Performance and Maintenance
Traction Control System (TCS)
9:
R:
Turns the system off.
Turns the system on.
+ (Resume/Accelerate): Use to accelerate or resume
speed.
r T (Set):
Press the button at the end of the lever
to set the speed.
For more information, see Cruise Control on page 4-7.
The traction control system limits wheel spin. The
system turns on automatically every time the vehicle is
started.
• To turn off traction control, press and release d on
the instrument panel. d illuminates and the
appropriate DIC message is displayed. See DIC
Warnings and Messages on page 4-37.
• Press and release the button again to turn on traction
control.
For more information, see Traction Control System
(TCS) on page 5-8.
1-17
StabiliTrak®
The Electronic Stability Control system assists with
directional control of the vehicle in difficult driving
conditions. The system turns on automatically every
time the vehicle is started.
• To turn off both traction control and Electronic
Stability Control, press and hold d until d illuminates
and the appropriate DIC message is displayed.
See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 4-37.
• Press and release the button again to turn on both
systems.
For more information, see StabiliTrak® System on
page 5-6.
Tire Pressure Monitor
The Tire Pressure Monitor
alerts you when a
significant reduction in
pressure occurs in one or
more of the vehicle’s tires
by illuminating the low tire
pressure warning light on
the instrument cluster.
The warning light will remain on until the tire pressure is
corrected. The proper tire pressures for your vehicle
are listed on the Tire and Loading Information label
located on the driver side center pillar (B pillar).
See Loading the Vehicle on page 5-33.
You may notice during cooler conditions that the low tire
pressure warning light will appear when the vehicle is
first started and then turn off as you drive. This may be
an early indicator that your tire pressures are getting
low and the tires need to be inflated to the proper
pressure.
Note: The Tire Pressure Monitor can alert you about
low tire pressure, but it does not replace normal monthly
tire maintenance. It is the driver’s responsibility to
maintain correct tire pressures.
See Tire Pressure Monitor System on page 6-66 and Tire
Pressure Monitor Operation on page 6-67.
1-18
Engine Oil Life System
Driving for Better Fuel Economy
The engine oil life system calculates engine oil life
based on vehicle use and displays a DIC message when
it is necessary to change the engine oil and filter.
Driving habits can affect fuel mileage. Here are some
driving tips to get the best fuel economy possible.
Resetting the Oil Life System
1. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN, with the engine off.
2. Press and release the stem in the lower center
of the instrument cluster until the OIL LIFE
message is displayed.
3. Once the alternating OIL LIFE and RESET
messages appear, press and hold the stem
until several beeps sound. This confirms that the oil
life system has been reset.
4. Turn the key to LOCK/OFF.
See Engine Oil Life System on page 6-18.
•
•
•
•
Avoid fast starts and accelerate smoothly.
Brake gradually and avoid abrupt stops.
Avoid idling the engine for long periods of time.
When road and weather conditions are appropriate,
use cruise control, if equipped.
• Always follow posted speed limits or drive more
slowly when conditions require.
• Keep vehicle tires properly inflated.
• Combine several trips into a single trip.
• Replace the vehicle’s tires with the same
TPC Spec number molded into the tire’s sidewall
near the size.
• Follow recommended scheduled maintenance.
1-19
Roadside Assistance Program
OnStar®
U.S.: 1-800-GMC-8782 (462-8782)
TTY Users: 1-888-889-2438
Canada: 1-800-268-6800
As the owner of a new GMC, you are automatically
enrolled in the Roadside Assistance program. This
program provides technically trained advisors who are
available 24 hours a day, 365 days a year, minor repair
information or towing arrangements.
Roadside Assistance and OnStar
If you have a current OnStar subscription, press the
OnStar button and the current GPS location will be sent
to an OnStar Advisor who will assess your problem,
contact Roadside Assistance, and relay exact location to
get you the help you need.
Online Owner Center
The Online Owner Center is a complimentary service
that includes online service reminders, vehicle
maintenance tips, online owner manual, special
privileges and more.
Sign up today at: www.gmownercenter.com/gmc
(U.S.) or www.gm.ca (Canada).
1-20
OnStar® uses several innovative technologies and live
advisors to provide a wide range of safety, security,
navigation, diagnostics, and calling services.
Automatic Crash Response
In a crash, built in sensors can automatically alert an
OnStar advisor who is immediately connected to
the vehicle to see if you need help.
How OnStar Service Works
Q : This blue button connects you to a specially
trained OnStar advisor to verify your account information
and to answer questions.
] : Push this red emergency button to get priority help
from specially trained OnStar emergency advisors.
X : Push this button for hands-free, voice-activated
calling and to give voice commands for turn-by-turn
navigation.
Crisis Assist, Stolen Vehicle Assistance, Vehicle
Diagnostics, Remote Door Unlock, Roadside Assistance,
Turn-by-Turn Navigation and Hands-Free Calling are
available on most vehicles. Not all OnStar services are
available on all vehicles. For more information see
the OnStar Owner’s Guide or visit www.onstar.com
(U.S.) or www.onstar.ca (Canada), contact OnStar at
1-888-4-ONSTAR (1-888-466-7827) or TTY
1-877-248-2080, or press Q to speak with an OnStar
advisor 24 hours a day, 7 days a week.
For a full description of OnStar services and system
limitations, see the OnStar Owner’s Guide in the
glove box.
OnStar service is subject to the OnStar terms and
conditions included in the OnStar Subscriber
Information.
OnStar service cannot work unless the vehicle is in a
place where OnStar has an agreement with a wireless
service provider for service in that area. OnStar
service also cannot work unless the vehicle is in a place
where the wireless service provider OnStar has hired
for that area has coverage, network capacity and
reception when the service is needed, and technology
that is compatible with the OnStar service. Not all
services are available everywhere, particularly in remote
or enclosed areas, or at all times.
The OnStar system can record and transmit vehicle
information. This information is automatically sent to an
OnStar call center when Q is pressed, ] is pressed,
or if the airbags or ACR system deploy. This information
usually includes the vehicle’s GPS location and, in
the event of a crash, additional information regarding
the crash that the vehicle was involved in (e.g. the
direction from which the vehicle was hit). When
the virtual advisor feature of OnStar hands-free calling
is used, the vehicle also sends OnStar the vehicle’s
GPS location so they can provide services where it is
located.
1-21
Location information about the vehicle is only available
if the GPS satellite signals are unobstructed and
available.
The vehicle must have a working electrical system,
including adequate battery power, for the OnStar
equipment to operate. There are other problems OnStar
cannot control that may prevent OnStar from providing
OnStar service at any particular time or place. Some
examples are damage to important parts of the vehicle
in a crash, hills, tall buildings, tunnels, weather or
wireless phone network congestion.
1-22
Your Responsibility
Increase the volume of the radio if the OnStar advisor
cannot be heard.
If the light next to the OnStar buttons is red, the system
may not be functioning properly. Press Q and request
a vehicle diagnostic. If the light appears clear (no light is
appearing), your OnStar subscription has expired and
all services have been deactivated. Press Q to confirm
that the OnStar equipment is active.
Section 2
Seats and Restraint System
Front Seats ......................................................2-2
Manual Seats ................................................2-2
Power Seats ..................................................2-3
Manual Lumbar ..............................................2-3
Power Lumbar ...............................................2-4
Heated Seats .................................................2-4
Reclining Seatbacks ........................................2-5
Head Restraints .............................................2-8
Seatback Latches ...........................................2-9
Rear Seats .....................................................2-10
Rear Seat Operation (Extended Cab) ...............2-10
Rear Seat Operation (Crew Cab) ....................2-11
Safety Belts ...................................................2-13
Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone ................2-13
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly .................2-18
Lap-Shoulder Belt .........................................2-27
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy ..................2-33
Lap Belt ......................................................2-33
Safety Belt Extender .....................................2-34
Child Restraints .............................................2-35
Older Children ..............................................2-35
Infants and Young Children ............................2-38
Child Restraint Systems .................................2-42
Where to Put the Restraint .............................2-44
Lower Anchors and Tethers for
Children (LATCH) ......................................2-46
Securing a Child Restraint in a
Rear Seat Position ....................................2-58
Securing a Child Restraint in the
Center Front Seat Position ..........................2-60
Securing a Child Restraint in the
Right Front Seat Position ............................2-60
Airbag System ...............................................2-64
Where Are the Airbags? ................................2-67
When Should an Airbag Inflate? .....................2-69
What Makes an Airbag Inflate? .......................2-71
How Does an Airbag Restrain? .......................2-71
What Will You See After an Airbag Inflates? .....2-72
Passenger Sensing System ............................2-73
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ...........2-79
Adding Equipment to Your
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle .............................2-80
Restraint System Check ..................................2-81
Checking the Restraint Systems ......................2-81
Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash ............................................2-82
2-1
Front Seats
Manual Seats
{ WARNING:
If the vehicle has a manual seat, it can be moved
forward or rearward.
1. Lift the bar to unlock
the seat.
2. Slide the seat to the
desired position and
release the bar.
You can lose control of the vehicle if you try to
adjust a manual driver’s seat while the vehicle is
moving. The sudden movement could startle and
confuse you, or make you push a pedal when you
do not want to. Adjust the driver’s seat only when
the vehicle is not moving.
Try to move the seat with your body to be sure the seat
is locked in place.
2-2
• Raise or lower the entire seat by moving the entire
Power Seats
horizontal control up or down.
If the vehicle has power
seats, the controls used to
operate them are located
on the outboard side of the
seats.
• Use the vertical control to recline the seatback.
See “Power Reclining Seatbacks” under Reclining
Seatbacks on page 2-5 for more information.
Manual Lumbar
On vehicles with this
feature, the knob is
located on the outboard
side of the driver seat.
To adjust the seat:
• Move the seat forward or rearward by sliding the
horizontal control forward or rearward.
• Raise or lower the front part of the seat cushion
by moving the front of the horizontal control up
or down.
• Raise or lower the rear part of the seat cushion
Turn the knob to increase or decrease lumbar support.
by moving the rear of the horizontal control up
or down.
2-3
Power Lumbar
Heated Seats
If the vehicle has this
feature, the control is
located on the outboard
side of the seat(s).
Press and hold the front of the control until you have
the desired lumbar support. To decrease lumbar
support, press and hold the rear of the control.
If the vehicle has this
feature, the controls are
located on the outboard
side of the front seats.
This feature will heat the cushion and back of the seats.
Press HI to turn the heat to the high setting. Press
LO to turn the heat to the low setting. Put the switch in
the center position to turn the heat off.
The ignition must be on for the heated seat feature to
work. The seat will heat to the last setting if the ignition
has been turned off and then turned back on.
The passenger safety belt must be fastened for the
heated seat feature to work on the passenger seat.
2-4
Reclining Seatbacks
Manual Reclining Seatbacks
If the seats have manual reclining seatbacks, the lever
used to operate them is located on the outboard
side of the seat(s).
{ WARNING:
You can lose control of the vehicle if you try to
adjust a manual driver’s seat while the vehicle is
moving. The sudden movement could startle and
confuse you, or make you push a pedal when you
do not want to. Adjust the driver’s seat only when
the vehicle is not moving.
{ WARNING:
To recline the seatback:
If either seatback is not locked, it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there. Always
push and pull on the seatbacks to be sure they
are locked.
1. Lift the recline lever.
2. Move the seatback to the desired position, then
release the lever to lock the seatback in place.
3. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is
locked.
2-5
To return the seatback to an upright position:
Power Reclining Seatbacks
1. Lift the lever fully without applying pressure to the
seatback and the seatback will return to the upright
position.
If the seats have power
reclining seatbacks, use
the vertical power seat
control located on
the outboard side of
the seat.
2. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is
locked.
• To recline the seatback, press the control toward
the rear of the vehicle.
• To raise the seatback, press the control toward the
front of the vehicle.
2-6
{ WARNING:
Sitting in a reclined position when the vehicle is in
motion can be dangerous. Even when buckled up,
the safety belts cannot do their job when reclined
like this.
The shoulder belt cannot do its job because it will
not be against your body. Instead, it will be in front
of you. In a crash, you could go into it, receiving
neck or other injuries.
The lap belt cannot do its job either. In a crash,
the belt could go up over your abdomen. The belt
forces would be there, not at your pelvic bones.
This could cause serious internal injuries.
For proper protection when the vehicle is in
motion, have the seatback upright. Then sit well
back in the seat and wear the safety belt properly.
Do not have a seatback reclined if the vehicle is
moving.
2-7
Head Restraints
The front seats may have adjustable head restraints.
If the vehicle has rear seats, they may have adjustable
head restraints.
Adjust the head restraint so that the top of the restraint
is at the same height as the top of the occupant’s
head. This position reduces the chance of a neck injury
in a crash.
2-8
Pull up on the head
restraint to raise it.
To lower the head
restraint, press the button
located on top of the
seatback and push down
on the head restraint.
Seatback Latches
The vehicle may have front seatbacks that fold forward
for easy access to the rear seats or the storage area
behind the seats.
To fold the seatback
forward, push the lever
on the side of the seat
rearward and pull the
seatback forward.
{ WARNING:
If either seatback is not locked, it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there. Always
push and pull on the seatbacks to be sure they
are locked.
To return the seatback to the upright position, push the
seatback all the way back until it latches.
If the seatback was reclined before being folded
forward, it will return to the reclined position.
2-9
Rear Seats
To store the seat:
Rear Seat Operation (Extended Cab)
If the vehicle has an
extended cab, there may
be forward folding seats in
the rear area.
Notice: Folding a rear seat with the safety belts
still fastened may cause damage to the seat or the
safety belts. Always unbuckle the safety belts
and return them to their normal stowed position
before folding a rear seat.
To fold the rear seat cushion(s) from the stored position
to the sitting position, pull the front of the seat cushion
down completely.
The rear seat storage compartments must be closed
before folding the seat down. See Rear Storage Area on
page 3-41.
1. Secure the safety belt buckle to the inboard side of
the seat with the hook and loop fastener (A), so that
it does not move when not in use.
2. Push the entire seat up until it is flush with the trim
panel.
2-10
Rear Seat Operation (Crew Cab)
The rear seatback(s) in the crew cab can be folded
forward.
2. Pull the loop, located
on the outboard side of
the seatback, forward
until you hear a click.
Notice: Folding a rear seat with the safety belts still
fastened may cause damage to the seat or the safety
belts. Always unbuckle the safety belts and return
them to their normal stowed position before folding a
rear seat.
To fold the rear seatback(s) forward:
3. Fold the seatback(s) forward.
1. Disconnect the rear center safety belt latch from the
mini buckle by inserting the tip of the safety belt
tongue into the slot on the buckle. Let the belt retract.
2-11
To return the seatback(s) to the upright position:
1. Lift the seatback(s) and push it into place.
{ WARNING:
If either seatback is not locked, it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there. Always
push and pull on the seatbacks to be sure they
are locked.
2. Make sure the seatback(s) is locked by pushing
and pulling on it.
{ WARNING:
A safety belt that is improperly routed, not properly
attached, or twisted will not provide the protection
needed in a crash. The person wearing the belt
could be seriously injured. After raising the rear
seatback, always check to be sure that the safety
belts are properly routed and attached, and are
not twisted.
3. Reconnect the center safety belt latch plate to the
mini buckle. Make sure the safety belt is not twisted.
4. Push and pull on the latch plate to be sure it is
secure.
When the seatback is not in use, it should be kept in
the upright, locked position.
2-12
Safety Belts
{ WARNING:
Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone
This part of the manual tells you how to use safety
belts properly. It also tells you some things you should
not do with safety belts.
People riding on the tailgate (if equipped) can
easily lose their balance and fall even when the
vehicle is operated at low speeds. Falling from a
moving vehicle may result in serious injuries or
death.
{ WARNING:
Do not let anyone ride where a safety belt cannot
be worn properly. In a crash, if you or your
passenger(s) are not wearing safety belts, the
injuries can be much worse. You can hit things
inside the vehicle harder or be ejected from the
vehicle. You and your passenger(s) can be
seriously injured or killed. In the same crash, you
might not be, if you are buckled up. Always fasten
your safety belt, and check that your passenger(s)
are restrained properly too.
{ WARNING:
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be
seriously injured or killed. Do not allow people to
ride in any area of your vehicle that is not
equipped with seats and safety belts. Be sure
everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a
safety belt properly.
Your vehicle has indicators as a reminder to buckle your
safety belts. See Safety Belt Reminders on page 4-21.
2-13
In most states and in all Canadian provinces, the law
requires wearing safety belts. Here is why:
You never know if you will be in a crash. If you do have
a crash, you do not know if it will be a serious one.
Why Safety Belts Work
When you ride in or on anything, you go as fast as
it goes.
A few crashes are mild, and some crashes can be so
serious that even buckled up, a person would not
survive. But most crashes are in between. In many of
them, people who buckle up can survive and sometimes
walk away. Without belts they could have been badly
hurt or killed.
After more than 40 years of safety belts in vehicles, the
facts are clear. In most crashes buckling up does
matter... a lot!
Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose it is just a seat on
wheels.
2-14
Put someone on it.
Get it up to speed. Then stop the vehicle. The rider
does not stop.
2-15
The person keeps going until stopped by something.
In a real vehicle, it could be the windshield...
2-16
or the instrument panel...
Questions and Answers About Safety
Belts
Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicle after a crash if I
am wearing a safety belt?
A: You could be — whether you are wearing a safety
belt or not. But your chance of being conscious
during and after an accident, so you can unbuckle
and get out, is much greater if you are belted.
And you can unbuckle a safety belt, even if you are
upside down.
Q: If my vehicle has airbags, why should I have to
wear safety belts?
A: Airbags are supplemental systems only; so they
or the safety belts!
With safety belts, you slow down as the vehicle does.
You get more time to stop. You stop over more distance,
and your strongest bones take the forces. That is why
safety belts make such good sense.
work with safety belts — not instead of them.
Whether or not an airbag is provided, all occupants
still have to buckle up to get the most protection.
That is true not only in frontal collisions, but
especially in side and other collisions.
2-17
Q: If I am a good driver, and I never drive far from
home, why should I wear safety belts?
A: You may be an excellent driver, but if you are in a
crash — even one that is not your fault — you and
your passenger(s) can be hurt. Being a good driver
does not protect you from things beyond your
control, such as bad drivers.
Most accidents occur within 25 miles (40 km) of
home. And the greatest number of serious injuries
and deaths occur at speeds of less than 40 mph
(65 km/h).
Safety belts are for everyone.
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly
This section is only for people of adult size.
Be aware that there are special things to know about
safety belts and children. And there are different
rules for smaller children and infants. If a child will be
riding in the vehicle, see Older Children on page 2-35
or Infants and Young Children on page 2-38. Follow those
rules for everyone’s protection.
It is very important for all occupants to buckle up.
Statistics show that unbelted people are hurt more often
in crashes than those who are wearing safety belts.
Occupants who are not buckled up can be thrown out
of the vehicle in a crash. And they can strike others
in the vehicle who are wearing safety belts.
First, before you or your passenger(s) wear a safety
belt, there is important information you should know.
2-18
In a crash, this applies force to the strong pelvic bones
and you would be less likely to slide under the lap belt.
If you slid under it, the belt would apply force on your
abdomen. This could cause serious or even fatal injuries.
The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and across
the chest. These parts of the body are best able to take
belt restraining forces.
The shoulder belt locks if there is a sudden stop or
crash.
Sit up straight and always keep your feet on the floor in
front of you. The lap part of the belt should be worn
low and snug on the hips, just touching the thighs.
2-19
Q: What is wrong with this?
{ WARNING:
You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt is
too loose. In a crash, you would move forward too
much, which could increase injury. The shoulder
belt should fit snugly against your body.
A: The shoulder belt is too loose. It will not give as
much protection this way.
2-20
Q: What is wrong with this?
{ WARNING:
You can be seriously hurt if your lap belt is too
loose. In a crash, you could slide under the lap
belt and apply force on your abdomen. This could
cause serious or even fatal injuries. The lap belt
should be worn low and snug on the hips, just
touching the thighs.
A: The lap belt is too loose. It will not give nearly as
much protection this way.
2-21
Q: What is wrong with this?
{ WARNING:
You can be seriously injured if your belt is buckled
in the wrong place like this. In a crash, the belt
would go up over your abdomen. The belt forces
would be there, not on the pelvic bones. This
could cause serious internal injuries. Always
buckle your belt into the buckle nearest you.
A: The belt is buckled in the wrong buckle.
2-22
Q: What is wrong with this?
{ WARNING:
You can be seriously injured if your belt goes over
an armrest like this. The belt would be much too
high. In a crash, you can slide under the belt. The
belt force would then be applied on the abdomen,
not on the pelvic bones, and that could cause
serious or fatal injuries. Be sure the belt goes
under the armrests.
A: The belt is over an armrest.
2-23
Q: What is wrong with this?
{ WARNING:
You can be seriously injured if you wear the
shoulder belt under your arm. In a crash, your
body would move too far forward, which would
increase the chance of head and neck injury. Also,
the belt would apply too much force to the ribs,
which are not as strong as shoulder bones. You
could also severely injure internal organs like your
liver or spleen. The shoulder belt should go over
the shoulder and across the chest.
A: The shoulder belt is worn under the arm. It should
be worn over the shoulder at all times.
2-24
Q: What is wrong with this?
{ WARNING:
You can be seriously injured by not wearing the
lap-shoulder belt properly. In a crash, you would
not be restrained by the shoulder belt. Your body
could move too far forward increasing the chance
of head and neck injury. You might also slide
under the lap belt. The belt force would then be
applied right on the abdomen. That could cause
serious or fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should
go over the shoulder and across the chest.
A: The belt is behind the body.
2-25
Q: What is wrong with this?
{ WARNING:
You can be seriously injured by a twisted belt. In a
crash, you would not have the full width of the belt
to spread impact forces. If a belt is twisted, make
it straight so it can work properly, or ask your
dealer/retailer to fix it.
A: The belt is twisted across the body.
2-26
Lap-Shoulder Belt
All seating positions in the vehicle have a lap-shoulder
belt except for the center front passenger position,
if equipped, which has a lap belt. See Lap Belt
on page 2-33 for more information.
The following instructions explain how to wear a
lap-shoulder belt properly.
1. Adjust the seat, if the seat is adjustable, so you can
sit up straight. To see how, see “Seats” in the Index.
2. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.
Do not let it get twisted.
The lap-shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt
across you very quickly. If this happens, let the belt
go back slightly to unlock it. Then pull the belt
across you more slowly.
If you ever pull the shoulder portion of a passenger
belt out all the way, the child restraint locking
feature may be engaged. If this happens, just let
the belt go back all the way and start again.
Engaging the child restraint locking feature in the
right front seating position may affect the passenger
sensing system, if equipped. See Passenger
Sensing System on page 2-73 for more information.
3. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure.
If the belt is not long enough, see Safety Belt
Extender on page 2-34.
Position the release button on the buckle so that
the safety belt could be quickly unbuckled if
necessary.
4. If equipped with a shoulder belt height adjuster,
move it to the height that is right for you. See
“Shoulder Belt Height Adjustment” later in this
section for instructions on use and important safety
information.
2-27
5. To make the lap part tight, pull up on the
shoulder belt.
It may be necessary to pull stitching on the safety
belt through the latch plate to fully tighten the
lap belt on smaller occupants.
To unlatch the belt, push the button on the buckle.
The belt should return to its stowed position. Slide
the latch plate up the safety belt webbing when
the safety belt is not in use. The latch plate should
rest on the stitching on the safety belt, near the guide
loop on the side wall.
Before a door is closed, be sure the belt is out of the
way. If a door is slammed against a safety belt, damage
can occur to both the belt and the vehicle.
2-28
Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster
Safety Belt Pretensioners
The vehicle has a shoulder belt height adjuster for the
driver and right front passenger seating position.
This vehicle has safety belt pretensioners for front
outboard occupants. Although the safety belt
pretensioners cannot be seen, they are part of the
safety belt assembly. They can help tighten the safety
belts during the early stages of a moderate to severe
frontal or near frontal crash if the threshold conditions
for pretensioner activation are met.
Adjust the height so that the shoulder portion of the belt
is centered on the shoulder. The belt should be away
from the face and neck, but not falling off the shoulder.
Improper shoulder belt height adjustment could
reduce the effectiveness of the safety belt in a crash.
To move it up or down,
squeeze the release
buttons (A) together and
move the height adjuster
to the desired position.
Pretensioners work only once. If the pretensioners
activate in a crash, they will need to be replaced,
and probably other new parts for the vehicle’s safety
belt system. See Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash on page 2-82.
After the adjuster is set to the desired position, try to
move it down without squeezing the release buttons to
make sure it has locked into position.
2-29
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides
This vehicle may have rear shoulder belt comfort guides
for the rear outside positions. If not, they are available
through your dealer/retailer.
Rear shoulder belt comfort guides may provide added
safety belt comfort for older children who have outgrown
booster seats and for some adults. When installed
and properly adjusted, the comfort guide positions the
belt away from the neck and head.
Here is how to install a comfort guide to the
shoulder belt.
1. Slide the guide off of its storage clip located between
the interior body and the seatback.
2-30
2. Place the guide over the belt and insert the two
edges of the belt into the slots of the guide.
3. Be sure that the belt is not twisted and it lies flat.
The elastic cord must be under the belt and the
guide on top.
2-31
{ WARNING:
A safety belt that is not properly worn may not
provide the protection needed in a crash. The
person wearing the belt could be seriously injured.
The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and
across the chest. These parts of the body are best
able to take belt restraining forces.
4. Buckle, position, and release the safety belt as
described previously in this section. Make sure
that the shoulder belt crosses the shoulder.
To remove and store the comfort guide, squeeze the
belt edges together so that the safety belt can be
removed from the guide. Slide the guide back on its
storage clip located between the interior body and the
seatback.
2-32
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy
Lap Belt
Safety belts work for everyone, including pregnant
women. Like all occupants, they are more likely to be
seriously injured if they do not wear safety belts.
This section is only for the lap belt. To learn how to
wear a lap-shoulder belt, see Lap-Shoulder Belt
on page 2-27.
The vehicle may have a center seating position. When
you sit in the center front seating position, you have
a lap safety belt, which has no retractor.
A pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulder belt,
and the lap portion should be worn as low as possible,
below the rounding, throughout the pregnancy.
The best way to protect the fetus is to protect the
mother. When a safety belt is worn properly, it is
more likely that the fetus will not be hurt in a crash.
For pregnant women, as for anyone, the key to making
safety belts effective is wearing them properly.
To make the belt longer, tilt the latch plate and pull it
along the belt.
Buckle, position, and release it the same way as the lap
part of a lap-shoulder belt.
2-33
Safety Belt Extender
If the vehicle’s safety belt will fasten around you, you
should use it.
But if a safety belt is not long enough, your dealer/retailer
will order you an extender. When you go in to order it,
take the heaviest coat you will wear, so the extender will
be long enough for you. To help avoid personal injury, do
not let someone else use it, and use it only for the seat it
is made to fit. The extender has been designed for adults.
Never use it for securing child seats. To wear it, attach it
to the regular safety belt. For more information, see the
instruction sheet that comes with the extender.
To make the belt shorter, pull its free end as shown
until the belt is snug.
If the belt is not long enough, see Safety Belt Extender
on page 2-34.
Make sure the release button on the buckle is positioned
so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt
quickly if necessary.
2-34
Child Restraints
Older Children
The manufacturer’s instructions that come with the
booster seat, state the weight and height limitations for
that booster. Use a booster seat with a lap-shoulder
belt until the child passes the below fit test:
• Sit all the way back on the seat. Do the knees bend
at the seat edge? If yes, continue. If no, return to
the booster seat.
• Buckle the lap-shoulder belt. Does the shoulder belt
rest on the shoulder? If yes, continue. If no, try
using the rear safety belt comfort guide. See “Rear
Safety Belt Comfort Guides” under Lap-Shoulder
Belt on page 2-27 for more information. If the
shoulder belt still does not rest on the shoulder,
then return to the booster seat.
• Does the lap belt fit low and snug on the hips,
touching the thighs? If yes, continue. If no, return to
the booster seat.
• Can proper safety belt fit be maintained for length
Older children who have outgrown booster seats should
wear the vehicle’s safety belts.
of trip? If yes, continue. If no, return to the
booster seat.
If you have the choice, a child should sit in a position
with a lap-shoulder belt and get the additional restraint a
shoulder belt can provide.
2-35
Q: What is the proper way to wear safety belts?
A: An older child should wear a lap-shoulder belt and
get the additional restraint a shoulder belt can
provide. The shoulder belt should not cross the face
or neck. The lap belt should fit snugly below the hips,
just touching the top of the thighs. This applies belt
force to the child’s pelvic bones in a crash. It should
never be worn over the abdomen, which could cause
severe or even fatal internal injuries in a crash.
Also see “Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides” under
Lap-Shoulder Belt on page 2-27.
According to accident statistics, children and infants are
safer when properly restrained in the rear seating
positions than in the front seating positions.
In a crash, children who are not buckled up can strike
other people who are buckled up, or can be thrown
out of the vehicle. Older children need to use safety
belts properly.
2-36
{ WARNING:
Never do this.
Never allow two children to wear the same safety
belt. The safety belt can not properly spread the
impact forces. In a crash, the two children can be
crushed together and seriously injured. A safety
belt must be used by only one person at a time.
{ WARNING:
Never do this.
Never allow a child to wear the safety belt with the
shoulder belt behind their back. A child can be
seriously injured by not wearing the lap-shoulder
belt properly. In a crash, the child would not be
restrained by the shoulder belt. The child could
move too far forward increasing the chance of
head and neck injury. The child might also slide
under the lap belt. The belt force would then be
applied right on the abdomen. That could cause
serious or fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should
go over the shoulder and across the chest.
2-37
Infants and Young Children
Everyone in a vehicle needs protection! This includes
infants and all other children. Neither the distance
traveled nor the age and size of the traveler changes
the need, for everyone, to use safety restraints. In fact,
the law in every state in the United States and in every
Canadian province says children up to some age must be
restrained while in a vehicle.
{ WARNING:
Children can be seriously injured or strangled if a
shoulder belt is wrapped around their neck and
the safety belt continues to tighten. Never leave
children unattended in a vehicle and never allow
children to play with the safety belts.
2-38
Airbags plus lap-shoulder belts offer protection for adults
and older children, but not for young children and infants.
Neither the vehicle’s safety belt system nor its airbag
system is designed for them. Every time infants and
young children ride in vehicles, they should have the
protection provided by appropriate child restraints.
Children who are not restrained properly can strike other
people, or can be thrown out of the vehicle.
{ WARNING:
Never do this.
Never hold an infant or a child while riding in a
vehicle. Due to crash forces, an infant or a child
will become so heavy it is not possible to hold it
during a crash. For example, in a crash at only
40 km/h (25 mph), a 5.5 kg (12 lb) infant will
suddenly become a 110 kg (240 lb) force on a
person’s arms. An infant should be secured in an
appropriate restraint.
2-39
{ WARNING:
Never do this.
Children who are up against, or very close to, any
airbag when it inflates can be seriously injured or
killed. Never put a rear-facing child restraint in the
right front seat. Secure a rear-facing child restraint
in a rear seat. It is also better to secure a
forward-facing child restraint in a rear seat. If you
must secure a forward-facing child restraint in the
right front seat, always move the front passenger
seat as far back as it will go.
Q: What are the different types of add-on child
restraints?
A: Add-on child restraints, which are purchased by the
vehicle’s owner, are available in four basic types.
Selection of a particular restraint should take
into consideration not only the child’s weight, height,
and age but also whether or not the restraint will
be compatible with the motor vehicle in which it will
be used.
2-40
For most basic types of child restraints, there are
many different models available. When purchasing a
child restraint, be sure it is designed to be used
in a motor vehicle. If it is, the restraint will have a
label saying that it meets federal motor vehicle
safety standards.
The restraint manufacturer’s instructions that come
with the restraint state the weight and height
limitations for a particular child restraint. In addition,
there are many kinds of restraints available for
children with special needs.
{ WARNING:
{ WARNING:
A young child’s hip bones are still so small that
the vehicle’s regular safety belt may not remain
low on the hip bones, as it should. Instead, it may
settle up around the child’s abdomen. In a crash,
the belt would apply force on a body area that is
unprotected by any bony structure. This alone
could cause serious or fatal injuries. To reduce the
risk of serious or fatal injuries during a crash,
young children should always be secured in
appropriate child restraints.
To reduce the risk of neck and head injury during
a crash, infants need complete support. This is
because an infant’s neck is not fully developed
and its head weighs so much compared with the
rest of its body. In a crash, an infant in a
rear-facing child restraint settles into the restraint,
so the crash forces can be distributed across the
strongest part of an infant’s body, the back and
shoulders. Infants should always be secured in
rear-facing child restraints.
2-41
Child Restraint Systems
A rear-facing infant
seat (A) provides restraint
with the seating surface
against the back of
the infant.
The harness system holds the infant in place and,
in a crash, acts to keep the infant positioned in
the restraint.
A forward-facing child
seat (B) provides restraint
for the child’s body
with the harness.
2-42
A booster seat (C-D) is a child restraint designed to
improve the fit of the vehicle’s safety belt system.
A booster seat can also help a child to see out the
window.
Securing an Add-On Child Restraint in
the Vehicle
{ WARNING:
A child can be seriously injured or killed in a crash
if the child restraint is not properly secured in the
vehicle. Secure the child restraint properly in the
vehicle using the vehicle’s safety belt or LATCH
system, following the instructions that came with
that child restraint and the instructions in this
manual.
To help reduce the chance of injury, the child restraint
must be secured in the vehicle. Child restraint systems
must be secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the
lap belt portion of a lap-shoulder belt, or by the LATCH
system. See Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children
(LATCH) on page 2-46 for more information. A child can
be endangered in a crash if the child restraint is not
properly secured in the vehicle.
When securing an add-on child restraint, refer to the
instructions that come with the restraint which may be on
the restraint itself or in a booklet, or both, and to this
manual. The child restraint instructions are important,
so if they are not available, obtain a replacement
copy from the manufacturer.
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can
move around in a collision or sudden stop and injure
people in the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure
any child restraint in the vehicle — even when no child
is in it.
Securing the Child Within the Child
Restraint
{ WARNING:
A child can be seriously injured or killed in a crash
if the child is not properly secured in the child
restraint. Secure the child properly following the
instructions that came with that child restraint.
2-43
Where to Put the Restraint
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat.
We recommend that children and child restraints
be secured in a rear seat, including: an infant or a child
riding in a rear-facing child restraint; a child riding in
a forward-facing child seat; an older child riding in
a booster seat; and children, who are large enough,
using safety belts.
A label on your sun visor says, “Never put a rear-facing
child seat in the front.” This is because the risk to the
rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.
{ WARNING:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger airbag inflates. This is because the
back of the rear-facing child restraint would be
very close to the inflating airbag. A child in a
forward-facing child restraint can be seriously
injured or killed if the right front passenger airbag
inflates and the passenger seat is in a forward
position.
The vehicle may have a passenger sensing
system which is designed to turn off the right front
passenger frontal airbag under certain conditions.
Even if the passenger sensing system, if
equipped, has turned off the right front passenger
frontal airbag, no system is fail-safe. No one can
guarantee that an airbag will not deploy under
some unusual circumstance, even though it is
turned off.
WARNING:
2-44
(Continued)
WARNING:
(Continued)
Secure rear-facing child restraints in a rear
seat, even if the airbag is off. If you secure a
forward-facing child restraint in the right front seat,
always move the front passenger seat as far back
as it will go. It is better to secure the child restraint
in a rear seat.
See Passenger Sensing System on page 2-73 for
additional information.
{ WARNING:
Do not use child restraints in the center front seat
position.
When securing a child restraint in a rear seating
position, study the instructions that came with your child
restraint to make sure it is compatible with this vehicle.
If your vehicle does not have a rear seat that will
accommodate a rear-facing child restraint, we
recommend that rear-facing child restraints not be
transported in your vehicle, even if the airbag is off.
Wherever you install a child restraint, be sure to secure
the child restraint properly.
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can
move around in a collision or sudden stop and injure
people in the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure
any child restraint in your vehicle — even when no
child is in it.
A child in a child restraint in the center front seat
can be badly injured or killed by the frontal airbags
if they inflate. Never secure a child restraint in the
center front seat. It is always better to secure a
child restraint in a rear seat.
2-45
Lower Anchors and Tethers for
Children (LATCH)
Lower Anchors
The LATCH system holds a child restraint during driving
or in a crash. This system is designed to make installation
of a child restraint easier. The LATCH system uses
anchors in the vehicle and attachments on the child
restraint that are made for use with the LATCH system.
Make sure that a LATCH-compatible child restraint is
properly installed using the anchors, or use the vehicle’s
safety belts to secure the restraint, following the
instructions that came with that restraint, and also the
instructions in this manual. When installing a child
restraint with a top tether, you must also use either the
lower anchors or the safety belts to properly secure the
child restraint. A child restraint must never be installed
using only the top tether and anchor.
In order to use the LATCH system in your vehicle, you
need a child restraint that has LATCH attachments.
The child restraint manufacturer will provide you
with instructions on how to use the child restraint and its
attachments. The following explains how to attach a
child restraint with these attachments in your vehicle.
Not all vehicle seating positions or child restraints have
lower anchors and attachments or top tether anchors
and attachments.
2-46
Lower anchors (A) are metal bars built into the vehicle.
There are two lower anchors for each LATCH seating
position that will accommodate a child restraint with
lower attachments (B).
Top Tether Anchor
Your child restraint may have a single tether (A) or a
dual tether (C). Either will have a single attachment (B)
to secure the top tether to the anchor.
Some child restraints that have a top tether are designed
for use with or without the top tether being attached.
Others require the top tether always to be attached.
In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing
child restraints have a top tether, and that the tether
be attached. Be sure to read and follow the instructions
for your child restraint.
If the child restraint does not have a top tether, one can
be obtained, in kit form, for many child restraints. Ask
the child restraint manufacturer whether or not a kit
is available.
A top tether (A, C) anchors the top of the child restraint
to the vehicle. A top tether anchor is built into the
vehicle. The top tether attachment (B) on the child
restraint connects to the top tether anchor in the vehicle
in order to reduce the forward movement and rotation
of the child restraint during driving or in a crash.
2-47
Lower Anchor and Top Tether Anchor
Locations
i (Top Tether Anchor):
Seating positions with top
tether anchors.
i (Top Tether Anchor):
j (Lower Anchor): Seating
Seating positions with top
tether anchors.
positions with two lower
anchors.
j (Lower Anchor): Seating
positions with two lower
anchors.
Extended
Cab — Rear Seat
Crew Cab — Rear Seat
i (Top Tether Anchor):
Seating positions with top
tether anchors.
Front Seat — Regular
and Extended Cab
without Rear Seats
2-48
For crew cab models, there are exposed metal lower
anchors for each rear outboard seating position, located
where the seatback meets the back of the seat
cushion.
To assist you in locating
the top tether anchors, the
top tether anchor symbol
is located on the cover.
For extended cab models with rear seats, there are
exposed metal lower anchors for each rear seating
position, attached to the back wall, near the seat
cushion.
To assist you in locating the lower anchors, place your
hand in a palm-up position and reach up between
the seat cushion and the seatback.
2-49
Crew Cab
Extended Cab — Rear Seat
The top tether anchors in a crew cab model are located
on the back wall behind each rear seating position.
Be sure to use an anchor located on the same side of
the vehicle as the seating position where the child
restraint will be placed.
The top tether anchors in an extended cab model are
located on the center of the back wall behind a removable
cover for the rear seating positions. Be sure to use an
anchor located nearest to the seating position where the
child restraint will be placed.
2-50
Do not secure a child restraint in a position without a
top tether anchor if a national or local law requires that
the top tether be attached, or if the instructions that
come with the child restraint say that the top tether
must be attached.
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat. See
Where to Put the Restraint on page 2-44 for additional
information.
Regular and Extended Cab without Rear Seats
For regular and extended cab models without rear
seats, there is a top tether anchor located behind a
removable cover on the back wall behind the right front
passenger seat. You may have to pull the seatback
forward to access the anchor.
2-51
Securing a Child Restraint Designed for
the LATCH System
{ WARNING:
If a LATCH-type child restraint is not attached to
anchors, the child restraint will not be able to
protect the child correctly. In a crash, the child
could be seriously injured or killed. Install a
LATCH-type child restraint properly using the
anchors, or use the vehicle’s safety belts to secure
the restraint, following the instructions that came
with the child restraint and the instructions in this
manual.
2-52
{ WARNING:
Do not attach more than one child restraint to a
single anchor. Attaching more than one child
restraint to a single anchor could cause the anchor
or attachment to come loose or even break during
a crash. A child or others could be injured. To
reduce the risk of serious or fatal injuries during a
crash, attach only one child restraint per anchor.
Crew Cab — Rear Seat
{ WARNING:
Children can be seriously injured or strangled if a
shoulder belt is wrapped around their neck and
the safety belt continues to tighten. Buckle any
unused safety belts behind the child restraint so
children cannot reach them. Pull the shoulder belt
all the way out of the retractor to set the lock, if
your vehicle has one, after the child restraint has
been installed.
Notice: Do not let the LATCH attachments rub
against the vehicle’s safety belts. This may damage
these parts. If necessary, move buckled safety
belts to avoid rubbing the LATCH attachments.
Do not fold the empty rear seat with a safety belt
buckled. This could damage the safety belt or
the seat. Unbuckle and return the safety belt to its
stowed position, before folding the seat.
1. Put the child restraint on the seat.
2. If the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions
recommends that the top tether be attached,
attach the top tether to the top tether anchor (A).
Refer to the child restraint instructions and the
following steps:
2.1. Pull the seatback forward to access the top
tether anchors (A). See Rear Seat Operation
(Extended Cab) on page 2-10 or Rear
Seat Operation (Crew Cab) on page 2-11.
2-53
2.2. Route the top tether according to your child
restraint instructions and the following
instructions:
If the position you are using
has a fixed headrest or
head restraint and you are
using a single tether, route
the tether over the head
restraint.
If the position you are using
has an adjustable headrest
or head restraint and you
are using a single tether,
raise the headrest or head
restraint and route the
tether under the headrest
or head restraint and in
between the headrest or
head restraint posts.
2-54
If the position you are using
has a fixed or adjustable
headrest or head restraint
and you are using a dual
tether, route the tether
around the headrest or
head restraint.
2.3. Attach the top tether to the anchor (A). Make
sure that you secure the top tether to the
top tether anchor and not to the seatback
latch (B).
2.4. Push rearward on the seatback until it locks
into its upright position. Push and pull on
the seatback to make sure it is secured
properly.
3. Attach and tighten the lower attachments to the
lower anchors. If the child restraint does not have
lower attachments or the desired seating position
does not have lower anchors, secure the child
restraint with the top tether and the safety belts.
Refer to your child restraint manufacturer
instructions and the instructions in this manual.
3.1. Find the lower anchors for the desired
seating position.
3.2. Attach and tighten the lower attachments on
the child restraint to the lower anchors.
Extended Cab — Rear Seat
4. Tighten the top tether.
5. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
1. Attach and tighten the lower attachments to the
lower anchors. If the child restraint does not have
lower attachments or the desired seating position
does not have lower anchors, secure the child
restraint with the top tether and the safety belts.
Refer to your child restraint manufacturer
instructions and the instructions in this manual.
1.1. Find the lower anchors (D) for the desired
seating position.
1.2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
2-55
1.3. Attach the lower attachments on the child
restraint to the lower anchors (D) in the
vehicle. The child restraint instructions will
show you how.
2. If the child restraint manufacturer recommends that
the top tether be attached, attach and tighten the top
tether to the top tether anchor (C). Refer to the child
restraint instructions and the following steps:
3. Tighten the lower anchor attachments and the top
tether. The child restraint instructions will show
you how.
4. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
Front Seat — Regular/Extended Cab
without Rear Seats
The vehicle has a right front passenger airbag and may
also have a passenger sensing system. If the vehicle
has a passenger sensing system it is designed to
turn off the right front passenger frontal airbag when an
infant in a rear-facing infant seat or a small child in a
forward-facing child restraint or booster seat is detected.
See Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front
Seat Position on page 2-60 and Passenger Sensing
System on page 2-73 for important safety information and
additional information on installing a child restraint in
the right front seat position.
2.1. Pull on the finger access tab to remove the
cover to access the top tether anchors (C).
2.2. Route the top tether (A) through the loop (B)
at the top of the seatback to attach the top
tether to the nearest top tether anchor (C).
2-56
1. See Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front
Seat Position on page 2-60 for instructions on
installing the child restraint using the safety belts.
2. If the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions
recommends that the top tether be attached,
attach and tighten the top tether to the top tether
anchor. Refer to the child restraint instructions and
the following steps:
2.1. Pull the seatback forward to access the top
tether anchor. See Seatback Latches on
page 2-9.
2.2. Pull on the finger access tab to remove the
cover to access the top tether anchor.
2.3. Route the top tether according to your child
restraint instructions and the following
instructions:
If the position you are using
has a fixed headrest or
head restraint and you are
using a single tether, route
the tether over the headrest
or head restraint.
If the position you are using
has an adjustable headrest
or head restraint and you
are using a single tether,
raise the headrest or head
restraint and route the
tether under the headrest
or head restraint and in
between the headrest or
head restraint posts.
If the position you are using
has a fixed or adjustable
headrest or head restraint
and you are using a dual
tether, route the tether
around the headrest or
head restraint.
3. Attach and tighten the top tether according to your
child restraint instructions.
4. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
2-57
Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear
Seat Position
When securing a child restraint in a rear seating
position, study the instructions that came with your child
restraint to make sure it is compatible with this vehicle.
If your child restraint has the LATCH system, see
Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH)
on page 2-46 for how to install your child restraint
using LATCH. If you secure a child restraint using a
safety belt and it uses a top tether, see Lower Anchors
and Tethers for Children (LATCH) on page 2-46 for
top tether anchor locations.
If you need to install more than one child restraint in the
rear seat, be sure to read Where to Put the Restraint
on page 2-44.
1. Put the child restraint on the seat.
2. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or
around the restraint. The child restraint instructions
will show you how.
Do not secure a child restraint in a position without a
top tether anchor if a national or local law requires that
the top tether be anchored, or if the instructions that
come with the child restraint say that the top strap must
be anchored.
In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child
restraints have a top tether, and that the tether be
attached.
If your child restraint does not have the LATCH system,
you will be using the safety belt to secure the child
restraint in this position. Be sure to follow the instructions
that came with the child restraint. Secure the child in the
child restraint when and as the instructions say.
2-58
3. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
Make sure the release button is positioned so you
would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly
if necessary.
4. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of
the retractor to set the lock.
5. If your child restraint has a top tether, attach the top
tether to the top tether anchor. See Lower Anchors
and Tethers for Children (LATCH) on page 2-46.
6. To tighten the belt, push down on the child restraint,
pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten the lap
portion of the belt, and feed the shoulder belt back
into the retractor. If you are using a forward-facing
child restraint, you may find it helpful to use your
knee to push down on the child restraint as you
tighten the belt.
7. Tighten the top tether. See Lower Anchors and
Tethers for Children (LATCH) on page 2-46.
8. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
2-59
To remove the child restraint, unbuckle the vehicle’s
safety belt and let it go back all the way. If the top tether
is attached to a top tether anchor, disconnect it.
Securing a Child Restraint in the
Center Front Seat Position
{ WARNING:
A child in a child restraint in the center front seat
can be badly injured or killed by the frontal airbags
if they inflate. Never secure a child restraint in the
center front seat. It is always better to secure a
child restraint in a rear seat.
Do not use child restraints in the center front seat
position.
2-60
Securing a Child Restraint in the
Right Front Seat Position
This vehicle has airbags. A rear seat is a safer place to
secure a forward-facing child restraint. See Where to
Put the Restraint on page 2-44.
In addition, the vehicle may have a passenger sensing
system which is designed to turn off the right front
passenger’s frontal airbag under certain conditions.
See Passenger Sensing System on page 2-73 and
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator on page 4-23
for more information on this, including important safety
information.
A label on the sun visor says, “Never put a rear-facing
child seat in the front.” This is because the risk to
the rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.
{ WARNING:
WARNING:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger airbag inflates. This is because the
back of the rear-facing child restraint would be
very close to the inflating airbag. A child in a
forward-facing child restraint can be seriously
injured or killed if the right front passenger airbag
inflates and the passenger seat is in a forward
position.
Secure rear-facing child restraints in a rear
seat, even if the airbag is off. If you secure a
forward-facing child restraint in the right front seat,
always move the front passenger seat as far back
as it will go. It is better to secure the child restraint
in a rear seat.
The vehicle may have a passenger sensing
system which is designed to turn off the right front
passenger frontal airbag under certain conditions.
Even if the passenger sensing system, if
equipped, has turned off the right front passenger
frontal airbag, no system is fail-safe. No one can
guarantee that an airbag will not deploy under
some unusual circumstance, even though it is
turned off.
WARNING:
(Continued)
(Continued)
See Passenger Sensing System on page 2-73 for
additional information.
If the vehicle does not have a rear seat that will
accommodate a rear-facing child restraint, a child
restraint should not be installed in your vehicle, even if
the airbag is off.
If your child restraint has the LATCH system, see
Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH)
on page 2-46 for how and where to install your child
restraint using LATCH. If a child restraint is secured
using a safety belt and it uses a top tether, see Lower
Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH) on page 2-46
for top tether anchor locations.
2-61
Do not secure a child seat in a position without a top
tether anchor if a national or local law requires that
the top tether be anchored, or if the instructions
that come with the child restraint say that the top strap
must be anchored.
In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child
restraints have a top tether, and that the tether be
attached.
You will be using the lap-shoulder belt to secure the
child restraint in this position. Follow the instructions that
came with the child restraint.
1. Move the seat as far back as it will go before
securing the forward-facing child restraint.
2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or
around the restraint. The child restraint instructions
will show you how.
2-62
4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
Position the release button on the buckle so that
the safety belt could be quickly unbuckled if
necessary.
5. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of
the retractor to set the lock.
6. If the vehicle does not have a rear seat and the
child restraint manufacturer recommends using a
top tether anchor, attach the top tether to the
top tether anchor. Refer to the instructions that
came with the child restraint and to Lower Anchors
and Tethers for Children (LATCH) on page 2-46.
7. To tighten the belt, push down on the child restraint,
pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten the
lap portion of the belt and feed the shoulder
belt back into the retractor. When installing a
forward-facing child restraint, it might be helpful to
use your knee to push down on the child restraint
as you tighten the belt.
8. Tighten the top tether. See Lower Anchors and
Tethers for Children (LATCH) on page 2-46.
9. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
2-63
If the vehicle is equipped with the passenger sensing
system, and when the passenger sensing system
has turned off the right front passenger frontal airbag,
the off indicator on the passenger airbag status indicator
should light and stay lit when you start the vehicle.
See Passenger Airbag Status Indicator on page 4-23.
All of the airbags in your vehicle will have the word
AIRBAG embossed in the trim or on an attached label
near the deployment opening.
If a child restraint has been installed and on indicator is
lit, see “If the On Indicator is Lit for a Child Restraint”
under Passenger Sensing System on page 2-73 for more
information.
With roof-rail airbags, the word AIRBAG will appear
along the headliner or trim.
To remove the child restraint, unbuckle the vehicle
safety belt and let it return to the stowed position.
Airbag System
The vehicle has the following airbags:
• A frontal airbag for the driver.
• A frontal airbag for the right front passenger
Your vehicle may also have the following airbags:
• A roof-rail airbag for the driver and the passenger
seated directly behind the driver.
• A roof-rail airbag for the right front passenger and
the passenger seated directly behind the right
front passenger.
2-64
For frontal airbags, the word AIRBAG will appear on the
middle part of the steering wheel for the driver and
on the instrument panel for the right front passenger.
Airbags are designed to supplement the protection
provided by safety belts. Even though today’s airbags
are also designed to help reduce the risk of injury
from the force of an inflating bag, all airbags must inflate
very quickly to do their job.
Here are the most important things to know about the
airbag system:
{ WARNING:
You can be severely injured or killed in a crash if
you are not wearing your safety belt — even if you
have airbags. Airbags are designed to work with
safety belts, but do not replace them. Also, airbags
are not designed to deploy in every crash. In some
crashes safety belts are your only restraint. See
When Should an Airbag Inflate? on page 2-69.
Wearing your safety belt during a crash helps
reduce your chance of hitting things inside the
vehicle or being ejected from it. Airbags are
“supplemental restraints” to the safety belts.
Everyone in your vehicle should wear a safety
belt properly — whether or not there is an airbag
for that person.
{ WARNING:
Airbags inflate with great force, faster than the
blink of an eye. Anyone who is up against, or very
close to, any airbag when it inflates can be
seriously injured or killed. Do not sit unnecessarily
close to the airbag, as you would be if you were
sitting on the edge of your seat or leaning forward.
Safety belts help keep you in position before and
during a crash. Always wear your safety belt, even
with airbags. The driver should sit as far back as
possible while still maintaining control of the
vehicle.
Occupants should not lean on or sleep against the
door or side windows in seating positions with
roof-rail airbags.
2-65
{ WARNING:
Children who are up against, or very close to,
any airbag when it inflates can be seriously injured
or killed. Airbags plus lap-shoulder belts offer
protection for adults and older children, but not for
young children and infants. Neither the vehicle’s
safety belt system nor its airbag system is
designed for them. Young children and infants
need the protection that a child restraint system
can provide. Always secure children properly in
your vehicle. To read how, see Older Children
on page 2-35 or Infants and Young Children on
page 2-38.
2-66
There is an airbag
readiness light on the
instrument panel, which
shows the airbag symbol.
The system checks the airbag electrical system for
malfunctions. The light tells you if there is an electrical
problem. See Airbag Readiness Light on page 4-22
for more information.
Where Are the Airbags?
The right front passenger’s airbag is in the instrument
panel on the passenger’s side.
The driver’s airbag is in the middle of the steering
wheel.
2-67
{ WARNING:
If something is between an occupant and an
airbag, the airbag might not inflate properly or it
might force the object into that person causing
severe injury or even death. The path of an
inflating airbag must be kept clear. Do not put
anything between an occupant and an airbag,
and do not attach or put anything on the steering
wheel hub or on or near any other airbag
covering.
Driver Side shown, Passenger Side similar
If your vehicle has roof-rail airbags for the driver, right
front passenger, and second row outboard passengers,
they are in the ceiling above the side windows.
2-68
Never secure anything to the roof of a vehicle with
roof-rail airbags by routing a rope or tie down
through any door or window opening. If you do,
the path of an inflating roof-rail airbag will be
blocked.
When Should an Airbag Inflate?
Frontal airbags are designed to inflate in moderate to
severe frontal or near-frontal crashes to help reduce the
potential for severe injuries mainly to the driver’s or
right front passenger’s head and chest. However, they
are only designed to inflate if the impact exceeds a
predetermined deployment threshold. Deployment
thresholds are used to predict how severe a crash is
likely to be in time for the airbags to inflate and
help restrain the occupants.
Whether your frontal airbags will or should deploy is not
based on how fast your vehicle is traveling. It depends
largely on what you hit, the direction of the impact,
and how quickly your vehicle slows down.
Frontal airbags may inflate at different crash speeds.
For example:
• If the vehicle hits a stationary object, the airbags
could inflate at a different crash speed than if the
vehicle hits a moving object.
• If the vehicle hits an object that deforms, the
airbags could inflate at a different crash speed than
if the vehicle hits an object that does not deform.
• If the vehicle hits a narrow object (like a pole), the
airbags could inflate at a different crash speed
than if the vehicle hits a wide object (like a wall).
• If the vehicle goes into an object at an angle, the
airbags could inflate at a different crash speed
than if the vehicle goes straight into the object.
Thresholds can also vary with specific vehicle design.
Frontal airbags are not intended to inflate during vehicle
rollovers, rear impacts, or in many side impacts.
2-69
Your vehicle has seat position sensors which enables
the sensing system to monitor the position of the driver’s
seat and the right front passenger’s seat. Seat position
sensors provide information that is used to determine
if the airbags should deploy at a reduced level or at full
deployment.
In addition, your vehicle has dual-stage frontal airbags.
Dual-stage airbags adjust the restraint according to
crash severity. Your vehicle has electronic frontal
sensors, which help the sensing system distinguish
between a moderate frontal impact and a more severe
frontal impact. For moderate frontal impacts, dual-stage
airbags inflate at a level less than full deployment.
For more severe frontal impacts, full deployment occurs.
Your vehicle may or may not have roof-rail airbags.
See Airbag System on page 2-64. Roof-rail airbags are
intended to inflate in moderate to severe side crashes.
Roof-rail airbags will inflate if the crash severity is above
the system’s designed threshold level. The threshold
level can vary with specific vehicle design.
2-70
Roof-rail airbags are not intended to inflate in frontal
impacts, near-frontal impacts, rollovers, or rear impacts.
Both roof-rail airbags will deploy when either side of
the vehicle is struck.
In any particular crash, no one can say whether an
airbag should have inflated simply because of the
damage to a vehicle or because of what the repair costs
were. For frontal airbags, inflation is determined by
what the vehicle hits, the angle of the impact, and how
quickly the vehicle slows down. For roof-rail airbags,
deployment is determined by the location and severity of
the side impact.
What Makes an Airbag Inflate?
How Does an Airbag Restrain?
In a deployment event, the sensing system sends an
electrical signal triggering a release of gas from the
inflator. Gas from the inflator fills the airbag causing the
bag to break out of the cover and deploy. The inflator, the
airbag, and related hardware are all part of the airbag
module.
In moderate to severe frontal or near frontal collisions,
even belted occupants can contact the steering wheel
or the instrument panel. In moderate to severe side
collisions, even belted occupants can contact the inside
of the vehicle.
Frontal airbag modules are located inside the steering
wheel and instrument panel. For vehicles with roof-rail
airbags, there are airbag modules in the ceiling of the
vehicle, near the side windows that have occupant
seating positions.
Airbags supplement the protection provided by safety
belts. Frontal airbags distribute the force of the
impact more evenly over the occupant’s upper body,
stopping the occupant more gradually. Roof-rail airbags
distribute the force of the impact more evenly over
the occupant’s upper body.
But airbags would not help in many types of collisions,
primarily because the occupant’s motion is not
toward those airbags. See When Should an Airbag
Inflate? on page 2-69 for more information.
Airbags should never be regarded as anything more
than a supplement to safety belts.
2-71
What Will You See After an Airbag
Inflates?
After the frontal airbags inflate, they quickly deflate, so
quickly that some people may not even realize the
airbags inflated. Roof-rail airbags may still be at least
partially inflated for some time after they deploy.
Some components of the airbag module may be hot for
several minutes. For location of the airbag modules,
see What Makes an Airbag Inflate? on page 2-71.
The parts of the airbag that come into contact with you
may be warm, but not too hot to touch. There may
be some smoke and dust coming from the vents in the
deflated airbags. Airbag inflation does not prevent
the driver from seeing out of the windshield or being
able to steer the vehicle, nor does it prevent people
from leaving the vehicle.
2-72
{ WARNING:
When an airbag inflates, there may be dust in the
air. This dust could cause breathing problems for
people with a history of asthma or other breathing
trouble. To avoid this, everyone in the vehicle
should get out as soon as it is safe to do so.
If you have breathing problems but cannot get out
of the vehicle after an airbag inflates, then get
fresh air by opening a window or a door. If you
experience breathing problems following an airbag
deployment, you should seek medical attention.
Your vehicle has a feature that may automatically
unlock the doors (if equipped with power door locks),
turn the interior lamps on, flash the hazard warning
flashers, and turn off the radio when the airbag inflates.
You can lock the doors again by using the door lock.
The interior lamps and hazard warning flashers will
deactivate after approximately 15 minutes.
In many crashes severe enough to inflate the airbag,
windshields are broken by vehicle deformation.
Additional windshield breakage may also occur
from the right front passenger airbag.
• Airbags are designed to inflate only once. After an
airbag inflates, you will need some new parts for
the airbag system. If you do not get them, the airbag
system will not be there to help protect you in
another crash. A new system will include airbag
modules and possibly other parts. The service
manual for your vehicle covers the need to replace
other parts.
Passenger Sensing System
If the vehicle has one of the passenger airbag status
indicators pictured in the following illustrations, then the
vehicle has a passenger sensing system for the right
front passenger position. The passenger airbag status
indicator, If equipped, is visible on the instrument panel
when the vehicle is started.
In addition, if the vehicle has a passenger sensing
system for the right front passenger position, the label
on the vehicle’s sun visors refer to “ADVANCED
AIRBAGS”.
• Your vehicle has a crash sensing and diagnostic
module which records information after a crash.
See Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy on
page 8-16 and Event Data Recorders on page 8-17.
• Let only qualified technicians work on the airbag
system. Improper service can mean that the
airbag system will not work properly. See your
dealer/retailer for service.
2-73
The passenger sensing system works with sensors that
are part of the right front passenger seat. The sensors
are designed to detect the presence of a properly-seated
occupant and determine if the right front passenger
frontal airbag should be enabled (may inflate) or not.
United States
Canada
According to accident statistics, children and infants are
safer when properly restrained in a child restraint
system or infant restraint system secured in a rear
seating position.
The words ON and OFF, or the symbol for on and off,
will be visible during the system check. When the
system check is complete, either the word ON or OFF,
or the symbol for on or off will be visible. See
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator on page 4-23.
We recommend that children be secured in a rear seat,
including: an infant or a child riding in a rear-facing
child restraint; a child riding in a forward-facing child
seat; an older child riding in a booster seat; and children,
who are large enough, using safety belts.
The passenger sensing system will turn off the right
front passenger frontal airbag under certain conditions.
The driver airbag is not affected by the passenger
sensing system.
We recommend that rear-facing child restraints not be
transported in the vehicle, even if the airbag is off.
2-74
A label on your sun visor says, “Never put a rear-facing
child seat in the front.” This is because the risk to the
rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.
{ WARNING:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger airbag inflates. This is because the
back of the rear-facing child restraint would be
very close to the inflating airbag. A child in a
forward-facing child restraint can be seriously
injured or killed if the right front passenger airbag
inflates and the passenger seat is in a forward
position.
Even if the passenger sensing system has turned
off the right front passenger frontal airbag, no
system is fail-safe. No one can guarantee that
an airbag will not deploy under some unusual
circumstance, even though the airbag is turned off.
WARNING:
(Continued)
WARNING:
(Continued)
Secure rear-facing child restraints in a rear
seat, even if the airbag is off. If you secure a
forward-facing child restraint in the right front seat,
always move the front passenger seat as far back
as it will go. It is better to secure the child restraint
in a rear seat.
If your vehicle does not have a rear seat that will
accommodate a rear-facing child restraint, a rear-facing
child restraint should not be installed in the vehicle,
even if the airbag is off.
The passenger sensing system is designed to turn off
the right front passenger airbag if:
• The right front passenger seat is unoccupied.
• The system determines that an infant is present in
a rear-facing infant seat.
• The system determines that a small child is present
in a child restraint.
• The system determines that a small child is present
in a booster seat.
2-75
• A right front passenger takes his/her weight off of
the seat for a period of time.
• The right front passenger seat is occupied by a
smaller person, such as a child who has outgrown
child restraints.
• Or, if there is a critical problem with the airbag
system or the passenger sensing system.
For some children who have outgrown child restraints
and for very small adults, the passenger sensing system
may or may not turn off the right front passenger’s
frontal airbag, depending upon the person’s seating
posture and body build. Everyone in your vehicle who
has outgrown child restraints should wear a safety
belt properly — whether or not there is an airbag for that
person.
When the passenger sensing system has turned off the
right front passenger frontal airbag, the off indicator
will light and stay lit to remind you that the airbag is off.
See Passenger Airbag Status Indicator on page 4-23.
{ WARNING:
The passenger sensing system is designed to turn
on (may inflate) the right front passenger frontal airbag
anytime the system senses that a person of adult
size is sitting properly in the right front passenger seat.
When the passenger sensing system has allowed
the airbag to be enabled, the on indicator will light and
stay lit to remind you that the airbag is active.
If the airbag readiness light ever comes on and
stays on, it means that something may be wrong
with the airbag system. To help avoid injury to
yourself or others, have the vehicle serviced right
away. See Airbag Readiness Light on page 4-22
for more information, including important safety
information.
2-76
If the On Indicator is Lit for a Child
Restraint
If a child restraint has been installed and the on
indicator is lit:
1. Turn the vehicle off.
2. Remove the child restraint from the vehicle.
3. Remove any additional items from the seat such as
blankets, cushions, seat covers, seat heaters, or
seat massagers.
4. Reinstall the child restraint following the directions
provided by the child restraint manufacturer and
refer to Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front
Seat Position on page 2-60.
5. If, after reinstalling the child restraint and restarting
the vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, turn the vehicle
off. Then slightly recline the vehicle seatback and
adjust the seat cushion, if adjustable, to make sure
that the vehicle seatback is not pushing the child
restraint into the seat cushion.
Also make sure the child restraint is not trapped
under the vehicle head restraint. If this happens,
adjust the head restraint. See Head Restraints
on page 2-8.
6. Restart the vehicle.
If the on indicator is still lit, secure the child in
the child restraint in a rear seat position in
the vehicle and check with your dealer/retailer.
If no rear seat is available, do not install a child
restraint in this vehicle and check with your
dealer/retailer.
2-77
If the Off Indicator is Lit for an
Adult-Size Occupant
If this happens, use the following steps to allow the
system to detect that person and enable the right front
passenger frontal airbag:
1. Turn the vehicle off.
2. Remove any additional material from the seat, such
as blankets, cushions, seat covers, seat heaters, or
seat massagers.
3. Place the seatback in the fully upright position.
4. Have the person sit upright in the seat, centered on
the seat cushion, with legs comfortably extended.
5. Restart the vehicle and have the person remain in
this position for two to three minutes after the on
indicator is lit.
Additional Factors Affecting System
Operation
If a person of adult-size is sitting in the right front
passenger seat, but the off indicator is lit, it could be
because that person is not sitting properly in the seat.
Safety belts help keep the passenger in position on the
seat during vehicle maneuvers and braking, which
helps the passenger sensing system maintain the
passenger airbag status. See “Safety Belts” and “Child
Restraints” in the Index for additional information
about the importance of proper restraint use.
If the shoulder portion of the belt is pulled out all the
way, the child restraint locking feature will be engaged.
This may unintentionally cause the passenger sensing
2-78
system to turn the airbag off for some adult size
occupants. If this happens, let the belt go back all the
way and start again.
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle
A thick layer of additional material, such as a blanket or
cushion, or aftermarket equipment such as seat covers,
seat heaters, and seat massagers can affect how well the
passenger sensing system operates. We recommend
that you not use seat covers or other aftermarket
equipment except when approved by GM for your specific
vehicle. See Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle on page 2-80 for more information about
modifications that can affect how the system operates.
Airbags affect how the vehicle should be serviced.
There are parts of the airbag system in several places
around the vehicle. Your dealer/retailer and the
service manual have information about servicing the
vehicle and the airbag system. To purchase a service
manual, see Service Publications Ordering Information
on page 8-15.
{ WARNING:
{ WARNING:
Stowing of articles under the passenger seat or
between the passenger seat cushion and seatback
may interfere with the proper operation of the
passenger sensing system.
For up to 10 seconds after the ignition is turned off
and the battery is disconnected, an airbag can still
inflate during improper service. You can be injured
if you are close to an airbag when it inflates. Avoid
yellow connectors. They are probably part of the
airbag system. Be sure to follow proper service
procedures, and make sure the person performing
work for you is qualified to do so.
2-79
Adding Equipment to Your
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle
Q: Is there anything I might add to or change
about the vehicle that could keep the airbags
from working properly?
A: Yes. If you add things that change the vehicle’s
frame, bumper system, height, front end or side
sheet metal, they may keep the airbag system from
working properly. Changing or moving any parts
of the front seats, safety belts, the airbag sensing
and diagnostic module, steering wheel, instrument
panel, roof-rail airbag modules, ceiling headliner
or pillar garnish trim, front sensors, or airbag wiring
can affect the operation of the airbag system.
In addition, the vehicle may have a passenger
sensing system for the right front passenger
position, which includes sensors that are part of
the passenger seat. The passenger sensing system
may not operate properly if the original seat trim is
replaced with non-GM covers, upholstery or trim, or
with GM covers, upholstery or trim designed for a
different vehicle. Any object, such as an aftermarket
seat heater or a comfort enhancing pad or device,
2-80
installed under or on top of the seat fabric, could also
interfere with the operation of the passenger sensing
system. This could either prevent proper deployment
of the passenger airbag(s) or prevent the passenger
sensing system from properly turning off the
passenger airbag(s). See Passenger Sensing
System on page 2-73.
If you have any questions, call Customer
Assistance. The phone numbers and addresses
for Customer Assistance are in Step Two of
the Customer Satisfaction Procedure in this manual.
See Customer Satisfaction Procedure on page 8-2.
Q: Because I have a disability, I have to get
my vehicle modified. How can I find out whether
this will affect my airbag system?
A: If you have questions, call Customer Assistance.
The phone numbers and addresses for Customer
Assistance are in Step Two of the Customer
Satisfaction Procedure in this manual. See
Customer Satisfaction Procedure on page 8-2.
In addition, your dealer/retailer and the service manual
have information about the location of the airbag
sensors, sensing and diagnostic module and airbag
wiring.
Restraint System Check
Airbags
Checking the Restraint Systems
The airbag system does not need regularly scheduled
maintenance or replacement. Make sure the airbag
readiness light is working. See Airbag Readiness Light
on page 4-22 for more information.
Safety Belts
Now and then, check that the safety belt reminder light,
safety belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors, and
anchorages are all working properly.
Look for any other loose or damaged safety belt system
parts that might keep a safety belt system from doing
its job. See your dealer/retailer to have it repaired. Torn
or frayed safety belts may not protect you in a crash.
They can rip apart under impact forces. If a belt is torn
or frayed, get a new one right away.
Notice: If an airbag covering is damaged, opened,
or broken, the airbag may not work properly.
Do not open or break the airbag coverings. If there
are any opened or broken airbag covers, have
the airbag covering and/or airbag module replaced.
For the location of the airbag modules, see What
Makes an Airbag Inflate? on page 2-71. See
your dealer/retailer for service.
Make sure the safety belt reminder light is working.
See Safety Belt Reminders on page 4-21 for more
information.
Keep safety belts clean and dry. See Care of Safety
Belts on page 6-105.
2-81
Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash
{ WARNING:
A crash can damage the restraint systems in your
vehicle. A damaged restraint system may not
properly protect the person using it, resulting in
serious injury or even death in a crash. To help
make sure your restraint systems are working
properly after a crash, have them inspected and
any necessary replacements made as soon as
possible.
If the vehicle has been in a crash, do you need new
safety belts or LATCH system (if equipped) parts?
After a very minor crash, nothing may be necessary.
But the safety belt assemblies that were used during any
crash may have been stressed or damaged. See your
dealer/retailer to have the safety belt assemblies
inspected or replaced.
2-82
If the vehicle has the LATCH system and it was being
used during a crash, you may need new LATCH system
parts.
New parts and repairs may be necessary even if the
safety belt or LATCH system (if equipped), was
not being used at the time of the crash.
If an airbag inflates, you will need to replace airbag
system parts. See the part on the airbag system earlier
in this section.
Have the safety belt pretensioners checked if the
vehicle has been in a crash, if the airbag readiness light
stays on after the vehicle is started, or while you are
driving. See Airbag Readiness Light on page 4-22.
Section 3
Features and Controls
Keys ...............................................................3-2
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System ................3-3
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System
Operation ...................................................3-3
Doors and Locks .............................................3-5
Door Locks ....................................................3-5
Power Door Locks ..........................................3-6
Programmable Automatic Door Locks ................3-6
Rear Door Security Locks (Crew Cab) .................3-7
Lockout Protection ..........................................3-7
Rear Doors (Extended Cab) ..............................3-7
Tailgate ........................................................3-8
Windows ........................................................3-10
Manual Windows ..........................................3-10
Power Windows ............................................3-11
Sliding Rear Window .....................................3-12
Sun Visors ...................................................3-12
Theft-Deterrent Systems ..................................3-13
Content Theft-Deterrent .................................3-13
Passlock® (U.S. Only) ...................................3-14
PASS-Key® III+ Electronic Immobilizer .............3-15
PASS-Key® III+ Electronic Immobilizer
Operation (Canada Only) .............................3-15
Starting and Operating Your Vehicle ................3-16
New Vehicle Break-In ....................................3-16
Ignition Positions ..........................................3-17
Retained Accessory Power (RAP) ...................3-18
Starting the Engine .......................................3-18
Engine Coolant Heater ..................................3-20
Automatic Transmission Operation ...................3-21
Manual Transmission Operation ......................3-23
Four-Wheel Drive ..........................................3-25
Parking Brake ..............................................3-30
Shifting Into Park (Automatic Transmission) ......3-31
Shifting Out of Park (Automatic Transmission) .....3-32
Parking the Vehicle (Manual Transmission) .......3-33
Parking Over Things That Burn .......................3-33
Engine Exhaust ............................................3-34
Running the Vehicle While Parked ..................3-34
Mirrors ...........................................................3-36
Manual Rearview Mirror .................................3-36
Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror ................3-36
Compass .....................................................3-37
Outside Manual Mirrors ..................................3-38
Outside Power Mirrors ...................................3-38
Outside Convex Mirror ...................................3-39
Storage Areas ................................................3-40
Glove Box ...................................................3-40
Cupholders ..................................................3-40
Center Console Storage .................................3-40
Assist Handles .............................................3-40
Rear Storage Area ........................................3-41
Sunroof .........................................................3-42
3-1
Keys
{ WARNING:
Leaving children in a vehicle with the ignition key
is dangerous for many reasons, children or others
could be badly injured or even killed. They could
operate the power windows or other controls or
even make the vehicle move. The windows will
function with the keys in the ignition and children
could be seriously injured or killed if caught in the
path of a closing window. Do not leave the keys in
a vehicle with children.
The key can be used for the ignition, all door locks, and
the tailgate.
The key has a bar-coded key tag that the dealer/retailer
or qualified locksmith can use to make new keys.
Store this information in a safe place, not in your vehicle.
Notice: If you ever lock your keys in the vehicle,
you may have to damage the vehicle to get in.
Be sure you have spare keys.
If you are locked out of your vehicle, call the Roadside
Assistance Center. See Roadside Assistance Program
on page 8-7.
3-2
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
System
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
System Operation
See Radio Frequency Statement on page 8-18 for
information regarding Part 15 of the Federal
Communications Commission (FCC) Rules and
RSS-210/211 of Industry and Science Canada.
Vehicles with Remote Keyless Entry (RKE), transmitter
functions work up to 30 feet (9 m) away from the vehicle.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
If there is a decrease in the RKE operating range,
try this:
• Check the distance. The transmitter may be too far
from the vehicle. Stand closer during rainy or
snowy weather.
There are other conditions which can affect the
performance of the transmitter. See Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) System on page 3-3.
UNLOCK: Press to
unlock the driver door
and turn on the interior
lamps. The parking lamps
may flash and the horn
may sound.
• Check the location. Other vehicles or objects may
be blocking the signal. Take a few steps to the
left or right, hold the transmitter higher, and
try again.
• Check the transmitter’s battery. See “Battery
Replacement” later in this section.
• If the transmitter is still not working correctly,
see your dealer/retailer or a qualified technician
for service.
Press UNLOCK again within three seconds and all of
the doors unlock.
LOCK: Press to lock all the doors. The parking lamps
may flash and the horn may sound.
3-3
If a door is open or ajar when LOCK is pressed, the
horn sounds several times to let you know the doors did
not lock and the content theft-deterrent system is not
armed. Pressing LOCK again while the horn is sounding
or within three seconds after the horn stops sounding,
the doors lock but the content theft-deterrent system
does not arm until the opened door is closed.
Battery Replacement
Notice: When replacing the battery, do not touch
any of the circuitry on the transmitter. Static
from your body could damage the transmitter.
To replace the battery:
Different feedback modes can be programmed through
the Driver Information Center (DIC). See “Remote
Keyless Entry Feedback” under DIC Operation and
Displays on page 4-33.
L (Panic): Press to make the horn sound and the
headlamps and taillamps flash for up to 30 seconds.
To turn them off wait for 30 seconds, or press L again,
or start the vehicle.
Programming Transmitters to the
Vehicle
Only RKE transmitters programmed to the vehicle will
work. If a transmitter is lost or stolen, a replacement
can be purchased and programmed through your
dealer/retailer. When the replacement transmitter is
programmed to the vehicle, all remaining transmitters
must also be programmed. Any lost or stolen
transmitters no longer work once the new transmitter
is programmed. Each vehicle can have up to four
transmitters programmed to it.
3-4
1. Separate the transmitter with a flat, thin object
inserted in the slot between the covers of the
transmitter housing.
2. Remove the old battery. Do not use a metal object.
3. Insert the new battery. Replace with a CR2032
or equivalent battery.
4. Put the transmitter back together.
Doors and Locks
WARNING:
Door Locks
(Continued)
• Young children who get into unlocked vehicles
{ WARNING:
Unlocked doors can be dangerous.
• Passengers, especially children, can easily
open the doors and fall out of a moving
vehicle. When a door is locked, the handle
will not open it. The chance of being thrown
out of the vehicle in a crash is increased if the
doors are not locked. So, all passengers
should wear safety belts properly and the
doors should be locked whenever the vehicle
is driven.
WARNING:
(Continued)
•
may be unable to get out. A child can be
overcome by extreme heat and can suffer
permanent injuries or even death from heat
stroke. Always lock the vehicle whenever
leaving it.
Outsiders can easily enter through an
unlocked door when you slow down or stop
your vehicle. Locking your doors can help
prevent this from happening.
To lock or unlock the door from the outside, use the key
in the driver or front passenger door or press the
LOCK or UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitter.
To lock a door from the inside, move the manual lever
on the door forward. To unlock a door from the
inside, move the lever on the door rearward.
You will see a colored area on the lever when the door
is unlocked.
3-5
Power Door Locks
On vehicles with power
door locks, the switches
are located on the
driver and the front
passenger armrests.
Programmable Automatic Door
Locks
If the vehicle has power door locks and the remote
keyless entry system, it has an automatic lock/unlock
feature.
If the vehicle has an automatic transmission, it is
programmed from the factory to lock all doors
automatically when the shift lever is moved out of
P (Park). All the doors will unlock when the shift lever
is moved back into P (Park).
Driver Switch shown
Press L to lock all the doors at once. To unlock all the
doors, press U.
On crew cab models, use the manual door lock lever on
each rear door to lock or unlock the doors from the
rear seating areas.
3-6
If the vehicle has a manual transmission, it is
programmed from the factory to lock all the doors when
the vehicle speed is greater than 15 mph (24 km/h).
The doors will unlock when the key is removed from
the ignition.
To change the automatic door lock and unlock settings,
see “Automatic Door Locks” under DIC Operation
and Displays on page 4-33.
Rear Door Security Locks (Crew Cab)
To open a rear door when the security lock is on,
unlock the door and open the door from the outside.
If the vehicle is a crew cab model, it may have rear
door security locks. With this feature, the rear doors are
locked so they cannot be opened from the inside.
To disengage the security locks:
The rear door security lock
is located on the inside
edge of each rear
door below the security
lock label.
1. Open one of the rear doors.
2. Using the ignition key, turn the lock to the vertical
position.
3. Close the door.
4. Repeat these steps on the other rear door.
Lockout Protection
If the vehicle has power door locks, this feature protects
you from locking the key in the vehicle when the key
is in the ignition and a door is open.
If the power door lock switch is pressed when a door is
open and the key is in the ignition, all of the doors
will lock and then the driver door will unlock.
To engage the security locks:
1. Open one of the rear doors.
Rear Doors (Extended Cab)
2. Using the ignition key, turn the lock to the horizontal
position.
To open a rear door, open the front door. Then, use the
handle located on the front edge of the rear door
panel to open it. The rear doors must be closed before
closing the front door.
3. Close the door.
4. Repeat these steps on the other rear door.
3-7
Tailgate
{ WARNING:
It is extremely dangerous to ride on the tailgate,
even when the vehicle is operated at low speeds.
People riding on the tailgate can easily lose their
balance and fall in response to vehicle maneuvers.
Falling from a moving vehicle may result in serious
injuries or death. Do not allow people to ride on
the tailgate. Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in
a seat and using a safety belt properly.
Open the tailgate by pulling up on the outside handle
while pulling the tailgate down.
When the tailgate is shut, be sure it is latched securely.
On vehicles with a locking tailgate, use the ignition
key. Turn the key counterclockwise to lock the tailgate.
Turn the key clockwise to unlock the tailgate.
3-8
Removing the Tailgate
To partially lower the tailgate:
To remove the tailgate:
1. With the tailgate fully open, lift up slightly on the
entire tailgate assembly.
2. Remove the retaining
cables from both sides
of the tailgate by
pulling the clips away
from the bolt heads
while pushing the cable
bracket forward.
When the larger part
of the hole on the
bracket is over the bolt,
slide the bracket off
of the bolt.
3. With the tailgate partially down, lift up on the
passenger side and pull the tailgate toward
you, then move the tailgate to the right to release
the driver side. You can then remove the entire
tailgate assembly.
Reverse the procedure to reinstall the tailgate.
Make sure it is secure.
1. With the tailgate fully open, lift up slightly on the
entire tailgate assembly.
2. Remove the retaining
cable from the
passenger side of the
tailgate by pulling
the clip away from
the bolt head while
pushing the cable
bracket forward.
When the larger part
of the hole on the
bracket is over the bolt,
slide the bracket off
the bolt.
Tailgate Partially Down
3. Slide the lower end fitting onto the top bolt.
The tailgate will now stay in the partially opened
position.
4. Repeat Steps 2 and 3 for the driver side.
If you would like to close the tailgate, the bracket cannot
be in the partially opened position. Use the top position
on the bracket to anchor it on the bottom bolt.
3-9
Windows
{ WARNING:
Leaving children, helpless adults, or pets in a
vehicle with the windows closed is dangerous.
They can be overcome by the extreme heat and
suffer permanent injuries or even death from heat
stroke. Never leave a child, a helpless adult, or a
pet alone in a vehicle, especially with the windows
closed in warm or hot weather.
Manual Windows
On a vehicle with manual windows, use the handle on
each door to open and close each window.
3-10
Power Windows
The power window
switches for all windows
are located on the
driver door armrest.
Each passenger door
has its own switch.
{ WARNING:
Leaving children in a vehicle with the keys is
dangerous for many reasons, children or others
could be badly injured or even killed. They could
operate the power windows or other controls or
even make the vehicle move. The windows will
function and they could be seriously injured or
killed if caught in the path of a closing window.
Do not leave keys in a vehicle with children.
When there are children in the rear seat use the
window lockout button to prevent unintentional
operation of the windows.
Crew Cab Switches
shown
The power windows will work when the ignition is in
ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN or while Retained
Accessory Power (RAP) is active. See Retained
Accessory Power (RAP) on page 3-18.
Pull the front of the switch up to raise the window.
Press the front of the switch down to lower the window.
Do not hold all four power window switches down
for several seconds after the windows have been
completely lowered or raised. If the window switches
are held, it may cause a fuse to blow.
3-11
Express-Down Windows
Sliding Rear Window
The driver window has an express-down feature that
allows the window to be lowered fully without
continuously holding the switch.
Press the front of the switch past the first position to
activate the express-down mode. The express-down
mode can be canceled at any time by pulling up on the
switch.
Window Lockout
o
(Window Lockout): On crew cab vehicles with
power windows, there is also a window lockout button
located forward of the window switches. This feature
disables the passenger window switches when the
window lockout button is pressed.
To turn the lockout feature on or off, press the window
lockout button. A red band on the side of the button
can be seen when the windows are not locked out.
If the vehicle has this feature, squeeze the latch in the
center of the window and slide the glass to open it.
Be sure the latch is engaged when the window is closed.
Sun Visors
To block glare, pull the sun visor down. It can also be
detached from the center mount and moved to the
side to block glare from that direction.
Visor Vanity Mirror
The passenger side sun visor may have a mirror.
Pull down the visor to access the mirror.
3-12
Theft-Deterrent Systems
Vehicle theft is big business, especially in some cities.
This vehicle has theft-deterrent features, however,
they do not make it impossible to steal.
Content Theft-Deterrent
If your vehicle has
the Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) system,
the vehicle has a content
theft-deterrent alarm
system.
If a locked door is not opened using the RKE transmitter,
or by OnStar®, the pre-alarm will go off. If the engine
is not started or unlock not pressed within 10 seconds,
the front turn signal lamps will flash for two minutes,
and the horn will sound for two minutes, then will turn off
to save the battery power.
Remember, the theft-deterrent system will not activate if
you lock the doors with a key, the manual door lock,
or power door lock switch. The system can only
be activated using the RKE transmitter, or by OnStar®.
See the OnStar Owner’s Guide for additional
information. You should also remember that you can
start your vehicle with the correct ignition key if the alarm
has been set off.
Here is how to avoid setting off the alarm by accident:
To activate the content theft-deterrent system:
1. Close all the doors.
2. Lock the doors with the RKE transmitter.
The security light, located on the instrument panel
cluster, will flash.
If the lock button on the RKE transmitter is pressed, but
a door is open, the horn will chirp six times. Press
the lock button again, within three seconds, and the
doors will lock. Close the open door and the system will
be activated.
• If you do not want to activate the theft-deterrent
system, the vehicle should be locked with the
door key after the doors are closed.
• Always unlock a door with the RKE transmitter.
Unlocking a door any other way will set off the
alarm.
If you set off the alarm by accident, you can turn off the
alarm by pressing unlock on the RKE transmitter.
The alarm will not stop if you try to unlock a door any
other way.
3-13
Testing the Alarm
Passlock® (U.S. Only)
To test the alarm:
Passlock® is a passive theft-deterrent system that
enables fuel if the vehicle is started with a valid key.
If an incorrect key is used or the ignition lock cylinder is
tampered with, the fuel system is disabled and the
vehicle does not start.
1. From inside the vehicle, activate the system by
locking the doors with the RKE transmitter.
2. Unlock the door with the manual door lock and
open the door. This should set off the alarm.
3. To turn the alarm off, press the unlock button on
the RKE transmitter or start the engine.
The security light turns off approximately five seconds
after the engine is started. See Security Light on
page 4-32.
If the alarm does not sound when it should but the lights
flash, check to see if the horn works. The horn fuse
may be blown. To replace the fuse, see Fuses and
Circuit Breakers on page 6-111.
If the engine stalls and the security light flashes, wait
about 10 minutes until the light stops flashing before
trying to restart the engine. Release the key from
START as soon as the engine starts.
If the alarm does not sound or the front turn
signal lamps do not flash, see your dealer/retailer
for service.
If the engine does not start after three tries, the vehicle
needs service.
If the engine is running and the security light comes on,
the engine restarts if you turn the engine off. However,
the Passlock® system is not working properly and
must be serviced by your dealer/retailer. The vehicle is
not protected by Passlock® at this time. See your
dealer/retailer for service.
In an emergency, call the Roadside Assistance Center.
See Roadside Assistance Program on page 8-7.
Do not leave the key or device that disarms or
deactivates the theft deterrent system in the vehicle.
3-14
PASS-Key® III+ Electronic
Immobilizer
See Radio Frequency Statement on page 8-18 for
information regarding Part 15 of the Federal
Communications Commission (FCC) Rules and
RSS-210/211 of Industry and Science Canada.
PASS-Key® III+ Electronic
Immobilizer Operation
(Canada Only)
This vehicle has a passive theft-deterrent system.
The system is automatically armed when the key is
removed from the ignition.
The system is automatically disarmed when the key is
turned to ON/RUN.
You do not have to manually arm or disarm the system.
The security light comes on if there is a problem with
arming or disarming the theft-deterrent system.
The key uses a transponder that matches an immobilizer
control unit in the vehicle. Only the correct key starts
the vehicle. If the key is ever damaged, the vehicle may
not start.
When trying to start the vehicle, if the engine does not
start and the security light comes on, there may be
a problem with the theft-deterrent system. Turn the
ignition off and try again.
If the engine still does not start, and the key appears to
be undamaged, try another ignition key. Check the
fuse. See Fuses and Circuit Breakers on page 6-111.
If the engine still does not start with the other key, the
vehicle needs service. If the vehicle does start, the
first key may be faulty. See your dealer/retailer who can
service the theft-deterrent system and have a new
key made.
It is possible for the theft-deterrent system decoder to
learn the transponder value of a new or replacement
key. Up to 10 keys can be programmed for the vehicle.
The following procedure is for programming additional
keys only.
Canadian Owners: If the keys are lost or damaged,
only a dealer/retailer can service the theft-deterrent
system to have new ones made. Two current driver’s
keys are required to program additional keys.
To program a new key:
1. Verify that the new key has PK3+ stamped on it.
2. Insert the current driver’s key in the ignition
and start the engine. If the engine does not start
see your dealer/retailer for service.
3-15
3. After the engine has started, turn the key to
LOCK/OFF, and remove the key.
4. Insert the second current driver’s key in the ignition
and start the engine within ten seconds of removing
the previous key. If the engine does not start see
your dealer/retailer for service.
5. After the engine has started, turn the key to
LOCK/OFF, and remove the key. Insert the key to
be programmed and turn it to ON/RUN within
ten seconds of removing the previous key.
The security light turns off once the key has been
programmed.
6. Repeat the Steps 1 through 5 if additional keys are
to be programmed.
If the security light comes on and stays on while driving,
the engine will restart if you turn it off. However, the
theft-deterrent system is not working properly and must
be serviced by your dealer/retailer. The vehicle is
not protected by the theft-deterrent system at this time.
In an emergency, contact Roadside Assistance.
See Roadside Assistance Program on page 8-7.
Do not leave the key or device that disarms or
deactivates the theft deterrent system in the vehicle.
Starting and Operating
Your Vehicle
New Vehicle Break-In
Notice: The vehicle does not need an elaborate
break-in. But it will perform better in the long run
if you follow these guidelines:
• Keep your speed at 55 mph (88 km/h) or less for
the first 500 miles (805 km).
• Do not drive at any one constant speed, fast or
slow, for the first 500 miles (805 km). Do not
make full-throttle starts. Avoid downshifting to
brake or slow the vehicle.
• Avoid making hard stops for the first 200 miles
(322 km) or so. During this time the new brake
linings are not yet broken in. Hard stops with
new linings can mean premature wear and
earlier replacement. Follow this breaking-in
guideline every time you get new brake linings.
• Do not tow a trailer during break-in. See Towing
a Trailer on page 5-48 for the trailer towing
capabilities of the vehicle and more information.
Following break-in, engine speed and load can
be gradually increased.
3-16
Ignition Positions
The ignition switch has
four different positions.
On vehicles with an automatic transmission, the shift
lever must be in P (Park) to turn the ignition switch
to LOCK/OFF.
The steering can bind with the wheels turned off center.
If this happens, move the steering wheel from right to
left while turning the key to ACC/ACCESSORY.
If this doesn’t work, then the vehicle needs service.
(B) ACC/ACCESSORY: This is the position in which
you can operate the electrical accessories or items
plugged into the accessory power outlets. On automatic
transmission vehicles, this position unlocks the
ignition. On manual transmission vehicles, it unlocks the
ignition and steering wheel. Use this position if the
vehicle must be pushed or towed.
To shift out of P (Park), turn the ignition to ON/RUN and
apply the regular brake pedal.
Notice: Using a tool to force the key to turn in the
ignition could cause damage to the switch or break
the key. Use the correct key, make sure it is all the
way in, and turn it only with your hand. If the key
cannot be turned by hand, see your dealer/retailer.
(A) LOCK/OFF: This position locks the ignition. It also
locks the transmission on automatic transmission
vehicles. It locks the steering wheel on manual
transmission vehicles. The key can on be removed
in LOCK/OFF.
(C) ON/RUN: This position can be used to operate
the electrical accessories and to display some
instrument panel cluster warning and indicator lights.
The switch stays in this position when the engine
is running. The transmission is also unlocked in this
position on automatic transmission vehicles.
If you leave the key in the ACC/ACCESSORY or
ON/RUN position with the engine off, the battery could
be drained. You may not be able to start your vehicle
if the battery is allowed to drain for an extended period
of time.
3-17
START (D): This is the position that starts the engine.
When the engine starts, release the key. The ignition
switch returns to ON/RUN for driving.
Starting the Engine
A warning tone will sound when the driver door is
opened, the ignition is in ACC/ACCESSORY or
LOCK/OFF and the key is in the ignition.
Automatic Transmission
Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
These vehicle accessories can be used for up to
20 minutes after the engine is turned off:
• Audio System
• Wipers
• Power Windows
These features work when the key is in ON/RUN or
ACC/ACCESSORY. Once the key is turned from
ON/RUN to LOCK/OFF, power to these features
continue to work for up to 20 minutes or until a door
is opened.
3-18
Place the transmission in the proper gear.
Move the shift lever to P (Park) or N (Neutral).
The engine will not start in any other position.
To restart the vehicle when it is already moving,
use N (Neutral) only.
Notice: Do not try to shift to P (Park) if the vehicle
is moving. If you do, you could damage the
transmission. Shift to P (Park) only when the vehicle
is stopped.
Manual Transmission
The shift lever should be in N (Neutral) and the parking
brake engaged. Hold the clutch pedal down to the
floor and start the engine. The vehicle will not start if the
clutch pedal is not all the way down.
Starting Procedure
1. With your foot off the accelerator pedal, turn the
ignition key to START. When the engine starts,
let go of the key. The idle speed will go down as the
engine warms. Do not race the engine immediately
after starting it. Operate the engine and
transmission gently to allow the oil to warm up and
lubricate all moving parts.
The vehicle has a Computer-Controlled Cranking
System. This feature assists in starting the
engine and protects components. If the ignition key
is turned to the START position, and then
released when the engine begins cranking, the
engine will continue cranking for a few seconds or
until the vehicle starts. If the engine does not
start and the key is held in START for many
seconds, cranking will be stopped after 15 seconds
to prevent cranking motor damage. To prevent
gear damage, this system also prevents cranking if
the engine is already running. Engine cranking
can be stopped by turning the ignition switch
to ACC/ACCESSORY or LOCK/OFF.
2. If the engine does not start after 5-10 seconds,
especially in very cold weather (below 0°F or
−18°C), it could be flooded with too much gasoline.
Push the accelerator pedal all the way to the
floor and holding it there as you hold the key in
START for a maximum of 15 seconds. Wait at least
15 seconds between each try, to allow the
cranking motor to cool. When the engine starts,
let go of the key and accelerator. If the vehicle starts
briefly but then stops again, repeat the procedure.
This clears the extra gasoline from the engine.
Do not race the engine immediately after starting it.
Operate the engine and transmission gently until
the oil warms up and lubricates all moving parts.
Notice: The engine is designed to work with the
electronics in the vehicle. If you add electrical parts
or accessories, you could change the way the
engine operates. Before adding electrical equipment,
check with your dealer/retailer. If you do not, the
engine might not perform properly. Any resulting
damage would not be covered by the vehicle
warranty.
Notice: Cranking the engine for long periods of
time, by returning the key to the START position
immediately after cranking has ended, can overheat
and damage the cranking motor, and drain the
battery. Wait at least 15 seconds between each try,
to let the cranking motor cool down.
3-19
Engine Coolant Heater
The engine coolant heater can provide easier starting
and better fuel economy during engine warm-up in cold
weather conditions at or below 0°F (−18°C). Vehicles
with an engine coolant heater should be plugged
in at least four hours before starting. An internal
thermostat in the plug-end of the cord may exist
which will prevent engine coolant heater operation at
temperatures above 0° F (−18°C).
To Use the Engine Coolant Heater
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Open the hood and unwrap the electrical cord.
The cord is located in the engine compartment
behind the underhood fuse block on the driver side
of the vehicle.
3. Plug it into a normal, grounded 110-volt AC outlet.
3-20
{ WARNING:
Plugging the cord into an ungrounded outlet could
cause an electrical shock. Also, the wrong kind of
extension cord could overheat and cause a fire.
You could be seriously injured. Plug the cord
into a properly grounded three-prong 110-volt
AC outlet. If the cord will not reach, use a
heavy-duty three-prong extension cord rated for
at least 15 amps.
4. Before starting the engine, be sure to unplug and
store the cord to prevent damage.
The length of time the heater should remain plugged in
depends on several factors. Ask a dealer/retailer in
the area where you will be parking the vehicle for the
best advice on this.
Automatic Transmission Operation
{ WARNING:
The vehicle has a shift lever on the steering column.
It features an electronic shift position indicator within the
instrument cluster. This display is powered anytime
the shift lever is capable of being moved out of P (Park).
This means that if the ignition is turned off, but not in
LOCK/OFF, there will be a small current drain on
the battery which could discharge the battery over a
period of time. If you need to leave the key in the ignition
but not in LOCK/OFF for an extended period, it is
recommended that you disconnect the battery cable
from the battery to prevent discharging the battery.
There are several different positions for the shift lever.
P (Park): This position locks the rear wheels. It is
the best position to use when you start the engine
because the vehicle cannot move easily.
It is dangerous to get out of the vehicle if the shift
lever is not fully in P (Park) with the parking brake
firmly set. The vehicle can roll.
Do not leave the vehicle when the engine is
running unless you have to. If you have left the
engine running, the vehicle can move suddenly.
You or others could be injured. To be sure the
vehicle will not move, even when you are on fairly
level ground, always set the parking brake and
move the shift lever to P (Park). See Shifting Into
Park (Automatic Transmission) on page 3-31.
If you are pulling a trailer, see Towing a Trailer on
page 5-48.
Make sure the shift lever is fully in P (Park) before
starting the engine. The vehicle has an automatic
transmission shift lock control system. You must fully
apply the brake pedal before you can shift from P (Park)
when the ignition key is in ON/RUN. If you cannot
shift out of P (Park), ease pressure on the shift lever by
pushing the shift lever all the way into P (Park) as
you maintain brake application. Then move the shift
lever into another gear. See Shifting Out of Park
(Automatic Transmission) on page 3-32.
3-21
R (Reverse): Use this gear to back up.
Notice: Shifting to R (Reverse) while the vehicle is
moving forward could damage the transmission.
The repairs would not be covered by the vehicle
warranty. Shift to R (Reverse) only after the vehicle
is stopped.
To rock your vehicle back and forth to get out of snow,
ice, or sand without damaging the transmission, see
If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snow on
page 5-31.
N (Neutral): In this position, the engine does not
connect with the wheels. To restart the engine when the
vehicle is are already moving, use N (Neutral) only.
{ WARNING:
Shifting into a drive gear while the engine is
running at high speed is dangerous. Unless your
foot is firmly on the brake pedal, the vehicle could
move very rapidly. You could lose control and hit
people or objects. Do not shift into a drive gear
while the engine is running at high speed.
3-22
Notice: Shifting out of P (Park) or N (Neutral) with
the engine running at high speed may damage
the transmission. The repairs would not be covered
by the vehicle warranty. Be sure the engine is
not running at high speed when shifting the vehicle.
D (Drive): This position is for normal driving. It provides
the best fuel economy. If you need more power for
passing, and you are:
• Going less than about 35 mph (55 km/h), push the
accelerator pedal about halfway down.
• Going about 35 mph (55 km/h) or more, push the
accelerator all the way down.
The transmission will shift down to the next gear and
the vehicle will have more power.
Downshifting the transmission in slippery road conditions
could result in skidding, see “Skidding” under Loss of
Control on page 5-12.
3 (Third): This position is also used for normal driving.
However, it reduces vehicle speed more than D (Drive)
without using the brakes. You might choose 3 (Third)
instead of D (Drive) when driving on hilly, winding roads,
or when towing a trailer, so there is less shifting
between gears and when going down a steep hill.
Manual Transmission Operation
This is your shift pattern.
2 (Second): This position reduces vehicle speed even
more than 3 (Third) without using the brakes. You can
use 2 (Second) to help control vehicle speed on
steep mountain roads, but then you would also want to
use the brakes off and on.
1 (First): This position reduces vehicle speed even
more than 2 (Second) without using the brakes. You can
use it on very steep hills, or in deep snow or mud.
If the shift lever is put in 1 (First) while the vehicle is
moving forward, the transmission will not shift into first
gear until the vehicle is going slowly enough.
Notice: Spinning the tires or holding the vehicle
in one place on a hill using only the accelerator
pedal may damage the transmission. The repair will
not be covered by the vehicle warranty. If you
are stuck, do not spin the tires. When stopping on a
hill, use the brakes to hold the vehicle in place.
Here is how to operate the manual transmission:
1 (First): Press the clutch pedal and shift into 1 (First).
Then, slowly let up on the clutch pedal as you slowly
press down on the accelerator pedal.
You can shift into 1 (First) when you are going less than
20 mph (30 km/h). If you have come to a complete
stop and it is hard to shift into 1 (First), put the shift lever
in Neutral and let up on the clutch. Then press the
clutch pedal back down and shift into 1 (First).
2 (Second): Press the clutch pedal as you let up on the
accelerator pedal and shift into 2 (Second). Then, slowly
let up on the clutch pedal as you press the accelerator
pedal.
3-23
3 (Third), 4 (Fourth) and 5 (Fifth): Shift into 3 (Third),
4 (Fourth) and 5 (Fifth) the same way you do for
2 (Second). Slowly let up on the clutch pedal as you
press the accelerator pedal.
To stop, let up on the accelerator pedal and press the
brake pedal. Just before the vehicle stops, press the
clutch pedal and the brake pedal, and shift to Neutral.
Up-Shift Light
This light will show you
when to shift to the next
higher gear for best
fuel economy.
Neutral: Use this position when you start or idle the
engine.
R (Reverse): To back up, press the clutch pedal.
After the vehicle stops, shift into R (Reverse). Slowly let
up on the clutch pedal as you press the accelerator
pedal. If it is hard to shift, let the shift lever return
to Neutral and release the clutch pedal. Then press
the clutch again and shift into R (Reverse). Do not
attempt to shift into 5 (Fifth) prior to shifting into
R (Reverse). The transmission has a lock out feature
which prevents a 5 (Fifth) gear to R (Reverse) gear shift.
Notice: Shifting to R (Reverse) while the vehicle
is moving forward could damage the transmission.
The repairs would not be covered by the vehicle
warranty. Shift to R (Reverse) only after the vehicle
is stopped.
Use R (Reverse), along with the parking brake, for
parking the vehicle.
3-24
When this light comes on, you can shift to the next
higher gear if weather, road and traffic conditions permit.
For the best fuel economy, accelerate slowly and shift
when the light comes on.
While you accelerate, it is normal for the light to go on
and off if you quickly change the position of the
accelerator. Ignore the shift light when you downshift.
If the vehicle has four-wheel drive and has a manual
transmission, disregard the shift light when the transfer
case is in four-wheel low.
Shift Speeds
{ WARNING:
If you skip a gear when you downshift, you could
lose control of the vehicle. You could injure
yourself or others. Do not shift down more than
one gear at a time when you downshift.
Four-Wheel Drive
If the vehicle has four-wheel drive, you can send the
engine’s driving power to all four wheels for extra
traction. To get the best performance out of four-wheel
drive, you must be familiar with its operation. Read
this section before using four-wheel drive. You should
use two-wheel-drive high for most normal driving
conditions.
Notice: Driving on clean, dry pavement in
four-wheel drive for an extended period of time can
cause premature wear on the vehicle’s powertrain.
Do not drive on clean, dry pavement in Four-Wheel
Drive for extended periods of time.
Notice: If the vehicle has four-wheel drive and the
different size spare tire is installed on the vehicle,
do not drive in four-wheel drive until you can have
your flat tire repaired and/or replaced. You could
damage the vehicle, and the repair costs would not
be covered by your warranty. Never use four-wheel
drive when the different size spare tire is installed on
the vehicle.
Notice: If the vehicle has four-wheel drive and the
compact spare tire is installed on the vehicle, do not
drive in four-wheel drive until you can have the flat
tire repaired and/or replaced. You could damage the
vehicle, and the repair costs would not be covered by
your warranty. Never use four-wheel drive when the
compact spare tire is installed on the vehicle.
The transfer case buttons are located to the right of the
steering wheel on the instrument panel.
3-25
Recommended Transfer Case Settings
Driving Conditions
Normal
Severe
Extreme
Vehicle in Tow*
Transfer Case Settings
2
m
4
m
4
n
YES
YES
YES
YES
*See Recreational Vehicle Towing on page 5-41 or
Towing Your Vehicle on page 5-41 for further
information.
Shifting into Four-Wheel Low will turn Traction Control
and StabiliTrak® off. See Traction Control System (TCS)
on page 5-8 and StabiliTrak® System on page 5-6 for
more information.
Use these buttons to shift into and out of four-wheel
drive. You can choose from the following:
2 m (Two-Wheel High): This setting is for driving in
most street and highway situations. The front axle is not
engaged in two-wheel drive.
3-26
{ WARNING:
N
Shifting the transfer case to Neutral can cause
the vehicle to roll even if the transmission is in
P (Park), or if you have a manual transmission,
even if you are in gear. You or someone else
could be seriously injured. Be sure to set the
parking brake before placing the transfer case in
Neutral. See Parking Brake on page 3-30.
N (Neutral): Shift the vehicle’s transfer case to
N (Neutral) only when towing the vehicle.
4 m (Four-Wheel High): This setting engages the front
axle to help drive the vehicle. Use four-wheel high
when you need extra traction, such as on snowy or icy
roads, or in most off-road situations.
4 n (Four-Wheel Low): This setting also engages the
front axle to give you extra traction. It sends the maximum
power to all four wheels. You might choose four-wheel
low if you were driving off-road in sand, mud, or deep
snow and while climbing or descending steep hills.
Shifting into Four-Wheel Low will turn Traction Control
and StabiliTrak® off. See Traction Control System (TCS)
on page 5-8 and StabiliTrak® System on page 5-6 for
more information.
Indicator lights in the buttons show you which setting you
are in. The indicator lights will come on briefly when you
turn on the ignition and one will stay on the selected
setting. If the lights do not come on, you should take the
vehicle in for service. An indicator light will flash while
shifting. It will stay on when the shift is completed.
If the transfer case does not shift, it will return to the last
chosen setting.
Shifting from Two-Wheel High to
Four-Wheel High
Press and release the Four-Wheel High button.
This can be done at any speed, and the front axle will
lock automatically.
Shifting from Four-Wheel High to
Two-Wheel High
Press and release the Two-Wheel High button.
This can be done at any speed, and the front axle will
unlock automatically.
It is normal to hear and feel the vehicle’s transfer
case shift into Four-Wheel High. If you shift with the
vehicle stopped, the indicator light may still flash slowly.
It may be necessary to shift the transmission
momentarily into R (Reverse) and D (Drive), for an
automatic transmission, or R (Reverse) and 1 (First) for
a manual transmission to have the light stop flashing.
3-27
Shifting from Two-Wheel High or
Four-Wheel High to Four-Wheel Low
The preferred method for shifting out of four-wheel
low is to have your vehicle moving 1 to 2 mph
(1.6 to 3.2 km/h).
To shift from Two-Wheel High or Four-Wheel High to
Four-Wheel Low, the vehicle must be stopped or moving
less than 3 mph (5 km/h) with the transmission in
N (Neutral) for an automatic transmission or the clutch
pedal pressed for a manual transmission. The preferred
method for shifting into Four-Wheel Low is to have
your vehicle moving 1 to 2 mph (1.6 to 3.2 km/h).
Press and release the Four-Wheel High or Two-Wheel
High button. You must wait for the Four-Wheel High
or Two-Wheel High indicator light to stop flashing and
stay on before shifting the transmission into gear or
releasing the clutch pedal.
Press and release the Four-Wheel Low button.
You must wait for the Four-Wheel Low indicator light
to stop flashing and stay on before shifting the
transmission into gear or releasing the clutch pedal.
If the Four-Wheel Low button is pressed when the
vehicle is in gear and/or moving faster than 3 mph
(5 km/h), the four-wheel low indicator light will flash for
30 seconds and not complete the shift.
Shifting from Four-Wheel Low to
Two-Wheel High or Four-Wheel High
To shift from Four-Wheel Low to Two-Wheel High or
Four-Wheel High, the vehicle must be stopped or
moving less than 3 mph (5 km/h) with the transmission
in N (Neutral) for an automatic transmission or the
clutch pedal pressed for a manual transmission.
3-28
If the Four-Wheel High or Two-Wheel High button is
pressed when the vehicle is in gear and/or moving
faster than 3 mph (5 km/h), the Four-Wheel High or
Two Wheel High indicator light will flash for 30 seconds
but not complete the shift.
Shifting to Neutral
Use N (Neutral) when you plan to tow the vehicle.
See Recreational Vehicle Towing on page 5-41 for towing
instructions. To shift the transfer case into N (Neutral)
do the following:
1. Set the parking brake.
2. Start the vehicle.
3. Press the regular brake pedal and shift the
transmission in N (Neutral), or press in the clutch
for vehicles with a manual transmission.
4. Shift the transfer case to Two-Wheel High.
Shifting Out of Neutral
5. Press and hold the Two-Wheel High and
Four-Wheel Low buttons at the same time for
10 seconds. The N (Neutral) light will come on when
the transfer case shift to N (Neutral) is complete.
After towing the vehicle, you will have to shift out of
N (Neutral) in order to drive. To shift out of N (Neutral),
do the following:
6. Press and hold the regular brake pedal and shift
the transmission to R (Reverse) for one second,
then shift the transmission to D (Drive) for
one second, or 1 (First) for vehicles with manual
transmissions, and let out the clutch to insure
the transfer case is in N (Neutral). If the transfer
case is not in N (Neutral), repeat this procedure
starting at Step 3.
7. Turn the engine off by turning the key to
ACC/ACCESSORY.
8. Place the transmission shift lever in P (Park),
or 1 (First) for vehicles that have a manual
transmission.
9. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF.
1. Set the parking brake and apply the regular brake
pedal.
2. Start a vehicle with an automatic transmission in
P (Park). Use 1 (First) for vehicles with a manual
transmission.
3. Shift the transmission to N (Neutral), or press the
clutch pedal for vehicles with a manual
transmission.
4. Press the button for the desired transfer case shift
position (Two-Wheel High, Four-Wheel High, or
Four-Wheel Low).
5. After the transfer case has shifted out of N (Neutral),
the indicator light will go out.
6. Release the parking brake.
7. Shift the transmission to the desired position.
3-29
Parking Brake
The parking brake pedal is
located to the left of the
brake pedal, near the
driver door.
To set the parking brake, hold the brake pedal down,
then push the parking brake pedal down to its
fully-applied position.
A chime will activate and the brake warning light,
located on the instrument panel, will flash when the
parking brake is applied and the vehicle is moving at
least 3 mph (5 km/h) for at least three seconds.
The chime will deactivate and the light will turn off
when the parking brake is set and the vehicle is moving
below 3 mph (5 km/h). See Brake System Warning
Light on page 4-25.
To release the parking brake, hold the regular brake
pedal down. Pull the bottom edge of the lever, located
above the parking brake pedal, with the parking brake
symbol, directly rearward to release the parking brake.
If the ignition is on when the parking brake is released,
the brake system warning light will go off.
Notice: Driving with the parking brake on can
overheat the brake system and cause premature
wear or damage to brake system parts. Make sure
that the parking brake is fully released and the brake
warning light is off before driving.
If you are towing a trailer and are parking on any hill,
see Towing a Trailer on page 5-48.
3-30
Shifting Into Park
(Automatic Transmission)
{ WARNING:
It can be dangerous to get out of the vehicle if the
shift lever is not fully in P (Park) with the parking
brake firmly set. The vehicle can roll. If you have
left the engine running, the vehicle can move
suddenly. You or others could be injured. To be
sure the vehicle will not move, even when you are
on fairly level ground, use the steps that follow.
If you are pulling a trailer, see Towing a Trailer on
page 5-48.
1. Hold the brake pedal down with your right foot and
set the parking brake.
See Parking Brake on page 3-30 for more
information.
{ WARNING:
If you have four-wheel drive, the vehicle will be free
to roll — even if the shift lever is in P (Park) — if the
transfer case is in Neutral. So, be sure the transfer
case is in a drive gear, two-wheel high (2H) or
four-wheel high (4H) or four-wheel low (4L) — not in
Neutral.
2. Move the shift lever into P (Park) by pulling the
lever toward you and moving it up as far as it
will go.
3. Turn the ignition key to LOCK/OFF.
4. Remove the key and take it with you. If you can
leave the vehicle with the key, the vehicle is in
P (Park).
3-31
Leaving the Vehicle With the Engine
Running (Automatic Transmission)
{ WARNING:
It can be dangerous to leave the vehicle with the
engine running. The vehicle could move suddenly
if the shift lever is not fully in P (Park) with the
parking brake firmly set. And, if you leave the
vehicle with the engine running, it could overheat
and even catch fire. You or others could be
injured. Do not leave the vehicle with the engine
running.
If you have to leave the vehicle with the engine running,
be sure the vehicle is in P (Park) and the parking
brake is firmly set before you leave it. After you have
moved the shift lever into P (Park), hold the regular
brake pedal down. Then, see if you can move the shift
lever away from P (Park) without first pulling it toward
you. If you can, the shift lever was not fully locked
into P (Park).
3-32
Torque Lock (Automatic Transmission)
If you are parking on a hill and you do not shift the
transmission into P (Park) properly, the weight of the
vehicle may put too much force on the parking pawl in
the transmission. You may find it difficult to pull the
shift lever out of P (Park). This is called torque lock.
To prevent torque lock, set the parking brake and then
shift into P (Park) properly before you leave the
driver seat. To find out how, see Shifting Into Park
(Automatic Transmission) on page 3-31.
When you are ready to drive, move the shift lever out of
P (Park) before you release the parking brake.
If torque lock does occur, you may need to have another
vehicle push yours a little uphill to take some of the
pressure from the parking pawl in the transmission,
so you can pull the shift lever out of P (Park).
Shifting Out of Park
(Automatic Transmission)
The vehicle has an automatic transmission shift lock
control system. You have to fully apply the brake pedal
before you can shift from P (Park) when the ignition
is ON/RUN. See Automatic Transmission Operation on
page 3-21.
The shift lock control system is designed to do the
following:
• Prevent the ignition key from being removed unless
the shift lever is in P (Park).
• Prevent movement of the shift lever out of P (Park),
unless the ignition is in ON/RUN and the brake
pedal is applied.
The shift lock control system is always functional
except in the case of a dead battery or low voltage
(less than 9 V) battery.
If the vehicle has an uncharged battery or a battery with
low voltage, try charging or jump starting the battery.
See Jump Starting on page 6-43 for more information.
Parking the Vehicle
(Manual Transmission)
If the vehicle has a manual transmission, before you get
out of the vehicle, move the shift lever into R (Reverse),
and firmly apply the parking brake. Once the shift
lever has been placed into R (Reverse) with the clutch
pedal pressed in, turn the ignition key to LOCK/OFF,
remove the key and release the clutch.
If you are parking on a hill, or if the vehicle is pulling a
trailer, see Towing a Trailer on page 5-48.
Parking Over Things That Burn
To shift out of P (Park) use the following:
1. Apply the brake pedal.
{ WARNING:
2. Move the shift lever to the desired position.
If you still are unable to shift out of P (Park):
1. Ease the pressure on the shift lever.
2. While holding down the brake pedal, push the shift
lever all the way into P (Park)
Things that can burn could touch hot exhaust
parts under the vehicle and ignite. Do not park
over papers, leaves, dry grass, or other things that
can burn.
3. Move the shift lever to the desired position.
If you are still having a problem shifting, then have the
vehicle serviced.
3-33
Engine Exhaust
WARNING:
{ WARNING:
Engine exhaust contains Carbon Monoxide (CO)
which cannot be seen or smelled. Exposure to CO
can cause unconsciousness and even death.
Exhaust may enter the vehicle if:
• The vehicle idles in areas with poor ventilation
(parking garages, tunnels, deep snow that
may block underbody airflow or tail pipes).
• The exhaust smells or sounds strange or
different.
• The exhaust system leaks due to corrosion
or damage.
• The vehicle’s exhaust system has been
modified, damaged or improperly repaired.
• There are holes or openings in the vehicle
body from damage or after-market
modifications that are not completely sealed.
WARNING:
(Continued)
(Continued)
If unusual fumes are detected or if it is suspected
that exhaust is coming into the vehicle:
• Drive it only with the windows
completely down.
• Have the vehicle repaired immediately.
Never park the vehicle with the engine running in
an enclosed area such as a garage or a building
that has no fresh air ventilation.
Running the Vehicle While Parked
It is better not to park with the engine running. But if you
ever have to, here are some things to know.
{ WARNING:
Idling a vehicle in an enclosed area with poor
ventilation is dangerous. Engine exhaust may
enter the vehicle. Engine exhaust contains Carbon
WARNING:
3-34
(Continued)
WARNING:
(Continued)
Monoxide (CO) which cannot be seen or smelled.
It can cause unconsciousness and even death.
Never run the engine in an enclosed area that has
no fresh air ventilation. For more information,
see Engine Exhaust on page 3-34.
{ WARNING:
It can be dangerous to get out of the vehicle if
the automatic transmission shift lever is not fully
in P (Park) with the parking brake firmly set.
The vehicle can roll. Do not leave the vehicle
when the engine is running unless you have to.
If you have left the engine running, the vehicle can
move suddenly. You or others could be injured.
To be sure the vehicle will not move, even when it
is on fairly level ground, always set the parking
brake and move the automatic transmission shift
lever to P (Park), or the manual transmission shift
lever to Neutral.
{ WARNING:
Four-wheel drive vehicles with the transfer case
in N (Neutral) will allow the vehicle to roll, even if
the automatic transmission shift lever is in
P (Park). So, be sure the transfer case is in a
drive gear — not in N (Neutral). Always set the
parking brake.
Follow the proper steps to be sure the vehicle will not
move. See Shifting Into Park (Automatic Transmission)
on page 3-31.
If pulling a trailer, see Towing a Trailer on page 5-48.
3-35
Mirrors
Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror
Manual Rearview Mirror
The vehicle may have an automatic dimming inside
rearview mirror. Automatic dimming reduces the glare of
lights from behind the vehicle.
Hold the inside rearview mirror in the center to move it
for a clearer view of behind your vehicle. Adjust the
mirror to avoid glare from the headlamps behind you.
Push the tab forward for daytime use and pull it for
nighttime use.
Vehicles with OnStar® have three additional control
buttons located at the bottom of the mirror. See
your dealer/retailer for more information on the system
and how to subscribe to OnStar. See the OnStar ®
owners guide for more information about the services
OnStar provides.
Adjust this type of mirror to avoid glare from the
headlamps behind you by turning the knob
counterclockwise for nighttime driving and clockwise for
daytime driving.
Cleaning the Mirror
Do not spray glass cleaner directly on the mirror. Use a
soft towel dampened with water.
3-36
The mirror may also have OnStar® and/or a compass
and outside temperature display.
Control buttons for the OnStar® system are at the
bottom of the mirror. See the OnStar® owners guide for
more information about the services OnStar® provides.
See Compass on page 3-37 for more information
about the compass display. See “Temperature Display”
after, for more information about the outside
temperature display.
AUTO/ ( / O (On/Off): Press and hold AUTO / ( for
about three seconds or depending on the mirror,
press O to turn automatic dimming on or off.
The automatic dimming feature comes on and the
indicator light illuminates each time the vehicle is
started.
Temperature Display
Compass
Y b / O (On/Off): Press Y b or depending on the
mirror, press O to turn the display on or off.
Compass Operation
Press Y b or depending on the mirror, press O once to
To adjust between Fahrenheit and Celsius:
turn the display on or off.
1. Press and hold Y b / O for a few seconds.
The current unit of measure (F or C) flashes.
2. Press Y b / O again and release to change the
unit of measure. Wait several seconds and the
compass/temperature display returns with the
selected unit of measure.
It is normal under certain conditions for the temperature
update to be delayed. If an incorrect temperature
displays for an extended period, see your dealer/retailer.
Cleaning the Mirror
Do not spray glass cleaner directly on the mirror. Use a
soft towel dampened with water.
Compass Calibration
The compass may need calibration if:
• CAL is displayed while driving in the vehicle.
• After approximately five seconds, the display does
not show a compass heading, N for North, for
example, there may be a strong magnetic field
interfering with the compass. Interference can be
caused by a magnetic antenna mount, magnetic
note pad holder, or a similar magnetic item.
• The compass does not display the correct heading
and the compass zone variance is set correctly.
To calibrate, CAL must be displayed in the mirror
compass windows. If CAL is not displayed, press and
hold Y b / O for several seconds or until CAL is
displayed.
The compass can be calibrated by driving the vehicle in
circles at 5 mph (8 km/h) or less until the display
reads a direction.
3-37
Compass Variance
The mirror is set to zone eight. If you do not live in zone
eight or drive out of the area, the compass variance
needs to be changed to the appropriate zone.
To adjust for compass variance:
1. Find the current location and variance zone number
on the following zone map.
3. Press Y b / O repeatedly until the new zone
number displays. After you stop pressing the button,
the display shows a compass direction within a
few seconds.
Outside Manual Mirrors
Manually fold the mirrors inward to prevent damage
when going through an automatic car wash. To fold,
push the mirrors toward the vehicle. Push outward,
to return the mirrors to their original position.
Outside Power Mirrors
Vehicles with outside
power mirrors have
controls on the driver
door armrest.
2. Press and hold Y
number displays.
3-38
b / O until Z and/or a zone
To adjust the power mirrors:
1. Move the selector switch to the L (left) or R (right)
to choose the driver or passenger mirror.
2. Press one of the four buttons located on the control
pad to move the mirror to the desired direction.
3. Return the selector switch to the center position
once the mirrors are adjusted.
If the mirror begins making a ratcheting sound, the
mirror has reached the end of its travel and can go no
farther in that direction. To stop the sound, reverse
the mirror direction using the control pad.
Manually fold the mirrors inward to prevent damage
when going through an automatic car wash. To fold,
push the mirror toward the vehicle. Push outward,
to return the mirror to its original position.
Outside Convex Mirror
{ WARNING:
A convex mirror can make things, like other
vehicles, look farther away than they really are.
If you cut too sharply into the right lane, you could
hit a vehicle on the right. Check the inside mirror
or glance over your shoulder before changing
lanes.
The passenger side mirror is convex shaped. A convex
mirror’s surface is curved so more can be seen from
the driver seat.
3-39
Storage Areas
Glove Box
Lift up on the glove box lever to open it.
Cupholders
This vehicle may have two cupholders located on the
lower part of the front doors as well as two cupholders
located at the front end of the console. Vehicles with
bench seats may have cupholders attached to the front
of the center seat.
For vehicles that are an extended cab or crew cab
model, the vehicle also has two rear cupholders.
On crew cab models, the cupholders are located at the
front end of the rear center seat cushion. On extended
cab models, the rear seat cupholders are located on top
of the rear center console.
Vehicles with ashtrays will use one of the cupholders.
Center Console Storage
For vehicles with bench seats, there may be a center
armrest storage area. Lift up on the upper tab located at
the front of the armrest to release the latch. Lift the lid
to open the storage area.
For vehicles with bucket seats or uplevel packages, the
vehicle may have a two-tiered center armrest storage
area. Lift up on the upper tab located at the front of the
armrest to release the latch. Lift the lid to the top
storage area. A second tab is located below the top one
and allows you to access the bottom storage area.
Lift up on the lower tab to release the latch. Then, raise
the lid of the lower storage area. The upper storage
area will lift up with the lid of the lower storage area.
To close the storage area(s), lower the lid(s) until
you feel the latch close.
Assist Handles
This vehicle may have assist handles to be used when
getting out of the vehicle. The assist handles are
located above the doors.
If the vehicle has roof-mounted side impact air bags,
there are assist handles located above both the
driver and front passenger doors.
3-40
Rear Storage Area
Extended cab models might have storage compartments
under the rear seats.
To access the storage compartments, lift the cushion on
the bottom of the rear seats. This exposes the storage
boxes under the seat.
To open a storage box, unhook the bottom and lift the
two latches on each side of the storage box.
3-41
Sunroof
The vehicle may have a sunroof.
The sunroof control
buttons are located on the
headliner.
Lift the lid from the center area to access the storage box.
Q (Open/Vent): Press and hold this button to vent,
and open the sunroof. Release the button when
the desired position is reached.
R (Close):
Press and hold this button to close the
sunroof. Release the button when the desired position
is reached.
The sunshade must be opened manually.
3-42
Section 4
Instrument Panel
Instrument Panel Overview ...............................4-3
Hazard Warning Flashers ................................4-3
Horn .............................................................4-3
Tilt Wheel .....................................................4-3
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever .........................4-4
Turn and Lane-Change Signals ........................4-4
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer ..................4-5
Flash-to-Pass .................................................4-5
Windshield Wipers ..........................................4-5
Windshield Washer .........................................4-6
Cruise Control ................................................4-7
Exterior Lamps .............................................4-10
Headlamps on Reminder ................................4-11
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) .......................4-11
Automatic Headlamp System ..........................4-12
Fog Lamps ..................................................4-12
Exterior Cargo Lamps ....................................4-13
Instrument Panel Brightness ...........................4-13
Dome Lamp .................................................4-13
Dome Lamp Override ....................................4-14
Exit Lighting .................................................4-14
Electric Power Management ...........................4-14
Battery Run-Down Protection ..........................4-15
Accessory Power Outlet(s) .............................4-15
Ashtray(s) and Cigarette Lighter ......................4-16
Climate Controls ............................................4-16
Climate Control System .................................4-16
Outlet Adjustment .........................................4-18
Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators ............4-18
Instrument Panel Cluster ................................4-19
Speedometer and Odometer ...........................4-20
Trip Odometer ..............................................4-20
Tachometer .................................................4-20
Safety Belt Reminders ...................................4-21
Airbag Readiness Light ..................................4-22
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator ...................4-23
Charging System Light ..................................4-24
Up-Shift Light ...............................................4-24
Brake System Warning Light ..........................4-25
Antilock Brake System (ABS) Warning Light .....4-26
StabiliTrak®/Traction Control System (TCS)
Warning Light ...........................................4-26
Engine Coolant Temperature Gage ..................4-27
Tire Pressure Light .......................................4-28
Malfunction Indicator Lamp .............................4-28
Oil Pressure Light .........................................4-31
Security Light ...............................................4-32
Cruise Control Light ......................................4-32
Highbeam On Light .......................................4-32
Fuel Gage ...................................................4-32
4-1
Section 4
Instrument Panel
Driver Information Center (DIC) .......................4-33
DIC Operation and Displays ...........................4-33
DIC Warnings and Messages .........................4-37
Audio System(s) .............................................4-42
Setting the Clock ..........................................4-43
Radio(s) ......................................................4-43
Using an MP3 ..............................................4-56
4-2
XM Radio Messages .....................................4-60
Theft-Deterrent Feature ..................................4-61
Radio Reception ...........................................4-61
Fixed Mast Antenna ......................................4-63
XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System .............4-63
Chime Level Adjustment ................................4-63
Instrument Panel Overview
Tilt Wheel
Hazard Warning Flashers
| (Hazard Warning Flasher): Press this button
located on the instrument panel, to make the front and
rear turn signal lamps flash on and off. This warns
others that you are having trouble.
Press
| again to turn the flashers off.
The turn signals do not work while the hazard warning
flashers are on.
Horn
To sound the horn, press the horn symbol on the
steering wheel pad.
To adjust the steering wheel:
1. Hold the steering wheel and pull the lever
toward you.
2. Move the steering wheel up or down into a
comfortable position.
3. Release the lever to lock the wheel in place.
Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving.
4-3
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever
Turn and Lane-Change Signals
An arrow on the instrument
panel cluster flashes in the
direction of the turn or
lane change.
Move the lever all the way up or down to signal a turn.
The lever on the left side of the steering column
includes the following:
G:
Turn and Lane Change Signals
53:
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer
N:
Windshield Wipers
L:
Windshield Washer
J:
Cruise Control
Flash-to-Pass.
Information for these features is on the pages following.
4-4
Raise or lower the lever until the arrow starts to flash
to signal a lane change. Hold it there until the lane
change is complete.
The lever returns to its starting position when it is
released.
If after signaling a turn or a lane change the arrows
flash rapidly or do not come on, a signal bulb may be
burned out.
Have the bulbs replaced. If the bulb is not burned out,
check the fuse. For bulb replacement, see Taillamps,
Turn Signal, Stoplamps and Back-up Lamps on
page 6-53. For a blown fuse or circuit breaker,
see Fuses and Circuit Breakers on page 6-111.
Turn Signal On Chime
Flash-to-Pass
If a turn signal is left on for more than 3/4 of a mile
(1.2 km), a chime will sound at each flash of the turn
signal and the message TURN SIGNAL will also appear
in the DIC. To turn the chime and message off, move
the turn signal lever to the off position.
This feature lets you use the high-beam headlamps to
signal a driver in front of you that you want to pass.
It works even if the headlamps are in the automatic
position.
See “TURN SIGNAL” under DIC Warnings and
Messages on page 4-37 for more information.
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer
2 3 Headlamp High/Low Beam Changer:
Push
the turn signal/multifunction lever away from you to turn
the high beams on.
Pull the lever towards you to return to low beams.
To use it, pull the turn signal lever toward you, then
release it.
If the headlamps are in the automatic position or on
low beam, the high-beam headlamps will turn on.
They will stay on as long as the lever is held toward
you. The high-beam indicator on the instrument
panel cluster will come on. Release the lever to
return to normal operation.
Windshield Wipers
The windshield wiper controls are located on the
multifunction lever. They are controlled by turning
the band with this z symbol.
This indicator light turns on in the instrument panel
cluster when the high beam headlamps are on.
The windshield wipers work in all ignition positions,
except off. This includes the Retained Access Power
mode. See Retained Accessory Power (RAP) on
page 3-18.
4-5
Move the band to one of the following positions:
8 (Mist): Single wipe, move the band to z and then
release it. Several wipes, hold the band on z longer.
Windshield Washer
{ WARNING:
N (Adjustable Interval Wipes):
For a delayed wiping
cycle. Turn the band up for more frequent wipes or
down for less frequent wipes.
6 (Low Speed): Slow wipes, turn the band to the
first solid position past the delay settings.
1 (High Speed): Fast wipes, turn the band to the
second solid position past the delay settings.
9 (Off):
Turns the wipers off.
Clear snow and ice from the wiper blades before using
them. If frozen to the windshield, carefully loosen or
thaw them. Damaged wiper blades should be replaced.
4-6
In freezing weather, do not use your washer until
the windshield is warmed. Otherwise the washer
fluid can form ice on the windshield, blocking your
vision.
Q L (Washer Fluid): There is a paddle marked
with the windshield washer symbol at the top of the
multifunction lever. To spray washer fluid on the
windshield, push the paddle. The wipers will clear
the window and then either stop or return to your
preset speed.
Cruise Control
With cruise control, a speed of about 40 km/h (25 mph)
or more can be maintained without keeping your foot
on the accelerator. Cruise control does not work
at speeds below about 40 km/h (25 mph).
See StabiliTrak® System on page 5-6 or Traction
Control System (TCS) on page 5-8. When road
conditions allow you to safely use it again, the
cruise control can be turned back on.
Cruise control will not work if the parking brake is set, or
if the master cylinder brake fluid level is low.
If the brakes are applied, the cruise control shuts off.
{ WARNING:
Cruise control can be dangerous where you
cannot drive safely at a steady speed. So, do not
use the cruise control on winding roads or in
heavy traffic.
Cruise control can be dangerous on slippery
roads. On such roads, fast changes in tire traction
can cause excessive wheel slip, and you could
lose control. Do not use cruise control on slippery
roads.
If the vehicle’s StabiliTrak® /Traction Control System
(TCS) begins to limit wheel spin while the cruise control
is on, the cruise control automatically disengages.
These controls are located at the end of the
multifunction lever.
9 (Off):
R (On):
Turns the system off.
Turns the system on.
+ (Resume/Accelerate): Use to make the vehicle
accelerate or resume a previously set speed.
r T (Set):
Press the button at the end of the lever to
set the speed.
4-7
Setting Cruise Control
{ WARNING:
If you leave your cruise control on when you are
not using cruise, you might hit a button and go
into cruise when you do not want to. You could be
startled and even lose control. Keep the cruise
control switch off until you want to use cruise
control.
1. Move the cruise control lever to on.
2. Get up to the speed desired.
3. Press
r T at the end of the lever and release it.
4. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.
This light on the instrument panel cluster comes on
while the cruise control is on.
Resuming a Set Speed
If the cruise control is set to a desired speed and then
the brake is applied, the cruise control is disengaged.
But it does not need to be reset.
Once the vehicle is going about 40 km/h (25 mph) or
more, move the cruise control switch briefly from R to S .
The vehicle will go right back up to your chosen
speed and stay there.
If the lever is held at resume/accelerate the vehicle
keeps going faster until the lever is released or the brake
is applied. Do not hold the lever at resume/accelerate,
unless you want the vehicle to go faster.
4-8
Increasing Speed While Using Cruise
Control
Passing Another Vehicle While Using
Cruise Control
There are two ways to go to a higher speed:
Use the accelerator pedal to increase the vehicle speed.
When you take your foot off the pedal, the vehicle
slows down to the cruise control speed you set earlier.
• Use the accelerator pedal to get to the higher speed.
Press r T at the end of the lever, then release
the button and the accelerator pedal. The vehicle
will cruise at the higher speed. If the accelerator
pedal is held longer than 60 seconds, cruise control
will turn off.
• Move the cruise lever from R to S . Hold it there until
the desired speed is reached, and then release the
lever. To increase the vehicle speed in very small
amounts, move the lever briefly to S .
Reducing Speed While Using Cruise
Control
• Press and hold r T until the lower speed
desired is reached, then release it.
• To slow down in very small amounts, briefly
press
rT.
Using Cruise Control on Hills
How well the cruise control works on hills depends upon
the vehicle speed, load, and the steepness of the hills.
When going up steep hills, you might have to step on the
accelerator pedal to maintain the vehicle speed. When
going downhill, you might have to brake or shift to a lower
gear to keep the vehicle speed down. Applying the brake
will turn off the cruise control.
Ending Cruise Control
To turn off the cruise control, do one of the following:
• Step lightly on the brake pedal.
• Move the cruise control lever to 9 .
• Lightly tap or press the clutch, if you have a manual
transmission.
Erasing Speed Memory
The cruise control set speed memory is erased when
the cruise control or the ignition is turned off.
4-9
Exterior Lamps
AUTO: Turns the headlamps on automatically at
normal brightness, together with the following:
•
•
•
•
Sidemarker Lamps
Taillamps
Parking Lamps
Instrument Panel Lights
See Automatic Headlamp System on page 4-12 for more
information.
; (Parking Lamps):
Turns on the parking lamps,
together with the following:
The exterior lamp control is located on the instrument
panel on the left side of the steering wheel.
O (Exterior Lamps):
Turn the knob, located to the
right of this symbol, to choose one of the four exterior
lamp positions.
O (Off):
Turns off all exterior lamps including the
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL).
4-10
•
•
•
•
Sidemarker Lamps
Taillamps
License Plate Lamps
Instrument Panel Lights
2 (Headlamps): Turns on the headlamps, together
with the previously listed lamps and lights.
Headlamps on Reminder
If a door is open, a reminder chime sounds when the
headlamps or parking lamps are manually turned on
and the key is out of the ignition. To turn off the chime,
turn the headlamp switch to off and then back on. In the
automatic mode, the headlamps turn off once the ignition
is in LOCK/OFF.
For vehicles first sold in Canada, if the parking
lamps are turned on manually, the Daytime Running
Lamps (DRL) will stay on.
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can make it easier for
others to see the front of your vehicle during the day.
Fully functional daytime running lamps are required
on all vehicles first sold in Canada.
The DRL system will come on when the following
conditions are met:
• The ignition is on.
• The exterior lamps control is in AUTO.
• The transmission is not in P (Park) if you have an
automatic transmission.
• The light sensor determines it is daytime.
When the DRL are on, only the parking lamps or
reduced intensity low beam headlamps will be on.
The taillamps, sidemarkers, and other lamps will not
be on. The instrument panel will not be lit up either.
When it begins to get dark, the headlamps will
automatically switch from DRL to the regular headlamps.
The regular headlamp system should be turned on
when needed.
4-11
Automatic Headlamp System
When it is dark enough outside, the automatic headlamp
system will turn on after the transmission has been
shifted from P (Park) to D (Drive). The headlamps,
taillamps, sidemarker, parking lamps, roof marker
lamps, and the instrument panel lights turn on at normal
brightness. The radio lights will become dimmer when
the headlights are off compared to when the headlights
are on.
If the vehicle is started in a dark garage, the automatic
headlamp system will come on immediately. Once the
vehicle leaves the garage, it will take about one minute
for the automatic headlamp system to change to DRL if it
is light outside. During that delay, the instrument panel
cluster may not be as bright as usual. Make sure the
instrument panel brightness control is in the full bright
position. See Instrument Panel Brightness on page 4-13.
Fog Lamps
The vehicle has a light sensor located on the top of
the instrument panel. Do not cover the sensor, or the
system will be on whenever the ignition is on.
The fog lamp button is located near the exterior lamps
control.
The system can turn on the headlamps when driving in
a parking garage, through a tunnel or when there is
overcast weather. This is normal.
# : For vehicles with fog lamps, press to turn the fog
lamps on or off. An indicator light will turn on in the
button when the fog lamps are on.
There is a delay in the transition between the daytime and
nighttime operation of the Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)
and the automatic headlamp system so that driving under
bridges or bright overhead street lights does not affect the
system. The DRL and automatic headlamp system will
only be affected when the light sensor detects a change
in lighting lasting longer than the delay.
4-12
The parking lamps or low-beam headlamps must be
on for the fog lamps to work. The fog lamps will go off
whenever the high-beam headlamps come on. When
the high beams go off, the fog lamps come on again.
Some localities have laws that require the headlamps to
be on along with the fog lamps.
Exterior Cargo Lamps
Instrument Panel Brightness
The cargo lamps can be used if more light is needed in
the cargo area of the vehicle or in the top-box storage
units.
D (Instrument Panel Lights):
This button is located
on the driver side of the
instrument panel near the
exterior lamp control.
Turn the thumbwheel
up or down to brighten or dim the instrument panel lights
and the radio display. The instrument panel lights, cluster,
and radio display do not dim to complete darkness. The
instrument panel light brightness control will only work if
the headlamps or parking lamps are on. See Exterior
Lamps on page 4-10.
Dome Lamp
The dome lamps, located in the front and cargo area of
the vehicle, come on when any door is opened.
Press to turn the cargo lamps on and off.
The dome lamps must be on for the cargo lamps to
come on. See Dome Lamp on page 4-13.
Turn the dome lamps on by turning the thumbwheel,
located next to the exterior lamps control, all the way up.
In this position, the lamps remain on whether a door
is opened or closed.
Reading Lamps
Press the lens on the lamps to turn each reading lamp
on or off.
These lamps will not come on with the dome lamps.
4-13
Dome Lamp Override
The dome lamp override button is located below the
exterior lamps control.
E (Dome Lamp Override): Press this button in to
make the dome lamps remain off when the doors are
open. To return the lamps to automatic operation,
press E again and return it to the out position.
Exit Lighting
The interior lamps will come on when the key is
removed from the ignition. The lamps will not come
on if the dome override button is pressed in.
Electric Power Management
The vehicle has Electric Power Management (EPM)
that estimates the battery’s temperature and state
of charge. It then adjusts the voltage for best
performance and extended life of the battery.
When the battery’s state of charge is low, the voltage is
raised slightly to quickly bring the charge back up. When
the state of charge is high, the voltage is lowered slightly
to prevent overcharging. If the vehicle has a voltmeter
gage or a voltage display on the Driver Information
4-14
Center (DIC), you may see the voltage move up or down.
This is normal. If there is a problem, an alert will be
displayed.
The battery can be discharged at idle if the electrical
loads are very high. This is true for all vehicles.
This is because the generator (alternator) may not
be spinning fast enough at idle to produce all the
power that is needed for very high electrical loads.
A high electrical load occurs when several of the following
are on, such as: headlamps, high beams, fog lamps,
rear window defogger, climate control fan at high speed,
heated seats, engine cooling fans, trailer loads, and loads
plugged into accessory power outlets.
EPM works to prevent excessive discharge of the
battery. It does this by balancing the generator’s output
and the vehicle’s electrical needs. It can increase
engine idle speed to generate more power, whenever
needed. It can temporarily reduce the power demands
of some accessories.
Normally, these actions occur in steps or levels, without
being noticeable. In rare cases at the highest levels of
corrective action, this action may be noticeable to the
driver. If so, a Driver Information Center (DIC) message
might be displayed, such as BATTERY SAVER ACTIVE,
BATTERY VOLTAGE LOW, or LOW BATTERY. If this
message is displayed, it is recommended that the driver
reduce the electrical loads as much as possible. See DIC
Warnings and Messages on page 4-37.
Battery Run-Down Protection
This feature shuts off the dome lamp if it is left on for
more than 20 minutes when the ignition is in LOCK/OFF.
This helps to prevent the battery from running down.
Accessory Power Outlet(s)
The accessory power outlets can be used to connect
electrical equipment such as a cellular phone.
The vehicle may have an accessory power outlet located
below the climate control system and on the rear of the
center console. A small cap must be pulled down to
access an accessory power outlet. When not using
an outlet be sure to cover it with the protective cap.
Notice: Leaving electrical equipment on for
extended periods will drain the battery. Always
unplug electrical equipment when not in use and do
not plug in equipment that exceeds the maximum
amperage rating of 20 amperes.
Certain electrical accessories may not be compatible with
the accessory power outlet and could result in blown
vehicle or adapter fuses. If you experience a problem,
see your dealer/retailer for additional information on
accessory power outlets.
Notice: Adding any electrical equipment to the
vehicle can damage it or keep other components
from working as they should. The repairs would not
be covered by the vehicle warranty. Do not use
equipment exceeding maximum amperage rating of
20 amperes. Check with your dealer/retailer before
adding electrical equipment.
When adding electrical equipment, be sure to follow
the proper installation instructions included with
the equipment.
Notice: Improper use of the power outlet can
cause damage not covered by the vehicle warranty.
Do not hang any type of accessory or accessory
bracket from the plug because the power outlets
are designed for accessory power plugs only.
4-15
Ashtray(s) and Cigarette Lighter
Climate Controls
The vehicle may have a removable ashtray and cigarette
lighter.
Climate Control System
The ashtray is located in the center console area.
The ashtray can be removed for cleaning. When the
ashtray is removed, this area can also be used as
a cupholder.
The heating, cooling, and ventilation for the vehicle can
be controlled with this system.
Notice: If papers, pins, or other flammable items
are put in the ashtray, hot cigarettes or other
smoking materials could ignite them and possibly
damage the vehicle. Never put flammable items
in the ashtray.
To use the lighter, press it in all the way, and let go.
When it is ready, it will pop back out by itself.
Notice: Holding a cigarette lighter in while it is
heating does not let the lighter back away from
the heating element when it is hot. Damage from
overheating can occur to the lighter or heating
element, or a fuse could be blown. Do not hold
a cigarette lighter in while it is heating.
A. Temperature Control
B. Fan Control
C. Air Delivery Mode
Control
D. Air Conditioning
E. Recirculation
Temperature Control: Turn the knob clockwise
or counterclockwise to increase or decrease the
temperature of the air inside the vehicle.
4-16
9 (Fan Control): Turn the knob clockwise or
counterclockwise to increase or decrease the fan speed.
If the knob is set on “0” (zero), some outside air will
still enter the vehicle and will be directed according to
the position of the mode knob.
Air Delivery Mode Control: Turn the knob clockwise
or counterclockwise to change the current airflow mode.
Select from the following modes:
H (Vent): Air is directed to the instrument panel
outlets.
\ (Bi-Level):
Air is divided between the instrument
panel outlets and floor and side window outlets. Cooler
air is directed to the upper outlets and warmer air to
the floor outlets.
0 (Defrost): This mode clears the windshield of fog or
frost more quickly. Air is directed to the windshield and
side window outlets. When this mode is selected, the
system runs the air conditioning compressor unless
the outside temperature is near, or below freezing.
Recirculation is not available in this mode.
Do not drive the vehicle until all the windows are clear.
# (Air Conditioning):
Press to turn the air conditioning
system on or off. An indicator light on the button comes
on to show that the air conditioning is on.
The fan control must be on to use the air conditioning.
There might be a slight change in engine performance
when the air conditioning compressor shuts off and turns
on again. This is normal. The system is designed to
make adjustments to help with fuel economy while still
maintaining the selected temperature.
[ (Floor):
Air is directed to the floor outlets.
Recirculation cannot be selected while in floor mode
because this could cause the interior window to fog.
The air conditioning system removes moisture from
the air, so a small amount of water might drip under
the vehicle while idling or after turning off the engine.
This is normal.
/ (Floor/Defog):
@ (Recirculation): Press to turn the recirculation
mode on or off. An indicator light on the button comes
on to show that the recirculation mode is on. This mode
recirculates and helps to quickly cool the air inside the
vehicle. It can be used to prevent outside air and odors
from entering the vehicle.
This mode clears the windows of
fog or moisture. Air is directed to the floor, windshield,
and side window outlets. When this mode is selected,
the system runs the air conditioning compressor unless
the outside temperature is near freezing or below.
Recirculation is not available in this mode.
4-17
The recirculation mode cannot be used with floor/defog,
defrost, or defogging modes. If recirculation is selected in
these modes, the indicator will flash or not come on.
Warning Lights, Gages, and
Indicators
Outlet Adjustment
Use the thumbwheel on the outlets to change the
direction of the air flow.
Warning lights and gages can signal that something
is wrong before it becomes serious enough to cause
an expensive repair or replacement. Paying attention
to the warning lights and gages could prevent injury.
Lift up or push down on the thumbwheel located in the
center of the outlet to direct the air up or down, or
slide the thumbwheel to the left or right to direct the
airflow from side-to-side.
Warning lights come on when there might be or there
is a problem with one of the vehicle’s functions. Some
warning lights come on briefly when the engine is started
to indicate they are working.
Operation Tips
• Clear away any ice, snow or leaves from the air
Gages can indicate when there might be or there is a
problem with one of the vehicle’s functions. Often gages
and warning lights work together to indicate a problem
with the vehicle.
inlets at the base of the windshield that may
block the flow of air into the vehicle.
• Use of non-GM approved hood deflectors may
adversely affect the performance of the system.
• Keep the path under the front seats clear of objects
to help circulate the air inside of the vehicle more
effectively.
4-18
When one of the warning lights comes on and stays on
while driving, or when one of the gages shows there
could be a problem, check the section that explains
what to do. Follow this manual’s advice. Waiting to
do repairs can be costly and even dangerous.
Instrument Panel Cluster
The instrument panel cluster is designed to show how the vehicle is running. It shows how fast the vehicle is going,
about how much fuel has been used, and many other things needed to drive safely and economically.
United States automatic transmission 2.9L version shown,
Canada, manual transmission, 3.7L and 5.3L similar
4-19
Speedometer and Odometer
Trip Odometer
The speedometer shows the speed in both miles per
hour (mph) and kilometers per hour (km/h).
The vehicle has a trip odometer that indicates how far
the vehicle has been driven since the trip odometer was
last set to zero.
The odometer shows how far the vehicle has been
driven, in either miles (used in the United States)
or kilometers (used in Canada).
The odometer mileage can be checked without the
vehicle running by pressing the trip information stem.
See “Odometer” under DIC Operation and Displays
on page 4-33 for more information.
If the cluster is replaced the new one will automatically
detect and update the vehicle’s accumulated mileage.
4-20
See “Trip Odometer” under DIC Operation and Displays
on page 4-33 for more information.
Tachometer
The tachometer displays the engine speed in revolutions
per minute (rpm).
Notice: If the engine is operated with the
tachometer in the shaded warning area, the vehicle
could be damaged, and the damages would not
be covered by the vehicle warranty. Do not operate
the engine with the tachometer in the shaded
warning area.
Safety Belt Reminders
Passenger Safety Belt Reminder Light
Safety Belt Reminder Light
For vehicles equipped with the passenger safety
belt reminder light, several seconds after the engine
is started, a chime sounds for several seconds to
remind the front passenger to buckle their safety belt.
The passenger safety belt light, located on the instrument
panel, comes on and stays on for several seconds and
then flashes for several more.
When the engine is started, a chime sounds for several
seconds to remind a driver to fasten the safety belt,
unless the driver safety belt is already buckled.
The safety belt light comes
on and stays on for several
seconds, then flashes for
several more.
This chime and light are repeated if the driver remains
unbuckled and the vehicle is in motion. If the driver
safety belt is already buckled, neither the chime nor
the light comes on.
This chime and light are
repeated if the passenger
remains unbuckled and
the vehicle is in motion.
If the passenger safety belt is buckled, neither the
chime nor the light comes on.
The front passenger safety belt warning light and chime
may turn on if an object is put on the seat such as
a briefcase, handbag, grocery bag, laptop or other
electronic device. To turn off the warning light and
or chime, remove the object from the seat or buckle
the safety belt.
4-21
Airbag Readiness Light
The system checks the airbag’s electrical system for
possible malfunctions. If the light stays on it indicates
there is an electrical problem. The system check includes
the airbag sensor, the pretensioners, the airbag modules,
the wiring and the crash sensing and diagnostic module.
For more information on the airbag system, see Airbag
System on page 2-64.
The airbag readiness light
flashes for a few seconds
when the engine is started.
If the light does not come
on then, have it fixed
immediately.
4-22
{ WARNING:
If the airbag readiness light stays on after the
vehicle is started or comes on while driving, it
means the airbag system might not be working
properly. The airbags in the vehicle might not
inflate in a crash, or they could even inflate
without a crash. To help avoid injury, have the
vehicle serviced right away.
If there is a problem with the airbag system, an airbag
Driver Information Center (DIC) message can also come
on. See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 4-37 for
more information.
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator
If the vehicle has one of the passenger airbag status
indicators pictured in the following illustrations, then the
vehicle has a passenger sensing system for the right
front passenger position. The passenger airbag status
indicator is on the instrument panel. See Passenger
Sensing System on page 2-73 for important safety
information.
In addition, if the vehicle has a passenger sensing
system for the right front passenger position, the label
on the vehicle’s sun visors refer to “ADVANCED
AIRBAGS”.
If the word ON or the on symbol is lit on the passenger
airbag status indicator, it means that the right front
passenger frontal airbag is enabled (may inflate).
If the word OFF or the off symbol is lit on the airbag
status indicator, it means that the passenger sensing
system has turned off the right front passenger
frontal airbag.
If, after several seconds, both status indicator lights
remain on, or if there are no lights at all, there may be
a problem with the lights or the passenger sensing
system. See your dealer/retailer for service.
{ WARNING:
United States
Canada
When the vehicle is started, the passenger airbag status
indicator will light ON and OFF, or the symbol for on and
off, for several seconds as a system check. Then, after
several more seconds, the status indicator will light either
ON or OFF, or either the on or off symbol to let you know
the status of the right front passenger frontal airbag.
If the airbag readiness light ever comes on and
stays on, it means that something may be wrong
with the airbag system. To help avoid injury to
yourself or others, have the vehicle serviced right
away. See Airbag Readiness Light on page 4-22
for more information, including important safety
information.
4-23
Charging System Light
This light comes on briefly
when the ignition key is
turned to START, but the
engine is not running, as a
check to show it is working.
Up-Shift Light
The vehicle may have an
up-shift light.
If it does not, have the vehicle serviced by your
dealer/retailer.
When this light comes on, shift to the next higher gear if
weather, road, and traffic conditions allow.
The light should go out once the engine starts. If it stays
on, or comes on while driving, there could be a problem
with the charging system. A charging system message
in the Driver Information Center (DIC) can also appear.
See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 4-37 for more
information. This light could indicate that there are
problems with a generator drive belt, or that there is an
electrical problem. Have it checked right away. If the
vehicle must be driven a short distance with the light
on, turn off accessories, such as the radio and air
conditioner.
See Manual Transmission Operation on page 3-23 for
more information.
4-24
Brake System Warning Light
The vehicle’s hydraulic brake system is divided into two
parts. If one part is not working, the other part can still
work and stop the vehicle. For good braking though,
both parts need to be working well.
If the warning light comes on, there could be a brake
problem. Have the brake system inspected right away.
When the ignition is on, the brake system warning light
comes on when the parking brake is set. See Parking
Brake on page 3-30 for more information. The light stays
on if the parking brake does not release fully. If it stays on
after the parking brake is fully released, it means there is
a brake problem.
If the light comes on while driving, pull off the road and
stop. The brake pedal might be harder to push, or it
might go closer to the floor. It can take longer to stop.
If the light is still on, have the vehicle towed for service.
See Towing Your Vehicle on page 5-41.
{ WARNING:
United States
Canada
This light comes on briefly when the ignition key is
turned to ON/RUN. If it does not, have it fixed so it will
be ready to warn if there is a problem.
The brake system might not be working properly if
the brake system warning light is on. Driving with
the brake system warning light on can lead to a
crash. If the light is still on after the vehicle has
been pulled off the road and carefully stopped,
have the vehicle towed for service.
4-25
Antilock Brake System (ABS)
Warning Light
The Antilock Brake
System (ABS) light
comes on briefly when
the engine is started.
StabiliTrak®/Traction Control
System (TCS) Warning Light
The StabiliTrak and
Traction Control System
(TCS) indicator/warning
light comes on briefly while
starting the engine.
If it does not, have the vehicle serviced by your
dealer/retailer. If the system is working normally the
indicator light then goes off.
If it does not, have the vehicle serviced by your
dealer/retailer. If the system is working normally
the indicator light then goes off.
If the ABS light stays on, turn the ignition off. If the light
comes on while driving, stop as soon as it is safely
possible and turn the ignition off. Then start the engine
again to reset the system. If the ABS light stays on, or
comes on again while driving, the vehicle needs service.
If the regular brake system warning light is not on, the
vehicle still has brakes, but not antilock brakes. If the
regular brake system warning light is also on, the vehicle
does not have antilock brakes and there is a problem with
the regular brakes. See Brake System Warning Light on
page 4-25.
The light flashes while the StabiliTrak system and TCS
are working to assist the driver with directional control
of the vehicle in difficult driving conditions.
See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 4-37 for all
brake related DIC messages.
4-26
If the StabiliTrak system and TCS light comes on and
stays on while driving and a TRACTION FAULT or
SERVICE STAB SYS message displays on the DIC,
the vehicle needs service.
The light also comes on steady when the StabiliTrak
system and/or TCS are turned off. The DIC also displays
a TRAC OFF and/or STAB SYS OFF message. If the
TCS is off, wheel spin is not limited. If the StabiliTrak
system is off, the system does not assist the driver with
directional control of the vehicle. The light turns off when
the TCS and StabiliTrak system are turned back on.
Engine Coolant Temperature Gage
This gage shows
the engine coolant
temperature.
See StabiliTrak® System on page 5-6, Traction Control
System (TCS) on page 5-8 and DIC Warnings and
Messages on page 4-37 for more information.
If the gage pointer is near the top of the gage, the
engine is too hot. It means that the engine coolant has
overheated. If the vehicle has been operating under
normal driving conditions, pull the vehicle off the road,
stop the vehicle and turn off the engine as soon as
possible.
See Engine Overheating on page 6-35 for more
information.
4-27
Tire Pressure Light
When the Light Flashes First and Then is
On Steady
This indicates that there may be a problem with the Tire
Pressure Monitor System. The light flashes for about a
minute and stays on steady for the remainder of the
ignition cycle. This sequence repeats with every ignition
cycle. See Tire Pressure Monitor Operation on page 6-67
for more information.
For vehicles with a tire pressure monitoring system,
this light comes on briefly when the engine is started.
It provides information about tire pressures and the
Tire Pressure Monitoring System.
When the Light is On Steady
This indicates that one or more of the tires are
significantly underinflated.
A tire pressure message in the Driver Information
Center (DIC), can accompany the light. See Driver
Information Center (DIC) on page 4-33 for more
information. Stop and check the tires as soon as
it is safe to do so. If underinflated, inflate to the proper
pressure. See Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 6-64
for more information.
4-28
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
Check Engine Light
A computer system called OBD II (On-Board
Diagnostics-Second Generation) monitors operation
of the fuel, ignition, and emission control systems.
It ensures that emissions are at acceptable levels
for the life of the vehicle, helping to produce a cleaner
environment.
This light should come on
when the ignition is on, but
the engine is not running,
as a check to show it
is working. If it does not,
have the vehicle serviced
by your dealer/retailer.
If the check engine light comes on and stays on, while
the engine is running, this indicates that there is an
OBD II problem and service is required.
Malfunctions often are indicated by the system before
any problem is apparent. Being aware of the light
can prevent more serious damage to the vehicle.
This system assists the service technician in correctly
diagnosing any malfunction.
Notice: If the vehicle is continually driven with
this light on, after a while, the emission controls
might not work as well, the vehicle’s fuel economy
might not be as good, and the engine might not
run as smoothly. This could lead to costly repairs
that might not be covered by the vehicle warranty.
Notice: Modifications made to the engine,
transmission, exhaust, intake, or fuel system
of the vehicle or the replacement of the original
tires with other than those of the same Tire
Performance Criteria (TPC) can affect the vehicle’s
emission controls and can cause this light to come
on. Modifications to these systems could lead to
costly repairs not covered by the vehicle warranty.
This could also result in a failure to pass a required
Emission Inspection/Maintenance test. See
Accessories and Modifications on page 6-3.
This light comes on during a malfunction in one of
two ways:
Light Flashing: A misfire condition has been detected.
A misfire increases vehicle emissions and could
damage the emission control system on the vehicle.
Diagnosis and service might be required.
To prevent more serious damage to the vehicle:
•
•
•
•
Reduce vehicle speed.
Avoid hard accelerations.
Avoid steep uphill grades.
If towing a trailer, reduce the amount of cargo being
hauled as soon as it is possible.
If the light continues to flash, when it is safe to do so,
stop the vehicle. Find a safe place to park the vehicle.
Turn the key off, wait at least 10 seconds, and restart
the engine. If the light is still flashing, follow the previous
steps and see your dealer/retailer for service as soon
as possible.
4-29
Light On Steady: An emission control system
malfunction has been detected on the vehicle.
Diagnosis and service might be required.
An emission system malfunction might be corrected by
doing the following:
• Make sure the fuel cap is fully installed. See Filling
the Tank on page 6-8. The diagnostic system
can determine if the fuel cap has been left off or
improperly installed. A loose or missing fuel cap
allows fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere.
A few driving trips with the cap properly installed
should turn the light off.
• If the vehicle has been driven through a deep puddle
of water, the vehicle’s electrical system might be wet.
The condition is usually corrected when the electrical
system dries out. A few driving trips should turn the
light off.
4-30
• Make sure to fuel the vehicle with quality fuel. Poor
fuel quality causes the engine not to run as efficiently
as designed and can cause: stalling after start-up,
stalling when the vehicle is changed into gear,
misfiring, hesitation on acceleration, or stumbling on
acceleration. These conditions might go away once
the engine is warmed up.
If one or more of these conditions occurs, change the
fuel brand used. It will require at least one full tank of
the proper fuel to turn the light off.
See Gasoline Octane on page 6-5.
If none of the above have made the light turn off, your
dealer/retailer can check the vehicle. The dealer/retailer
has the proper test equipment and diagnostic tools to
fix any mechanical or electrical problems that might have
developed.
Emissions Inspection and Maintenance
Programs
Oil Pressure Light
Some state/provincial and local governments have or
might begin programs to inspect the emission control
equipment on the vehicle. Failure to pass this inspection
could prevent getting a vehicle registration.
Here are some things to know to help the vehicle pass
an inspection:
• The vehicle will not pass this inspection if the check
engine light is on with the engine running, or if the
key is in ON/RUN and the light is not on.
• The vehicle will not pass this inspection if the OBD II
(on-board diagnostic) system determines that critical
emission control systems have not been completely
diagnosed by the system. The vehicle would be
considered not ready for inspection. This can happen
if the battery has recently been replaced or if the
battery has run down. The diagnostic system is
designed to evaluate critical emission control
systems during normal driving. This can take several
days of routine driving. If this has been done and the
vehicle still does not pass the inspection for lack of
OBD II system readiness, your dealer/retailer can
prepare the vehicle for inspection.
{ WARNING:
Do not keep driving if the oil pressure is low.
The engine can become so hot that it catches fire.
Someone could be burned. Check the oil as soon
as possible and have the vehicle serviced.
Notice: Lack of proper engine oil maintenance
can damage the engine. The repairs would not be
covered by the vehicle warranty. Always follow
the maintenance schedule in this manual for
changing engine oil.
This light comes on briefly while starting the engine.
If it does not, have the vehicle serviced by your dealer/
retailer. If the system is working normally the indicator
light then goes off.
4-31
If the light comes on and stays on, it means that oil is
not flowing through the engine properly. The vehicle
could be low on oil and it might have some other system
problem.
Highbeam On Light
This light comes on when
the high-beam headlamps
are in use.
Security Light
For information regarding
this light and the vehicle’s
security system, see
Content Theft-Deterrent
on page 3-13.
See Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer on page 4-5
for more information.
Fuel Gage
Cruise Control Light
The cruise control light
comes on whenever the
cruise control is set.
The light goes out when the cruise control is turned off.
See Cruise Control on page 4-7 for more information.
4-32
When the ignition is on,
the fuel gage shows how
much fuel the vehicle
has remaining in the
fuel tank.
An arrow on the fuel gage indicates the side of the
vehicle the fuel door is on.
Driver Information Center (DIC)
Here are four things that some owners ask about.
None of these indicate a problem with the vehicle’s
fuel gage:
The Driver Information Center (DIC) displays information
such as the trip odometer, personalization features,
and warning messages. The DIC display is located
on the instrument panel cluster.
• At the gas station, the gas pump shuts off before
the gage reads full.
• It takes a little more or less fuel to fill up than the
gage indicated. For example, the gage may have
indicated the tank was half full, but it actually took
a little more or less than half the tank’s capacity
to fill the tank.
• The gage moves a little while turning a corner or
speeding up.
• The gage does not go back to empty when the
ignition is turned off.
When the fuel in the fuel tank is low, a LOW FUEL
message will display on the Driver Information
Center (DIC). See DIC Warnings and Messages
on page 4-37 for more information.
DIC Operation and Displays
The Driver Information Center (DIC) comes on when the
ignition is on.
If a problem is detected, a warning message appears
on the display. Pressing and releasing the trip odometer
reset stem on the DIC acknowledges some current
warnings or service messages. Some messages only
clear after the required action has been taken.
The DIC has different menu items which can be accessed
by pressing the trip odometer reset stem on the DIC.
This includes trip information, such as the odometer and
trip odometer, engine oil life reset, and personalization
features that are explained in the following information.
The DIC trip odometer reset stem is located on the
instrument panel cluster next to the DIC display.
4-33
Trip Information
Odometer
The odometer is automatically displayed on the DIC
when you start the vehicle. The odometer shows
the total distance the vehicle has been driven in either
miles for the United States or kilometers for Canada.
Trip Odometer
Press and release the reset stem until TRIP appears on
the DIC display. The trip odometer shows the current
distance traveled since the last reset of the trip odometer
in either miles for the United States or kilometers for
Canada.
In addition to the engine oil life system monitoring the
oil life, additional maintenance is recommended in
the Maintenance Schedule in this manual. See Engine
Oil on page 6-15 and Scheduled Maintenance on
page 7-3 for more information.
Personalization Features
Language
This feature allows you to choose the language in which
the DIC display shows information.
To set your choice for this feature:
1. With the engine off, turn the key to ON/RUN, but do
not start the engine.
To reset the trip odometer, press and hold the reset
stem until the display returns to zero.
2. Close all doors so the DOORS message does not
display in the DIC.
Engine Oil Life System
3. Momentarily press and release the reset stem until
the current language is displayed: English (default),
Spanish, or French.
With the engine off, turn the key to ON/RUN and
then press the reset stem until OIL LIFE RESET
appears — alternating between OIL LIFE and
RESET — on the DIC display. The CHANGE OIL
message alerts you to change the oil on a schedule
consistent with your driving conditions. Always reset
the OIL LIFE message after an oil change. To reset the
message, see Engine Oil Life System on page 6-18.
4-34
4. To select a different language, press and hold the
reset stem until the next language appears.
5. Repeat Step 4 until the desired language is
displayed. Once the desired language is shown
on the DIC display, the language is set.
6. To exit the language selection, momentarily press
and release the reset stem. All DIC messages will
now display in the language selected.
Automatic Door Locks
This feature allows you to program the door locks to a
preferred setting.
To set your choice for this feature:
1. With the engine off, turn the key to LOCK/OFF.
Do not remove the key from the ignition.
2. Press and hold the power door lock button until the
DIC display shows the current door lock mode.
3. To view the next available mode, press and hold
the reset stem until the mode appears. Release
the reset stem and press and hold again to view
the next mode.
4. Once the desired mode is shown on the DIC
display, briefly press the reset stem to set your
choice. The DIC display then clears.
The following are the available modes:
Lock 1 (default): On vehicles with an automatic
transmission, this mode locks all of the doors when
the vehicle is shifted out of P (Park) and unlocks all
of the doors when the vehicle is shifted into P (Park).
On vehicles with a manual transmission, this mode
locks all of the doors when the vehicle speed is greater
than 15 mph (24 km/h) and unlocks all of the doors
when the key is removed from the ignition.
Lock 2: On vehicles with an automatic transmission,
this mode locks all of the doors when the vehicle
is shifted out of P (Park) and unlocks the driver’s
door when the vehicle is shifted into P (Park).
On vehicles with a manual transmission, this mode
locks all of the doors when the vehicle speed is greater
than 15 mph (24 km/h) and unlocks the driver’s door
when the key is removed from the ignition.
Lock 3: On vehicles with an automatic transmission,
this mode locks all of the doors when the vehicle
is shifted out of P (Park). The doors will not
automatically unlock.
On vehicles with a manual transmission, this mode
locks all of the doors when the vehicle speed is greater
than 15 mph (24 km/h). The doors will not automatically
unlock.
4-35
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Feedback
The following are the available modes:
This feature allows you to program the Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) feedback to a preferred setting.
RFA 1 (default): This mode flashes the parking lamps
when you press the lock or unlock buttons on the
RKE transmitter.
To set your choice for this feature:
1. With the engine off, turn the key to LOCK/OFF.
Do not remove the key from the ignition.
2. Press and hold the lock and unlock buttons on
the RKE transmitter at the same time. Hold both
buttons until the DIC display shows the current RKE
feedback mode.
3. To view the next available mode, press and hold
the reset stem until the mode appears. Release
the reset stem and press and hold again to view
the next mode.
4. Once the desired mode is shown on the DIC
display, briefly press the reset stem to set your
choice. The DIC display then clears.
4-36
RFA 2: This mode flashes the parking lamps and
sounds the horn when you press the lock button on the
RKE transmitter. This mode also flashes the parking
lamps when you press the unlock button on the
RKE transmitter.
RFA 3: This mode flashes the parking lamps and
sounds the horn when you press the lock or unlock
buttons on the RKE transmitter.
RFA 4: This mode disables RKE feedback. There will
be no feedback when you press the lock or unlock
buttons on the RKE transmitter.
DIC Warnings and Messages
AC (Air Conditioning) OFF
Messages are displayed on the DIC to notify the driver
that the status of the vehicle has changed and that some
action may be needed by the driver to correct the
condition. Multiple messages may appear one after
another. The messages are displayed for several
seconds each.
This message displays when the engine coolant
temperature is too high and the air conditioning in your
vehicle needs to be turned off. See Engine Overheating
on page 6-35 and Climate Control System on page 4-16
for more information. This message displays along with
the ENG HOT message.
Some messages may not require immediate action, but
you should press and release the trip odometer reset
stem to acknowledge that you received the messages
and to clear them from the display. Each message must
be acknowledged individually.
ABS (Antilock Brake System) FAULT
Some messages cannot be cleared from the DIC
display because they are more urgent. These messages
require action before they can be cleared. You should
take any messages that appear on the display seriously
and remember that clearing the messages only makes
the messages disappear, not correct the problem.
This message displays if there is a problem with the
Antilock Brake System (ABS). Check the ABS as soon as
possible and have your vehicle serviced by your dealer/
retailer. See Brakes on page 6-39 and Antilock Brake
System (ABS) Warning Light on page 4-26 for more
information. Press and release the reset stem to
acknowledge the message and clear it from the display.
The following are the possible messages that can be
displayed and some information about them.
4-37
BRAKES
DOORS
This message displays if there is a problem with the
brakes. Check the brakes as soon as possible and
have your vehicle serviced by your dealer/retailer.
See Brakes on page 6-39 and Brake System Warning
Light on page 4-25 for more information. Press and
release the reset stem to acknowledge the message
and clear it from the display.
This message displays when one or more of the doors
is ajar. Check all the doors on your vehicle to make
sure they are closed. The message clears from
the display after all of the doors are closed.
CHANGE OIL
This message displays when the oil needs to be
changed. Check the oil in your vehicle as soon as
possible and have your vehicle serviced by your
dealer/retailer. See Engine Oil on page 6-15 and
Scheduled Maintenance on page 7-3 for more
information. Press and release the reset stem to
acknowledge the message and clear it from the
display.
4-38
ENG (Engine) HOT
This message displays when the engine coolant
temperature is hot. Check the engine coolant
temperature gage. See Engine Coolant Temperature
Gage on page 4-27. Have your vehicle serviced by your
dealer/retailer as soon as possible if you suspect the
engine is overheating. See Engine Overheating on
page 6-35 for more information.
FLUID
This message displays if the brake fluid is low. Check
the brake fluid as soon as possible and have your
vehicle serviced by your dealer/retailer. See Brakes
on page 6-39 for more information. Press and release
the reset stem to acknowledge the message and clear
it from the display.
FUEL CAP
LOW TIRE
This message displays if the vehicle’s fuel cap is either off
or loose. Pull over as soon as possible and check to see
if the fuel cap is secure. You may also see the check
engine light on the instrument panel cluster. If the check
engine light does come on when the fuel cap was loose,
it may take a few driving trips before the light turns off.
See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on page 4-28 for more
information if the light still remains on. Press and release
the reset stem to acknowledge the message and clear it
from the display.
This message displays if a low tire pressure is detected
in any of the vehicle’s tires. Press and release the reset
stem to acknowledge the message and clear it from the
display. The message appears at each ignition cycle
until the tires are inflated to the correct inflation pressure.
See Tires on page 6-57 and Inflation - Tire Pressure on
page 6-64 for more information on tires and the correct
inflation pressures.
LOW FUEL
This message displays when the oil pressure is low.
See Oil Pressure Light on page 4-31 and Engine Oil
on page 6-15 for more information.
This message displays if the level of fuel in the vehicle
is low. Also check the fuel gage. See Fuel Gage on
page 4-32 for more information. Refill the fuel tank
as soon as possible.
OIL
PARK BRK (Brake)
This message displays when the parking brake is set.
See Parking Brake on page 3-30 and Brake System
Warning Light on page 4-25 for more information.
The message clears from the display after the parking
brake is released or by pressing and releasing the
reset stem.
4-39
REDUCED POWER
This message displays when the vehicle’s engine power
is reduced. Reduced engine power can affect the
vehicle’s ability to accelerate. If this message is on, but
there is no reduction in performance, proceed to your
destination. The performance may be reduced the next
time the vehicle is driven. The vehicle may be driven at a
reduced speed while this message is on, but acceleration
and speed may be reduced. Anytime this message stays
on, the vehicle should be taken to your dealer/retailer for
service as soon as possible. Press and release the reset
stem to acknowledge the message and clear it from the
display.
SERV (Service) 4WD
(Four-Wheel Drive)
This message displays when there is a problem with the
transfer case control system. Check the transfer case on
your vehicle and have it serviced by your dealer/retailer.
See Four-Wheel Drive on page 3-25 for more information
about the transfer case. Press and release the reset stem
to acknowledge the message and clear it from the
display.
4-40
SERV (Service) TPM
(Tire Pressure Monitor)
This message displays if a part on the Tire Pressure
Monitor System (TPMS) is not working properly. The tire
pressure light also flashes and then remains on during
the same ignition cycle. See Tire Pressure Light on
page 4-28. Several conditions may cause this message
to appear. See Tire Pressure Monitor Operation on
page 6-67 for more information. If the warning comes on
and stays on, there may be a problem with the TPMS.
See your dealer/retailer.
SERV (Service) VEH (Vehicle)
This message displays if your vehicle needs service.
Have your vehicle serviced by your dealer/retailer
as soon as possible.
SERVICE CHARG (Charge) SYS
(System)
This message displays if there is a problem with the
battery charging system. Under certain conditions, the
battery warning light may also turn on in the instrument
panel cluster. See Charging System Light on page 4-24.
The battery will not be charging at an optimal rate and
the vehicle will lose the ability to enter the fuel economy
mode. The vehicle is safe to drive, however have the
electrical system checked by your dealer/retailer. Press
and release the reset stem to acknowledge the message
and clear it from the display.
SERVICE STAB (Stability) SYS
(System)
This message displays if there is a problem with the
StabiliTrak system. Have your vehicle serviced by your
dealer/retailer. See StabiliTrak® System on page 5-6
for more information.
TRAC (Traction) OFF
This message displays when the Traction Control
System (TCS) is turned off by pressing the StabiliTrak
button. See StabiliTrak® System on page 5-6 for
more information.
TRACTION FAULT
This message will display if there is a problem with the
TCS. Have your vehicle serviced by your dealer/retailer.
See Traction Control System (TCS) on page 5-8 for
more information. Press and release the reset stem to
acknowledge the message and clear it from the display.
TURN SIGNAL
This message displays when the turn signal is on for
about 0.75 miles (1.2 km) of travel. Press and release
the reset stem to acknowledge the message and clear it
from the display.
STAB (Stability) SYS (System) OFF
This message displays when the StabiliTrak system is
turned off. See StabiliTrak® System on page 5-6 for
more information.
4-41
Audio System(s)
Notice: Contact your dealer/retailer before adding
any equipment.
Determine which radio the vehicle has and read the
following pages to become familiar with its features.
Adding audio or communication equipment could
interfere with the operation of the vehicle’s engine,
radio, or other systems, and could damage them.
Follow federal rules covering mobile radio and
telephone equipment.
{ WARNING:
Taking your eyes off the road for extended periods
could cause a crash resulting in injury or death to
you or others. Do not give extended attention to
entertainment tasks while driving.
This system provides access to many audio and non
audio listings.
To minimize taking your eyes off the road while driving,
do the following while the vehicle is parked:
• Become familiar with the operation and controls of
the audio system.
• Set up the tone, speaker adjustments, and preset
radio stations.
For more information, see Defensive Driving on
page 5-2.
4-42
Notice: The chime signals related to safety belts,
parking brake, and other functions of your vehicle
operate through the radio/entertainment system.
If that equipment is replaced or additional equipment
is added to your vehicle, the chimes may not
work. Make sure that replacement or additional
equipment is compatible with your vehicle before
installing it. See Accessories and Modifications
on page 6-3.
The vehicle has Retained Accessory Power (RAP).
With RAP, the audio system can be played even after
the ignition is turned off. See Retained Accessory
Power (RAP) on page 3-18 for more information.
Setting the Clock
Radio(s)
AM-FM Radio
Press and hold HR until the correct hour displays.
Press and hold MIN until the correct minute displays.
There is an initial two-second delay before the clock
goes into time-set mode. To display the time with the
ignition off, press RCL, HR, or MIN.
Radio with CD (MP3/WMA)
Press and hold the HR button until the correct hour
displays. Press and hold the MIN button until the correct
minute displays. The time can be set with the ignition
on or off.
AM-FM Radio
To synchronize the time with an FM station broadcasting
Radio Data System (RDS) information, press and hold
the HR and MIN buttons at the same time until RDS TIME
displays. To accept this time, press and hold the HR and
MIN buttons, at the same time, for another two seconds.
If the time is not available from the station, NO UPDAT
(update) displays.
RDS time is broadcast once a minute. After tuning to
an RDS broadcast station, it could take a few minutes
for the time to update.
4-43
With RDS, the radio can do the following:
• Seek to stations broadcasting the selected type of
programming.
• Receive announcements concerning local and
national emergencies.
• Display messages from radio stations.
• Seek to stations with traffic announcements.
This system relies upon receiving specific information
from these stations and only works when the information
is available. In rare cases, a radio station could broadcast
incorrect information that causes the radio features to
work improperly. If this happens, contact the radio station.
Radio with CD (MP3/WMA)
Radio Data System (RDS)
The audio system has a Radio Data System (RDS).
RDS features are available for use only on FM stations
that broadcast RDS information.
4-44
While the radio is tuned to an RDS station, the station
name or call letters display instead of the frequency.
RDS stations can also provide the time of day, a
program type (PTY) for current programming, and
the name of the program being broadcast.
Playing the Radio
PWR (Power): Press to turn the system on and off.
o p VOL/VOLUME:
Turn to increase or to decrease
the volume.
RCL (Recall) (AM-FM Radio): Press to switch the
display between the radio station frequency, band,
and the time. When the ignition is off, press to display
the time.
DISPL (Display) (Radio with CD): When the ignition is
turned off, press to display the time.
For RDS, press the DISPL knob to change what
displays while using RDS. The display options are
station name, RDS station frequency, PTY (program
type), and the name of the program (if available).
For XM™ (if equipped), press the DISPL knob while
in XM mode to retrieve four different categories of
information related to the current song or channel:
Artist, Song Title, Category or PTY, Channel Number/
Channel Name.
To change the default on the display, press the DISPL
knob until you see the desired display, then press and
hold this knob for two seconds. The radio produces
one beep. The selected display is now the default.
AUTO VOL (Automatic Volume): Automatic volume
automatically adjusts the audio system to make up
for road and wind noise while driving.
Set the volume at the desired level. Depending on the
radio and displays, press to select MIN, MED, MAX
AUTO VOL, or LOW, MEDIUM, and HIGH. AVOL
displays. Each higher setting allows for more volume
compensation at faster vehicle speeds. Then while
driving, automatic volume increases the volume, as
necessary, to overcome noise at any speed. The volume
level should always sound the same while driving.
For the Radio with CD, NONE displays if the radio cannot
determine the vehicle speed. To turn automatic volume
off, press until OFF or AUTO VOL OFF displays.
4-45
Finding a Station
AM FM (AM-FM Radio): Press to switch between FM1,
FM2, or AM. The selection displays.
BAND: Press to switch between FM1, FM2, AM, or
XM1 or XM2 (if equipped). The selection displays.
q r TUNE:
Turn to select radio stations.
q SEEK r: Press to go to the previous or to the next
station and stay there.
To scan stations, press and hold either arrow for
two seconds until a beep sounds. The radio goes to a
station, plays for a few seconds, then goes to the next
station. Press either arrow again to stop scanning.
To scan preset stations, press and hold either arrow for
more than four seconds until two beeps sound. The radio
goes to the first preset station stored on the pushbuttons,
plays for a few seconds, then goes to the next preset
station. Press either arrow again to stop scanning
presets.
4-46
q SCAN r: Press and hold for more than
two seconds. SCAN or SCN displays and the radio
produces one beep. The radio goes to a station, plays
for a few seconds, then goes to the next station. Press
either SCAN arrow again, to stop scanning presets.
To scan preset stations, press and hold either SCAN
arrow for more than four seconds. PSCN or PSC displays
and the radio produces one beep or depending on the
radio, two beeps. The radio goes to a preset station,
plays for a few seconds, then goes to the next preset
station. Press either SCAN arrow again, to stop scanning
presets.
The radio only scans stations with a strong signal that are
in the selected band.
Setting Preset Stations
Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble)
If the radio does not have XM, up to 18 stations
(six FM1, six FM2, and six AM) can be programmed on
the six numbered pushbuttons.
AUDIO: Push and release until BASS/TREB, or
depending on the radio, BASS, MID, or TREB displays.
Turn to increase or to decrease. The tone display shows
the bass or the treble level. If a station is weak or has
static, decrease the treble.
If the radio has XM, up to 30 stations (six FM1, six FM2,
six AM, six XM1 and six XM2) can be programmed on
the six numbered pushbuttons.
To program either radio:
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Press BAND to select FM1, FM2, AM, or XM1 or
XM2 (if equipped).
• For the AM-FM Radio, press AM FM to select
FM1, FM2, or AM.
3. Tune in the desired station.
4. Press and hold one of the six numbered pushbuttons
until the radio beeps once. When that numbered
pushbutton is pressed again, the station that was
stored, returns.
• For the AM-FM Radio, press and hold
the w x arrows to increase or to decrease
the tone.
To adjust the bass/treble or bass/midrange/treble to
the middle position, press and hold the AUDIO knob.
The radio produces one beep and adjusts the display
level to the middle position.
• For the AM-FM Radio, adjust bass or treble to the
middle position, select BAS (bass) or TRE (treble).
Then press and hold for more than two seconds
until a beep sounds. B (balance) and a zero
or T (treble) and a zero displays.
5. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
4-47
To adjust all tone and speaker controls to the middle
position, push and hold the AUDIO knob when no tone
or speaker control displays. ALL CENTERED displays
and a beep sounds.
• For the AM-FM Radio, adjust both tone controls and
both speaker controls to the middle position, first
exit out of audio mode by pressing another button,
causing the radio to perform that function or wait
five seconds for the display to return to time of day.
Then press and hold for more than two seconds until
a beep sounds. CEN (center) displays.
AUTO EQ (Automatic Equalization): Press to
select customized equalization settings designed for
country/western, jazz, talk, pop, rock, and classical.
To return to the manual mode, press the AUTO
EQ button until CUSTOM displays. Then manually
adjust the bass/treble, or bass/midrange/treble by
using the AUDIO knob.
4-48
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)
AUDIO: To adjust the balance between the right and
the left speakers, push and release until BAL (balance)
displays. Turn to move the sound toward the right or the
left speakers.
• For the AM-FM Radio, press and hold
the w x arrows to move the sound toward
the right or the left speakers.
To adjust the fade between the front and the rear
speakers, push and release the AUDIO knob until FADE
or depending on the radio, FAD displays. Turn the knob
to move the sound toward the front or the rear speakers.
• For the AM-FM Radio, press and hold
the w x arrows to move the sound toward
the right or the left speakers.
To adjust the balance or the fade to the middle position,
push the AUDIO knob to select BAL or FADE/FAD,
then push it again and hold it until one beep sounds.
• For the AM-FM Radio, adjust balance or fade to the
middle position by selecting BAL or FAD. Press and
hold AUDIO for more than two seconds until a
beep sounds. B (balance) and a zero or F (fade)
and a zero displays.
To adjust all tone and speaker controls to the middle
position, push and hold the AUDIO knob when no tone
or speaker control is displayed. ALL CENTERED
displays and a beep sounds.
• For the AM-FM Radio, adjust both tone controls and
both speaker controls to the middle position by
exiting out of audio mode. To do this, press any
button for the radio to perform that function or
wait five seconds for the display to return to time
of day. Then press and hold AUDIO for more than
two seconds until a beep sounds. CEN (center)
displays.
Fade might not be available if the vehicle is a regular
cab model.
Finding a Program Type (PTY) Station
(RDS and XM)
To select and find a desired PTY perform the following:
1. Press the P-TYPE to activate program type
select mode. P-TYPE or TYPE and a PTY displays.
2. Turn the P-TYPE knob again, to select a PTY.
3. Once the desired PTY displays, press the SEEK /
TYPE button to select and to take you to the PTY’s
first station.
4. To go to another station within that PTY by pressing
the SEEK / TYPE button twice to display the PTY
and then go to another station.
To cancel the seek, press the SEEK / TYPE button.
This also exits the program type seek mode and returns
to the last tuned station.
If both PTY and TRAF (traffic) are on, the radio
searches for stations with the selected PTY and traffic
announcements.
4-49
If the radio cannot find the desired program type, NONE
displays and the radio returns to the last tuned station.
Setting Preset PTYs (RDS) Only
SCAN: To scan PTYs, press and hold the SEEK /
SCAN until a beep sounds. The radio goes to a station,
plays for a few seconds, then goes to the next station.
For the Radio with CD player, the six pushbuttons
have factory PTY presets. Up to 12 PTYs (six FM1
and six FM2), can be programmed on the numbered
pushbuttons. To program PTYs:
BAND (Alternate Frequency): Alternate frequency
lets the radio switch to a stronger station with the same
program type. To turn alternate frequency on, press and
hold BAND for two seconds. AF ON displays. The radio
could switch to stations with a stronger frequency.
To turn alternate frequency off, press and hold BAND
again for two seconds. AF OFF displays. The radio does
not switch to other stations.
This function does not apply for XM Satellite Radio
Service.
4-50
1. Press BAND to select FM1 or FM2.
2. Turn the P-TYPE knob to activate program type
select mode. TYPE and the last selected PTY
displays.
3. Turn the P-TYPE knob to select a PTY.
4. Press and hold one of the six numbered
pushbuttons until a beep sounds. When that
numbered pushbutton is pressed, the PTY that
was set, returns.
5. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
RDS Messages
ALERT!: For the Radio with CD, the Alert feature
warns of local or national emergencies. When an alert
announcement comes on the current radio station,
ALERT! displays. The announcement is heard, even
if the volume is low or a CD is playing. If a CD is
playing, play stops during the announcement.
Alert announcements cannot be turned off.
ALERT! is not affected by tests of the emergency
broadcast system. This feature is not supported by
all RDS stations.
INFO (Information): If the current station has a
message, the information symbol or INFO displays.
Press this button to see the message. The message can
display the artist, song title, call in phone numbers, etc.
If the entire message is not displayed, parts of the
message displays every three seconds. To scroll through
the message, press and release the INFO button. A new
group of words display after every press of this button.
Once the complete message has displayed, the
information symbol or INFO disappears from the display
until another new message is received. The last message
can be displayed by pressing the INFO button. The last
message stays on the display until a new message is
received or the radio is tuned to a different station.
When a message is not available from a station, NO
INFO displays.
TRAF (Traffic): For the Radio with CD, if TRAF displays,
the tuned station broadcasts traffic announcements.
When a traffic announcement is broadcast on this station
you will hear it.
If the station does not broadcast traffic announcements,
press the TRAF button and the radio seeks to a station
that does. When a station that broadcasts traffic
announcements is found, the radio stops seeking and
TRAF displays. If no station is found that broadcasts
traffic announcements, NO TRAF displays.
If TRAF displays, press the TRAF button to turn off the
traffic announcements.
The radio plays the traffic announcement if the volume is
low. The radio interrupts the play of a CD if the last tuned
station broadcasts traffic announcements.
This function does not apply to XM Satellite Radio
Service.
4-51
Radio Messages
CAL ERR or CAL (Calibration Error): The audio
system has been calibrated for the vehicle from the
factory. If CAL or CAL ERR displays it means that the
radio has not been configured properly for the vehicle
and it must be returned to your dealer/retailer for service.
LOC or LOCKED: This message displays when the
THEFTLOCK® system has locked up. Take the vehicle
to your dealer/retailer for service.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
corrected, contact your dealer/retailer.
XM™ Satellite Radio Service
XM is a satellite radio service that is based in the
48 contiguous United States and 10 Canadian provinces.
XM Satellite Radio has a wide variety of programming
and commercial-free music, coast-to-coast, and in
digital-quality sound. A service fee is required to receive
the XM service. For more information, contact XM at
xmradio.com or call 1-800-929-2100 in the U.S. and
xmradio.ca or call 1-877-438-9677 in Canada.
4-52
Radio Messages for XM Only
See XM Radio Messages on page 4-60 later in this
section for further detail.
Playing a CD (Radio with Single CD
Player)
Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up. The
player pulls it in, and READING displays. The CD should
begin playing. To insert a CD with the ignition off, first
press the Z (eject) button or the DISPL knob.
If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD in the
player it stays in the player. When the ignition or radio
is turned on, the CD starts to play where it stopped,
if it was the last selected audio source.
When the CD is inserted, the CD symbol displays.
As each new track starts to play, the track number
displays.
The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm)
single CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDs and
the smaller CDs are loaded in the same manner.
Care of Your CDs
Care of Your CD Player
If playing a CD-R, the sound quality can be reduced due
to CD-R quality, the method of recording, the quality of
the music that has been recorded, and the way the CD-R
has been handled. Handle them carefully. Store CD-R(s)
in their original cases or other protective cases and away
from direct sunlight and dust. The CD player scans the
bottom surface of the disc. If the surface of a CD is
damaged, such as cracked, broken, or scratched, the CD
does not play properly or not at all. Do not touch the
bottom side of a CD while handling it; this could damage
the surface. Pick up CDs by grasping the outer edges or
the edge of the hole and the outer edge.
Do not add any label to a CD, it could get caught in the
CD player. If a CD is recorded on a personal computer
and a description label is needed, try labeling the top
of the recorded CD with a marking pen.
If the surface of a CD is soiled, take a soft, lint free
cloth or dampen a clean, soft cloth in a mild, neutral
detergent solution mixed with water, and clean it.
Make sure the wiping process starts from the center
to the edge.
The use of CD lens cleaners for CDs is not advised,
due to the risk of contaminating the lens of the CD optics
with lubricants internal to the CD player mechanism.
Notice: If a label is added to a CD, or more than one
CD is inserted into the slot at a time, or an attempt
is made to play scratched or damaged CDs, the
CD player could be damaged. While using the CD
player, use only CDs in good condition without
any label, load one CD at a time, and keep the
CD player and the loading slot free of foreign
materials, liquids, and debris.
If an error displays, see “CD Messages” later in this
section.
4-53
1 FLD x (Previous): This button is inactive when
playing a CD.
2 FLD
a CD.
w (Next):
This button is inactive when playing
3 REV (Fast Reverse): Press and hold to reverse
quickly within a track. Press and hold for less than
two seconds to reverse at 10 times the normal playing
speed. Press and hold for more than two seconds to
reverse at 20 times the normal playing speed. Release
to play the passage. ET (elapsed time) and the elapsed
time of the track displays.
4 FWD (Fast Forward): Press and hold to advance
quickly within a track. Press and hold for less than
two seconds to advance at six times the normal playing
speed. Press and hold for more than two seconds to
advance at 17 times the normal playing speed. Release
to play the passage. ET and the elapsed time of the track
displays.
6 RDM (Random): Press to hear the tracks in random,
rather than sequential, order. RDM ON displays. RDM
and the track number displays when each track starts to
play. Press again to turn off random play. RDM OFF
displays.
q SEEK r: Press the left arrow to go to the start of
the current or the previous track. Press the right arrow to
go to the start of the next track. Pressing either arrow
for more than two seconds scans the next tracks,
playing the first eight seconds of each track until all of
the tracks have been previewed. Press either arrow
again to stop scanning and to play the track.
o TUNE p: Turning this knob fast tracks reverse or
advances through tracks. The track number displays for
each track.
DISPL (Display): Press to see how long the current
track has been playing. ET and the elapsed time of the
track displays. To change the default on the display (track
or elapsed time), press until you see the desired display,
then press and hold for two seconds. The radio produces
one beep. The selected display is now the default.
BAND: Press to listen to the radio when a CD is
playing. The inactive CD remains inside the radio for
future listening.
CD AUX (Auxiliary): Press to play a CD when listening
to the radio. The CD symbol displays when a CD is
loaded.
Z
(Eject): Press to eject a CD. Eject can be activated
with either the ignition or radio off. CDs can be loaded
with the ignition and radio off if this button is pressed first.
4-54
Playing an MP3/WMA CD-R Disc
Radios with the MP3/WMA feature are capable of
playing an MP3/WMA CD-R disc. For more information
on how to play an MP3/WMA CD-R disc, see Using
an MP3 on page 4-56 later in this section.
CD Messages
CHECK CD: If this message displays and/or the CD
comes out, it could be for one of the following reasons:
• It is very hot. When the temperature returns to
normal, the CD should play.
• The format of the CD might not be compatible.
See Using an MP3 on page 4-56 later in this section.
• There could have been a problem while burning
the CD.
• The label could be caught in the CD player.
If the CD is not playing correctly, for any other reason,
try a known good CD.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
corrected, contact your dealer/retailer. If the radio
displays an error message, write it down and provide it
to your dealer/retailer when reporting the problem.
• You are driving on a very rough road. When the
road becomes smoother, the CD should play.
• The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, or upside down.
• The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour and
try again.
4-55
Using an MP3
MP3/WMA CD-R Disc
MP3/WMA Format
If you burn your own MP3/WMA disc on a personal
computer:
• Make sure the MP3/WMA files are recorded on a
CD-R disc.
• Make sure playlists have a .mp3 or .wpl extension,
other file extensions might not work.
• Files can be recorded with a variety of fixed or
variable bit rates. Song title, artist name, and album
are displayed by the radio when recorded using
ID3 tags version 1 and 2.
• Create a folder structure that makes it easy to find
songs while driving. Organize songs by albums
using one folder for each album. Each folder
or album should contain 18 songs or less.
• Make sure to finalize the disc when burning an
MP3/WMA disc, using multiple sessions. It is usually
better to burn the disc all at once.
The player is able to read and play a maximum of
253 folders, 50 playlists, 20 sessions, and 949 files.
Long file names, folder names, or playlist names
may use more disc memory space than necessary.
4-56
To conserve space on the disc, minimize the length of the
file, folder, or playlist names. An MP3/WMA CD-R that
was recorded using no file folders. The system can
support up to 11 folders in depth, though, keep the depth
of the folders to a minimum in order to keep down the
complexity and confusion in trying to locate a particular
folder during playback. If a CD contains more than the
maximum of 253 folders, 50 playlists, 20 sessions, and
949 files, the player lets you access and navigate up to
the maximum, but all items over the maximum are
played.
Root Directory
The root directory is treated as a folder. If the root
directory has compressed audio files, the directory
displays as F1 ROOT. All files contained directly under
the root directory are accessed prior to any root directory
folders. However, playlists (Px) are always accessed
before root folders or files.
Empty Directory or Folder
If a root directory or a folder exists somewhere in the
file structure that contains only folders/subfolders and
no compressed files directly beneath them, the player
advances to the next folder in the file structure that
contains compressed audio files. The empty folder
does not display.
No Folder
When the CD contains only compressed files, the files
are located under the root folder. The next and previous
folder functions have no function on a CD that was
recorded without folders or playlists. When displaying
the name of the folder the radio displays ROOT.
When the CD contains only playlists and compressed
audio files, but no folders, all files are located under the
root folder. The folder down and the folder up buttons
search playlists (Px) first and then go to the root folder.
When the radio displays the name of the folder, the
radio displays ROOT.
When play enters a new folder, the display does not
automatically show the new folder name unless you
have chosen the folder mode as the default display.
See DISPL (display) later in this section for more
information. The new track name displays.
File System and Naming
The song name that displays is the song name that is
contained in the ID3 tag. If the song name is not present
in the ID3 tag, then the radio displays the file name
without the extension (such as .mp3) as the track name.
Order of Play
Track names longer than 32 characters or four pages
are shortened. Parts of words on the last page of
text and the extension of the filename does not display.
Tracks are played in the following order:
Preprogrammed Playlists
• Play begins from the first track in the first playlist
and continues sequentially through all tracks in
each playlist. When the last track of the last playlist
has played, play continues from the first track of
the first playlist.
Preprogrammed playlists which were created by
WinAmp™, MusicMatch™, or Real Jukebox™ software
can be accessed, however, they cannot be edited.
These playlists are treated as special folders containing
compressed audio song files.
• If the CD does not contain any playlists, then play
begins from the first track under the root directory.
When all tracks from the root directory have played,
play continues from files according to their numerical
listing. After playing the last track from the last folder,
play begins again at the first track of the first folder or
root directory.
4-57
Playing an MP3/WMA
Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up. The
player pulls it in, and READING displays. The CD should
begin playing and the CD symbol displays. If you want to
insert a CD with the ignition off, first press the Z button
or the DISPL knob.
If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD in the
player it stays in the player. When the ignition or radio
is turned on, the CD starts to play where it stopped,
if it was the last selected audio source.
As each new track starts to play, the track number
displays.
1 FLD x (Previous Folder): Press this button to go to
the first track in the previous folder. Pressing this button
while in folder random mode takes you to the previous
folder and plays the tracks in random order in that folder.
2 FLD w (Next Folder): Press this button to go to the
first track in the next folder. Pressing this button while in
folder random mode takes the CD to the next folder and
plays the tracks in random order in that folder.
4-58
3 REV (Reverse): Press and hold this button to
reverse quickly within a track. Press and hold this
button for less than two seconds to reverse at 10 times
the normal playing speed. Press and hold it for more
than two seconds to reverse at 20 times the normal
playing speed. Release this button to play the passage.
REV and the elapsed time of the track displays.
4 FWD (Forward): Press and hold this button to
advance quickly within a track. Press and hold this
button for less than two seconds to advance at 10 times
the normal playing speed. Press and hold it for more
than two seconds to advance at 20 times the normal
playing speed. Release this button to play the passage.
FWD and the elapsed time of the track displays.
6 RDM (Random): To play the tracks in random order
in the current folder or playlist, press and release this
button. FLDR RDM (folder random) displays. Once all of
the tracks in the current folder or playlist have played, the
system moves to the next folder or playlist and plays all of
the tracks in random order.
To play all the tracks in random order on the CD, press
and hold this button for two seconds. A beep sounds and
DISC RDM (disc random) displays. This feature does not
work with playlists.
When in random, pressing and releasing either SEEK
arrow takes the CD to the previous or to the next
random track.
Press and release this button again to turn off random
play. NO RDM (no random) displays.
q SEEK r:
Press the left SEEK arrow to go to the
start of the previous track. Press the right SEEK arrow to
go to the start of the next track. Pressing either SEEK
arrow for more than two seconds searches the previous
or next tracks at two tracks per second. Release the
button to stop searching and to play the track.
o TUNE p: Turning this knob fast tracks reverse or
advances through the tracks in all folders or playlists.
The track number and file name displays for each track.
Turning this knob while in random fast tracks reverse
or advances the tracks in sequential order.
DISPL (Display): Press this knob to switch between
track mode, folder/playlist mode, and time of day mode.
The display shows only eight characters, but there can
be up to four pages of text. If there are more than eight
characters in the song, folder, or playlist name, pressing
this knob within two seconds takes you to the next page
of text. If there are no other pages to be shown, pressing
this knob within two seconds takes you to the next
display mode.
• Track mode displays the current track number and
the ID3 tag song name.
• Folder/playlist mode displays the current folder or
playlist number and the folder/playlist name.
• Time of day mode displays the time of day and the
ID3 tag song name.
To change the default on the display, press the DISPL
knob until you see the desired display, then press
and hold this knob for two seconds. The radio produces
one beep and the selected display is now the default.
INFO (Information): INFO displays when a current
track has ID3 tag information. Press this button to
display the artist name and album contained in the tag.
INFO disappears from the display when the information
in the ID3 tag has finished being read.
4-59
BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio when a
CD is playing. The inactive CD remains inside the radio
for future listening.
Loading: The radio system is acquiring and processing
audio and text data. No action is needed. This message
should disappear shortly.
CD AUX (Auxiliary): Press this button to play a CD
when listening to the radio. The CD symbol illuminates
on the display when a CD is loaded.
Off Air: This channel is not currently in service.
Tune to another channel.
Z
(Eject): Press this button to eject a CD. Eject can
activate while either the ignition or radio is off. CDs can
be loaded with the ignition and radio off if this button is
pressed first.
XM Radio Messages
XL (Explicit Language Channels): These channels,
or any others, can be blocked at a customer’s request,
by calling 1-800-852-XMXM (9696).
Updating: The encryption code in the receiver is being
updated, and no action is required. This process
should take no longer than 30 seconds.
No Signl: The system is functioning correctly, but the
vehicle is in a location that is blocking the XM signal.
When the vehicle is moved into an open area, the signal
should return.
4-60
CH Unavl: This previously assigned channel is no
longer assigned. Tune to another station. If this station
was one of the presets, choose another station for
that preset button.
Unauth: This channel is blocked or cannot be received
with your XM Subscription package.
No Info: No artist, song title, category, or text
information is available at this time on this channel.
The system is working properly.
NotFound: No artist, song title, category, or text
information is available at this time on this channel.
The system is working properly.
XM Lock: The XM receiver in your vehicle could
have previously been in another vehicle. For security
purposes, XM receivers cannot be swapped between
vehicles. If this message is received after having your
vehicle serviced, check with your dealer/retailer.
Radio ID: If this message is received when tuned to
channel 0, there could be a receiver fault. Consult with
your dealer/retailer.
Unknown: If this message is received when tuned to
channel 0, there could be a receiver fault. Consult
with your dealer/retailer.
Check XM: If this message does not clear within
a short period of time, the receiver could have a fault.
Consult with your dealer/retailer.
RDS Radios
THEFTLOCK® is designed to discourage theft of your
vehicle’s radio. The feature works automatically by
learning a portion of the Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN). If the radio is moved to a different
vehicle, it does not operate and LOCKED displays.
When the radio and vehicle are turned off, the blinking
red light indicates that THEFTLOCK® is armed.
With THEFTLOCK® activated, the radio does not
operate if stolen.
Theft-Deterrent Feature
Non-RDS Radios
THEFTLOCK® is designed to discourage theft of your
vehicle’s radio. The feature works automatically by
learning a portion of the Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN). If the radio is moved to a different
vehicle, it does not operate and LOC displays.
Radio Reception
Frequency interference and static can occur during
normal radio reception if items such as cell phone
chargers, vehicle convenience accessories, and external
electronic devices are plugged into the accessory power
outlet. If there is interference or static, unplug the item
from the accessory power outlet.
With THEFTLOCK® activated, the radio does not
operate if stolen.
4-61
AM
XM™ Satellite Radio Service
The range for most AM stations is greater than for FM,
especially at night. The longer range can cause station
frequencies to interfere with each other. For better radio
reception, most AM radio stations boost the power levels
during the day, and then reduce these levels during the
night. Static can also occur when things like storms and
power lines interfere with radio reception. When this
happens, try reducing the treble on the radio.
XM Satellite Radio Service gives digital radio reception
from coast-to-coast in the 48 contiguous United States,
and in Canada. Just as with FM, tall buildings or hills can
interfere with satellite radio signals, causing the sound to
fade in and out. In addition, traveling or standing under
heavy foliage, bridges, garages, or tunnels may cause
loss of the XM signal for a period of time.
FM Stereo
FM signals only reach about 10 to 40 miles
(16 to 65 km). Although the radio has a built-in
electronic circuit that automatically works to reduce
interference, some static can occur, especially around
tall buildings or hills, causing the sound to fade in
and out.
4-62
Cellular Phone Usage
Cellular phone usage may cause interference with the
vehicle’s radio. This interference may occur when making
or receiving phone calls, charging the phone’s battery,
or simply having the phone on. This interference causes
an increased level of static while listening to the radio.
If static is received while listening to the radio, unplug
the cellular phone and turn it off.
Fixed Mast Antenna
Chime Level Adjustment
The fixed mast antenna can withstand most car washes
without being damaged as long as it is securely attached
to the base. If the mast becomes slightly bent, straighten
it out by hand. If the mast is badly bent, replace it.
The radio is used to adjust the vehicle’s chime level.
To change the volume level of the chime, press and
hold pushbutton 6 with the ignition on and the radio
power off. The volume level will change from the normal
level to loud, and LOUD will appear on the radio display.
To change back to the default or normal setting, press
and hold pushbutton 6 again. The volume level will
change from the loud level to normal, and NORMAL will
appear on the radio display. Each time the chime volume
is changed, three chimes will sound to indicate the new
volume selected. Removing the radio and not replacing it
with a factory radio or chime module will disable vehicle
chimes.
Occasionally check to make sure the antenna is
tightened to its base. If tightening is required, tighten
by hand until fully seated plus one quarter turn.
XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna
System
The XM Satellite Radio antenna is located on the roof of
the vehicle. Keep the antenna clear of obstructions for
clear radio reception.
If the vehicle has a sunroof, the performance of the
XM system may be affected if the sunroof is open.
4-63
✍ NOTES
4-64
Section 5
Driving Your Vehicle
Your Driving, the Road, and the Vehicle ............5-2
Defensive Driving ...........................................5-2
Drunk Driving .................................................5-2
Control of a Vehicle ........................................5-3
Braking .........................................................5-3
Antilock Brake System (ABS) ...........................5-5
Braking in Emergencies ...................................5-5
StabiliTrak® System ........................................5-6
Traction Control System (TCS) .........................5-8
Limited-Slip Rear Axle .....................................5-9
Steering ........................................................5-9
Off-Road Recovery .......................................5-11
Passing .......................................................5-11
Loss of Control .............................................5-12
Off-Road Driving ...........................................5-13
Driving at Night ............................................5-25
Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads ..................5-26
Before Leaving on a Long Trip .......................5-27
Highway Hypnosis ........................................5-27
Hill and Mountain Roads ................................5-28
Winter Driving ..............................................5-29
If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand, Mud,
Ice, or Snow .............................................5-31
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out .................5-32
Recovery Hooks ...........................................5-32
Loading the Vehicle ......................................5-33
Truck-Camper Loading Information ..................5-40
Pickup Conversion to Chassis Cab ..................5-40
Towing ..........................................................5-41
Towing Your Vehicle .....................................5-41
Recreational Vehicle Towing ...........................5-41
Towing a Trailer ...........................................5-48
Trailer Recommendations ...............................5-60
5-1
Your Driving, the Road, and
the Vehicle
Defensive Driving
Defensive driving means “always expect the
unexpected.” The first step in driving defensively is to
wear your safety belt — See Safety Belts: They Are for
Everyone on page 2-13.
{ WARNING:
Assume that other road users (pedestrians,
bicyclists, and other drivers) are going to be
careless and make mistakes. Anticipate what they
might do and be ready. In addition:
• Allow enough following distance between you
and the driver in front of you.
• Focus on the task of driving.
Driver distraction can cause collisions resulting in
injury or possible death. These simple defensive
driving techniques could save your life.
5-2
Drunk Driving
{ WARNING:
Drinking and then driving is very dangerous.
Your reflexes, perceptions, attentiveness, and
judgment can be affected by even a small amount
of alcohol. You can have a serious — or even
fatal — collision if you drive after drinking. Do not
drink and drive or ride with a driver who has been
drinking. Ride home in a cab; or if you are with a
group, designate a driver who will not drink.
Death and injury associated with drinking and driving is
a global tragedy.
Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs to drive a
vehicle: judgment, muscular coordination, vision, and
attentiveness.
Police records show that almost 40 percent of all motor
vehicle-related deaths involve alcohol. In most cases,
these deaths are the result of someone who was
drinking and driving. In recent years, more than
17,000 annual motor vehicle-related deaths have been
associated with the use of alcohol, with about
250,000 people injured.
For persons under 21, it is against the law in every
U.S. state to drink alcohol. There are good medical,
psychological, and developmental reasons for
these laws.
The obvious way to eliminate the leading highway
safety problem is for people never to drink alcohol and
then drive.
Medical research shows that alcohol in a person’s
system can make crash injuries worse, especially
injuries to the brain, spinal cord, or heart. This means
that when anyone who has been drinking — driver
or passenger — is in a crash, that person’s chance of
being killed or permanently disabled is higher than if the
person had not been drinking.
Control of a Vehicle
The following three systems help to control the vehicle
while driving — brakes, steering, and accelerator.
At times, as when driving on snow or ice, it is easy to
ask more of those control systems than the tires
and road can provide. Meaning, you can lose control of
the vehicle.
Adding non-dealer/non-retailer accessories can affect
vehicle performance. See Accessories and Modifications
on page 6-3.
Braking
See Brake System Warning Light on page 4-25.
Braking action involves perception time and reaction
time. Deciding to push the brake pedal is perception
time. Actually doing it is reaction time.
5-3
Average reaction time is about three-fourths of a
second. But that is only an average. It might be less
with one driver and as long as two or three seconds or
more with another. Age, physical condition, alertness,
coordination, and eyesight all play a part. So do alcohol,
drugs, and frustration. But even in three-fourths of a
second, a vehicle moving at 100 km/h (60 mph) travels
20 m (66 feet). That could be a lot of distance in an
emergency, so keeping enough space between
the vehicle and others is important.
And, of course, actual stopping distances vary greatly
with the surface of the road, whether it is pavement
or gravel; the condition of the road, whether it is
wet, dry, or icy; tire tread; the condition of the brakes;
the weight of the vehicle; and the amount of brake force
applied.
Avoid needless heavy braking. Some people drive
in spurts — heavy acceleration followed by heavy
braking — rather than keeping pace with traffic. This is
5-4
a mistake. The brakes might not have time to cool
between hard stops. The brakes will wear out much
faster with a lot of heavy braking. Keeping pace with
the traffic and allowing realistic following distances
eliminates a lot of unnecessary braking. That means
better braking and longer brake life.
If the engine ever stops while the vehicle is being driven,
brake normally but do not pump the brakes. If the brakes
are pumped, the pedal could get harder to push down.
If the engine stops, there will still be some power brake
assist but it will be used when the brake is applied. Once
the power assist is used up, it can take longer to stop and
the brake pedal will be harder to push.
Adding non-dealer/non-retailer accessories can affect
vehicle performance. See Accessories and Modifications
on page 6-3.
Antilock Brake System (ABS)
This vehicle has the Antilock Brake System (ABS), an
advanced electronic braking system that helps prevent a
braking skid.
When the engine is started and the vehicle begins to
drive away, ABS checks itself. A momentary motor
or clicking noise might be heard while this test is going
on. This is normal.
If there is a problem with
the ABS, this warning light
stays on. See Antilock
Brake System (ABS)
Warning Light on
page 4-26.
Let us say the road is wet and you are driving safely.
Suddenly, an animal jumps out in front of you. You slam
on the brakes and continue braking. Here is what
happens with ABS:
A computer senses that the wheels are slowing down.
If one of the wheels is about to stop rolling, the computer
will separately work the brakes at each front wheel
and at both rear wheels.
ABS can change the brake pressure to each wheel, as
required, faster than any driver could. This can help
the driver steer around the obstacle while braking hard.
As the brakes are applied, the computer keeps
receiving updates on wheel speed and controls braking
pressure accordingly.
Remember: ABS does not change the time needed to
get a foot up to the brake pedal or always decrease
stopping distance. If you get too close to the vehicle in
front of you, there will not be enough time to apply
the brakes if that vehicle suddenly slows or stops.
Always leave enough room up ahead to stop, even
with ABS.
Using ABS
Do not pump the brakes. Just hold the brake pedal
down firmly and let antilock work. The brakes might
vibrate or some noise might be heard, but this is normal.
Braking in Emergencies
ABS allows the driver to steer and brake at the same
time. In many emergencies, steering can help more than
even the very best braking.
5-5
Brake Assist
This vehicle has a Brake Assist feature designed to
assist the driver in stopping or decreasing vehicle speed
in emergency driving conditions. This feature uses the
stability system hydraulic brake control module to
supplement the power brake system under conditions
where the driver has quickly and forcefully applied
the brake pedal in an attempt to quickly stop or slow
down the vehicle. The stability system hydraulic
brake control module increases brake pressure at each
corner of the vehicle until the ABS activates. Minor
brake pedal pulsations or pedal movement during this
time is normal and the driver should continue to
apply the brake pedal as the driving situation dictates
The Brake Assist feature will automatically disengage
when the brake pedal is released or brake pedal
pressure is quickly decreased.
StabiliTrak® System
The vehicle has an electronic stability control system
called StabiliTrak. It is an advanced computer controlled
system that assists the driver with directional control
of the vehicle in difficult driving conditions.
5-6
StabiliTrak activates when the computer senses a
discrepancy between the intended path and the direction
the vehicle is actually traveling. StabiliTrak selectively
applies braking pressure at any one of the vehicle’s
brakes to assist the driver with keeping the vehicle on
the intended path.
When the vehicle is started and begins to move, the
system performs several diagnostic checks to insure
there are no problems. The system may be heard or felt
while it is working. This is normal and does not mean
there is a problem with the vehicle. The system should
initialize before the vehicle reaches 20 mph (32 km/h).
In some cases, it may take approximately two miles of
driving before the system initializes.
If cruise control is being used when StabiliTrak activates,
the cruise control automatically disengages. The cruise
control can be re-engaged when road conditions allow.
See Cruise Control on page 4-7.
If there is a problem detected with StabiliTrak, a
SERVICE STAB SYS message displays on the Driver
Information Center (DIC). See DIC Warnings and
Messages on page 4-37 for more information. When this
message is displayed, the system is not working.
Adjust your driving accordingly.
StabiliTrak and Traction Control (TCS) come on
automatically whenever the vehicle is started and the
systems are reset with each ignition cycle. However,
when the transfer case is placed in Four-Wheel-Low
mode, StabiliTrak is automatically disabled. See
Four-Wheel Drive on page 3-25 for more information.
It is recommended to leave the system on for normal
driving conditions, but it may be necessary to turn
the TCS portion of the system off if the vehicle is stuck
in sand, mud, ice, or snow, and it is necessary to
“rock” the vehicle to attempt to free it. If traction control
is turned off, only the brake-traction control portion
of traction control will work. The engine speed
management will be disabled. In this mode, engine
power is not reduced automatically and the drive wheels
can spin more freely. This can cause the brake-traction
control to activate constantly. See If Your Vehicle is
Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snow on page 5-31.
The StabiliTrak/TCS light
will flash on the instrument
panel cluster when the
TCS system or StabiliTrak
is both on and activated.
The StabiliTrak/TCS button
is located on the
instrument panel.
To turn off TCS, press and release the StabiliTrak/TCS
button. The StabiliTrak/TCS light comes on in the
instrument panel cluster, and TRAC OFF comes on
the DIC. To turn TCS back on, press and release the
StabiliTrak/TCS button.
To turn off TCS and StabiliTrak, press and hold the
StabiliTrak/TCS button until the TRAC OFF and
STAB SYS OFF messages come on the DIC and the
StabiliTrak/TCS light comes on the instrument panel.
To turn TCS and StabiliTrak back on, press and release
the StabiliTrak/TCS button.
When the TCS or StabiliTrak system is turned off, the
StabiliTrak/TCS light and the appropriate TRAC OFF or
STAB SYS OFF message will be displayed on the DIC.
The vehicle will still have brake-traction control when TCS
or StabiliTrak is off, but will not be able to use the engine
speed management system. The StabiliTrak/TCS light
flashes when either system is actively working. See
Traction Control Operation following for more information.
5-7
Traction Control System (TCS)
The Traction Control System (TCS) is part of StabiliTrak.
TCS limits wheel slip which is especially useful in
slippery road conditions. The system operates only if it
senses that any of the wheels are spinning or
beginning to lose traction. When this happens, TCS
applies the brakes to limit wheel spin and also reduces
engine power. The system may be heard or felt while
it is working. This is normal and does not mean there is
a problem with the vehicle.
Notice: If the wheel(s) of one axle is allowed to
spin excessively while the StabiliTrak, ABS
and brake warning lights and any relevant DIC
messages are displayed, the transfer case could be
damaged. The repairs would not be covered by
the vehicle warranty. Reduce engine power and do
not spin the wheel(s) excessively while these
lights and messages are displayed.
TCS can operate on dry roads under some conditions.
When this happens, the system may be heard
working or a reduction in acceleration may be noticed.
5-8
This is normal and does not mean there is a problem
with the vehicle. Examples of these conditions include
hard acceleration in a turn, an abrupt upshift or
downshift of the transmission or driving on rough roads.
If cruise control is being used when TCS begins to
limit wheel spin, the cruise control automatically
disengages. The cruise control can be re-engaged
when road conditions allow. See Cruise Control
on page 4-7.
The message TRACTION FAULT appears in the Driver
Information Center (DIC) when a TCS or Antilock Brake
System (ABS) problem has been detected and the
vehicle needs service. When this message is on, the
system will not limit wheel spin. Adjust your driving
accordingly. See DIC Warnings and Messages on
page 4-37.
The StabiliTrak/TCS light
will flash on the instrument
panel cluster when the
TCS system or StabiliTrak
is both on and activated.
The StabiliTrak/TCS button
is located on the
instrument panel.
Steering
Power Steering
If power steering assist is lost because the engine stops
or the system is not functioning, the vehicle can be
steered but it will take more effort.
To turn off TCS, press and release the StabiliTrak/TCS
button. The StabiliTrak/TCS light comes on in the
instrument panel cluster, and TRAC OFF comes on
the DIC. To turn TCS back on, press and release the
StabiliTrak/TCS button.
Adding non-dealer/non-retailer accessories can affect
the vehicle’s performance. See Accessories and
Modifications on page 6-3.
Limited-Slip Rear Axle
Vehicles with a limited-slip rear axle can give more
traction on snow, mud, ice, sand or gravel. It works like
a standard axle most of the time, but when traction
is low, this feature allows the drive wheel with the most
traction to move the vehicle.
Steering Tips
It is important to take curves at a reasonable speed.
Traction in a curve depends on the condition of the tires
and the road surface, the angle at which the curve is
banked, and vehicle speed. While in a curve, speed is
the one factor that can be controlled.
If there is a need to reduce speed, do it before entering
the curve, while the front wheels are straight.
Try to adjust the speed so you can drive through the
curve. Maintain a reasonable, steady speed. Wait
to accelerate until out of the curve, and then accelerate
gently into the straightaway.
5-9
Steering in Emergencies
There are times when steering can be more effective
than braking. For example, you come over a hill and find
a truck stopped in your lane, or a car suddenly pulls
out from nowhere, or a child darts out from between
parked cars and stops right in front of you. These
problems can be avoided by braking — if you can stop
in time. But sometimes you cannot stop in time
because there is no room. That is the time for evasive
action — steering around the problem.
The vehicle can perform very well in emergencies like
these. First apply the brakes. See Braking on page 5-3.
It is better to remove as much speed as possible
from a collision. Then steer around the problem, to the
left or right depending on the space available.
An emergency like this requires close attention and a
quick decision. If holding the steering wheel at the
recommended 9 and 3 o’clock positions, it can be turned
a full 180 degrees very quickly without removing either
hand. But you have to act fast, steer quickly, and just as
quickly straighten the wheel once you have avoided the
object.
The fact that such emergency situations are always
possible is a good reason to practice defensive driving
at all times and wear safety belts properly.
5-10
Off-Road Recovery
Passing
The vehicle’s right wheels can drop off the edge of a
road onto the shoulder while driving.
Passing another vehicle on a two-lane road can be
dangerous. To reduce the risk of danger while passing:
• Look down the road, to the sides, and to crossroads
for situations that might affect a successful pass.
If in doubt, wait.
• Watch for traffic signs, pavement markings, and
lines that could indicate a turn or an intersection.
Never cross a solid or double-solid line on your side
of the lane.
• Do not get too close to the vehicle you want to
pass. Doing so can reduce your visibility.
• Wait your turn to pass a slow vehicle.
• When you are being passed, ease to the right.
If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below the
pavement, recovery should be fairly easy. Ease off the
accelerator and then, if there is nothing in the way, steer
so that the vehicle straddles the edge of the pavement.
Turn the steering wheel 8 to 13 cm, 3 to 5 inches,
(about one-eighth turn) until the right front tire contacts
the pavement edge. Then turn the steering wheel to go
straight down the roadway.
5-11
Loss of Control
Let us review what driving experts say about what
happens when the three control systems — brakes,
steering, and acceleration — do not have enough friction
where the tires meet the road to do what the driver
has asked.
In any emergency, do not give up. Keep trying to steer
and constantly seek an escape route or area of less
danger.
Skidding
In a skid, a driver can lose control of the vehicle.
Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking reasonable
care suited to existing conditions, and by not overdriving
those conditions. But skids are always possible.
The three types of skids correspond to the vehicle’s three
control systems. In the braking skid, the wheels are not
rolling. In the steering or cornering skid, too much speed
or steering in a curve causes tires to slip and lose
cornering force. And in the acceleration skid, too much
throttle causes the driving wheels to spin.
Remember: StabiliTrak® assists the driver with
directional control. See StabiliTrak® System on
page 5-6. If the StabiliTrak® System is off, then a
steering or cornering skid will need to be handled
5-12
entirely by the driver using counter steering techniques
and an acceleration skid will be best handled by
easing your foot off the accelerator pedal.
If the vehicle starts to slide, ease your foot off the
accelerator pedal and quickly steer the way you want
the vehicle to go. If you start steering quickly enough,
the vehicle may straighten out. Always be ready for
a second skid if it occurs.
Of course, traction is reduced when water, snow, ice,
gravel, or other material is on the road. For safety, slow
down and adjust your driving to these conditions. It is
important to slow down on slippery surfaces because
stopping distance will be longer and vehicle control more
limited.
While driving on a surface with reduced traction, try your
best to avoid sudden steering, acceleration, or braking,
including reducing vehicle speed by shifting to a lower
gear. Any sudden changes could cause the tires to
slide. You may not realize the surface is slippery until
the vehicle is skidding. Learn to recognize warning
clues — such as enough water, ice, or packed snow on
the road to make a mirrored surface — and slow down
when you have any doubt.
Remember: Any Antilock Brake System (ABS) helps
avoid only the braking skid.
Off-Road Driving
Vehicles with four-wheel drive can be used for off-road
driving. Vehicles without four-wheel drive should not
be driven off-road except on a level, solid surface.
The airbag system is designed to work properly under a
wide range of conditions, including off-road usage.
Always wear your safety belt and observe safe driving
speeds, especially on rough terrain.
Drinking and driving can be very dangerous on any road
and this is certainly true for off-road driving. At the
very time you need special alertness and driving skills,
your reflexes, perceptions, and judgment can be
affected by even a small amount of alcohol. You could
have a serious — or even fatal — accident if you
drink and drive or ride with a driver who has been
drinking.
Off-roading can be great fun but has some definite
hazards. The greatest of these is the terrain itself. When
off-road driving, traffic lanes are not marked, curves
are not banked, and there are no road signs. Surfaces
can be slippery, rough, uphill, or downhill.
Off-roading involves some new skills. That is why it is
very important that you read these driving tips and
suggestions to help make off-road driving safer
and more enjoyable.
Before You Go Off-Roading
• Have all necessary maintenance and service
work done.
• Make sure there is enough fuel, that fluid levels are
where they should be, and that the spare tire is fully
inflated.
• Be sure to read all the information about
four-wheel-drive vehicles in this manual.
• Make sure all underbody shields, if the vehicle has
them, are properly attached.
• Know the local laws that apply to off-roading where
you will be driving or check with law enforcement
people in the area.
• Be sure to get the necessary permission if you will
be on private land.
Avoid sharp turns and abrupt maneuvers. Failure to
operate the vehicle correctly off-road could result in loss
of vehicle control or vehicle rollover.
5-13
Loading Your Vehicle for Off-Road
Driving
WARNING:
(Continued)
• Heavy loads on the roof raise the vehicle’s
{ WARNING:
• Cargo on the load floor piled higher than the
•
seatbacks can be thrown forward during a
sudden stop. You or your passengers could
be injured. Keep cargo below the top of the
seatbacks.
Unsecured cargo on the load floor can be
tossed about when driving over rough terrain.
You or your passengers can be struck by
flying objects. Secure the cargo properly.
WARNING:
(Continued)
center of gravity, making it more likely to roll
over. You can be seriously or fatally injured if
the vehicle rolls over. Put heavy loads inside
the cargo area, not on the roof. Keep cargo in
the cargo area as far forward and low as
possible.
There are some important things to remember about
how to load your vehicle.
• The heaviest things should be on the floor, forward
of the rear axle. Put heavier items as far forward
as you can.
• Be sure the load is properly secured, so things are
not tossed around.
You will find other important information under Loading
the Vehicle on page 5-33 and Tires on page 6-57.
5-14
Environmental Concerns
Traveling to Remote Areas
Off-road driving can provide wholesome and satisfying
recreation. However, it also raises environmental
concerns. We recognize these concerns and urge every
off-roader to follow these basic rules for protecting
the environment:
It makes sense to plan your trip, especially when going
to a remote area. Know the terrain and plan your
route. Get accurate maps of trails and terrain. Check to
see if there are any blocked or closed roads.
• Always use established trails, roads, and areas that
have been specially set aside for public off-road
recreational driving and obey all posted regulations.
• Avoid any driving practice that could damage
shrubs, flowers, trees, or grasses or disturb wildlife.
This includes wheel-spinning, breaking down
trees, or unnecessary driving through streams or
over soft ground.
• Always carry a litter bag and make sure all refuse is
removed from any campsite before leaving.
• Take extreme care with open fires (where
permitted), camp stoves, and lanterns.
• Never park your vehicle over dry grass or other
combustible materials that could catch fire from
the heat of the vehicle’s exhaust system.
It is also a good idea to travel with at least one other
vehicle in case something happens to one of them.
For vehicles with a winch, be sure to read the winch
instructions. In a remote area, a winch can be handy if
you get stuck but you will want to know how to use
it properly.
Getting Familiar with Off-Road Driving
It is a good idea to practice in an area that is safe
and close to home before you go into the wilderness.
Off-roading requires some new and different skills.
Tune your senses to different kinds of signals. Your eyes
need to constantly sweep the terrain for unexpected
obstacles. Your ears need to listen for unusual tire
or engine sounds. Use your arms, hands, feet, and body
to respond to vibrations and vehicle bounce.
5-15
Controlling the vehicle is the key to successful off-road
driving. One of the best ways to control the vehicle
is to control the speed. At higher speeds:
• You approach things faster and have less time to
react.
• There is less time to scan the terrain for obstacles.
• The vehicle has more bounce when driving over
obstacles.
• More braking distance is needed, especially on an
unpaved surface.
{ WARNING:
When you are driving off-road, bouncing and quick
changes in direction can easily throw you out of
position. This could cause you to lose control and
crash. So, whether you are driving on or off the
road, you and your passengers should wear safety
belts.
5-16
Scanning the Terrain
Off-road driving can take you over many different kinds
of terrain. Be familiar with the terrain and its many
different features.
Surface Conditions: Off-roading surfaces can be
hard-packed dirt, gravel, rocks, grass, sand, mud, snow,
or ice. Each of these surfaces affects the vehicle’s
steering, acceleration, and braking in different ways.
Depending on the surface, slipping, sliding, wheel
spinning, delayed acceleration, poor traction, and longer
braking distances can occur.
Surface Obstacles: Unseen or hidden obstacles can
be hazardous. A rock, log, hole, rut, or bump can startle
you if you are not prepared for them. Often these
obstacles are hidden by grass, bushes, snow, or even
the rise and fall of the terrain itself.
Some things to consider:
•
•
•
•
Is the path ahead clear?
Will the surface texture change abruptly up ahead?
Does the travel take you uphill or downhill?
Will you have to stop suddenly or change direction
quickly?
Driving on Hills
Off-road driving often takes you up, down, or across a
hill. Driving safely on hills requires good judgment
and an understanding of what the vehicle can and
cannot do. There are some hills that simply cannot be
driven, no matter how well built the vehicle.
When driving over obstacles or rough terrain, keep a firm
grip on the steering wheel. Ruts, troughs, or other surface
features can jerk the wheel out of your hands.
{ WARNING:
When driving over bumps, rocks, or other obstacles, the
wheels can leave the ground. If this happens, even
with one or two wheels, you cannot control the vehicle
as well or at all.
Many hills are simply too steep for any vehicle. If
you drive up them, you will stall. If you drive down
them, you cannot control your speed. If you drive
across them, you will roll over. You could be
seriously injured or killed. If you have any doubt
about the steepness, do not drive the hill.
Because you will be on an unpaved surface, it is
especially important to avoid sudden acceleration,
sudden turns, or sudden braking.
Off-roading requires a different kind of alertness from
driving on paved roads and highways. There are no road
signs, posted speed limits, or signal lights. Use good
judgment about what is safe and what is not.
5-17
Approaching a Hill
Driving Uphill
When you approach a hill, decide if it is too steep to
climb, descend, or cross. Steepness can be hard
to judge. On a very small hill, for example, there may be
a smooth, constant incline with only a small change in
elevation where you can easily see all the way to
the top. On a large hill, the incline may get steeper as
you near the top, but you might not see this because the
crest of the hill is hidden by bushes, grass, or shrubs.
Once you decide it is safe to drive up the hill:
Consider this as you approach a hill:
• Is there a constant incline, or does the hill get
• Use a low gear and get a firm grip on the steering
wheel.
• Get a smooth start up the hill and try to maintain
speed. Not using more power than needed can
avoid spinning the wheels or sliding.
{ WARNING:
sharply steeper in places?
• Is there good traction on the hillside, or will the
surface cause tire slipping?
• Is there a straight path up or down the hill so you
will not have to make turning maneuvers?
Turning or driving across steep hills can be
dangerous. You could lose traction, slide
sideways, and possibly roll over. You could be
seriously injured or killed. When driving up hills,
always try to go straight up.
• Are there obstructions on the hill that can block your
path, such as boulders, trees, logs, or ruts?
• What is beyond the hill? Is there a cliff, an
embankment, a drop-off, a fence? Get out and walk
the hill if you do not know. It is the smart way to
find out.
• Is the hill simply too rough? Steep hills often have
ruts, gullies, troughs, and exposed rocks because
they are more susceptible to the effects of erosion.
5-18
• Try to drive straight up the hill if at all possible.
If the path twists and turns, you might want to
find another route.
• Ease up on the speed as you approach the top of
the hill.
• Attach a flag to the vehicle to be more visible to
approaching traffic on trails or hills.
• Sound the horn as you approach the top of the hill
to let opposing traffic know you are there.
• Use headlamps even during the day to make the
vehicle more visible to oncoming traffic.
{ WARNING:
Driving to the top (crest) of a hill at full speed can
cause an accident. There could be a drop-off,
embankment, cliff, or even another vehicle. You
could be seriously injured or killed. As you near
the top of a hill, slow down and stay alert.
If the vehicle stalls, or is about to stall, and you cannot
make it up the hill:
• Push the brake pedal to stop the vehicle and keep
it from rolling backwards and apply the parking
brake.
• If the engine is still running, shift the transmission to
R (Reverse), release the parking brake, and slowly
back down the hill in R (Reverse).
• If the engine has stopped running, you need to
restart it. With the brake pedal pressed and the
parking brake still applied, shift the automatic
transmission to P (Park) or the manual transmission
to Neutral and restart the engine. Then, shift to
R (Reverse), release the parking brake, and slowly
back down the hill as straight as possible in
R (Reverse).
• While backing down the hill, put your left hand on the
steering wheel at the 12 o’clock position so you can
tell if the wheels are straight and can maneuver as
you back down. It is best to back down the hill with
the wheels straight rather than in the left or right
direction. Turning the wheel too far to the left or right
will increase the possibility of a rollover.
5-19
Things not to do if the vehicle stalls, or is about to stall,
when going up a hill:
• Never attempt to prevent a stall by shifting into
N (Neutral), or pressing the clutch pedal if the
vehicle has a manual transmission, to rev-up the
engine and regain forward momentum. This will not
work. The vehicle can roll backward very quickly
and could go out of control.
• Never try to turn around if about to stall when going
up a hill. If the hill is steep enough to stall the
vehicle, it is steep enough to cause it to roll over.
If you cannot make it up the hill, back straight down
the hill.
If, after stalling, you try to back down the hill and decide
you just cannot do it, set the parking brake, shift to
P (Park) or 1 (First) with a manual transmission, and turn
off the engine. Leave the vehicle and go get some help.
Exit on the uphill side and stay clear of the path the
vehicle would take if it rolled downhill. Do not shift the
transfer case to Neutral when you leave the vehicle.
Leave it in some gear.
5-20
{ WARNING:
Shifting the transfer case to Neutral can cause
your vehicle to roll even if the transmission is in
P (Park). This is because the Neutral position on
the transfer case overrides the transmission. You
or someone else could be injured. If you are going
to leave your vehicle, set the parking brake and
shift the transmission to P (Park). But do not shift
the transfer case to Neutral.
Driving Downhill
When off-roading takes you downhill, consider:
• How steep is the downhill? Will I be able to maintain
vehicle control?
• What is the surface like? Smooth? Rough?
Slippery? Hard-packed dirt? Gravel?
• Are there hidden surface obstacles? Ruts? Logs?
Boulders?
• What is at the bottom of the hill? Is there a hidden
creek bank or even a river bottom with large rocks?
If you decide you can go down a hill safely, try to keep
the vehicle headed straight down. Use a low gear
so engine drag can help the brakes so they do not have
to do all the work. Descend slowly, keeping the
vehicle under control at all times.
Things not to do when driving down a hill:
• When driving downhill, avoid turns that take you
across the incline of the hill. A hill that is not too
steep to drive down might be too steep to drive
across. The vehicle could roll over.
• Never go downhill with the transmission in
N (Neutral), called free-wheeling. The brakes will
have to do all the work and could overheat
and fade.
Vehicles are much more likely to stall when going uphill,
but if it happens when going downhill:
1. Stop the vehicle by applying the regular brakes and
apply the parking brake.
2. Shift to P (Park) and, while still braking, restart the
engine.
3. Shift back to a low gear, release the parking brake,
and drive straight down.
{ WARNING:
4. If the engine will not start, get out and get help.
Heavy braking when going down a hill can cause
your brakes to overheat and fade. This could
cause loss of control and a serious accident.
Apply the brakes lightly when descending a hill
and use a low gear to keep vehicle speed under
control.
5-21
Driving Across an Incline
An off-road trail will probably go across the incline of a
hill. To decide whether to try to drive across the
incline, consider the following:
{ WARNING:
Driving across an incline that is too steep will
make your vehicle roll over. You could be
seriously injured or killed. If you have any doubt
about the steepness of the incline, do not drive
across it. Find another route instead.
• A hill that can be driven straight up or down might be
too steep to drive across. When going straight up or
down a hill, the length of the wheel base — the
distance from the front wheels to the rear
wheels — reduces the likelihood the vehicle will
tumble end over end. But when driving across an
incline, the narrower track width — the distance
between the left and right wheels — might not
5-22
prevent the vehicle from tilting and rolling over.
Driving across an incline puts more weight on the
downhill wheels which could cause a downhill slide
or a rollover.
• Surface conditions can be a problem. Loose gravel,
muddy spots, or even wet grass can cause the
tires to slip sideways, downhill. If the vehicle slips
sideways, it can hit something that will trip it — a
rock, a rut, etc. — and roll over.
• Hidden obstacles can make the steepness of the
incline even worse. If you drive across a rock with the
uphill wheels, or if the downhill wheels drop into a rut
or depression, the vehicle can tilt even more.
For these reasons, carefully consider whether to try to
drive across an incline. Just because the trail goes
across the incline does not mean you have to drive it.
The last vehicle to try it might have rolled over.
If you feel the vehicle starting to slide sideways, turn
downhill. This should help straighten out the vehicle and
prevent the side slipping. The best way to prevent
this is to “walk the course” first, so you know what the
surface is like before driving it.
Stalling on an Incline
{ WARNING:
Getting out on the downhill (low) side of a vehicle
stopped across an incline is dangerous. If the
vehicle rolls over, you could be crushed or killed.
Always get out on the uphill (high) side of the
vehicle and stay well clear of the rollover path.
If the vehicle stalls when crossing an incline, be sure you,
and any passengers, get out on the uphill side, even if the
door there is harder to open. If you get out on the downhill
side and the vehicle starts to roll over, you will be right in
its path.
If you have to walk down the slope, stay out of the path
the vehicle will take if it does roll over.
Driving in Mud, Sand, Snow, or Ice
When you drive in mud, snow, or sand, the wheels do not
get good traction. Acceleration is not as quick, turning is
more difficult, and braking distances are longer.
When driving on sand, wheel traction changes. On
loosely packed sand, such as on beaches or sand
dunes, the tires will tend to sink into the sand. This
affects steering, accelerating, and braking. Drive
at a reduced speed and avoid sharp turns or abrupt
maneuvers.
Hard packed snow and ice offer the worst tire traction.
On these surfaces, it is very easy to lose control.
On wet ice, for example, the traction is so poor that you
will have difficulty accelerating. And, if the vehicle
does get moving, poor steering and difficult braking can
cause it to slide out of control.
{ WARNING:
Driving on frozen lakes, ponds, or rivers can be
dangerous. Underwater springs, currents under
the ice, or sudden thaws can weaken the ice. Your
vehicle could fall through the ice and you and your
passengers could drown. Drive your vehicle on
safe surfaces only.
It is best to use a low gear when in mud — the deeper
the mud, the lower the gear. In really deep mud,
keep the vehicle moving so it does not get stuck.
5-23
Driving in Water
{ WARNING:
Driving through rushing water can be dangerous.
Deep water can sweep your vehicle downstream
and you and your passengers could drown. If it is
only shallow water, it can still wash away the
ground from under your tires, and you could lose
traction and roll the vehicle over. Do not drive
through rushing water.
Heavy rain can mean flash flooding, and flood waters
demand extreme caution.
Find out how deep the water is before driving through it.
Do not try it if it is deep enough to cover the wheel
hubs, axles, or exhaust pipe — you probably will not get
through. Deep water can damage the axle and other
vehicle parts.
5-24
If the water is not too deep, drive slowly through it.
At faster speeds, water splashes on the ignition system
and the vehicle can stall. Stalling can also occur if
you get the tailpipe under water. If the tailpipe is under
water, you will never be able to start the engine.
When going through water, remember that when the
brakes get wet, it might take longer to stop. See Driving
in Rain and on Wet Roads on page 5-26.
After Off-Road Driving
Remove any brush or debris that has collected on the
underbody, chassis, or under the hood. These
accumulations can be a fire hazard.
After operation in mud or sand, have the brake linings
cleaned and checked. These substances can cause
glazing and uneven braking. Check the body structure,
steering, suspension, wheels, tires, and exhaust system
for damage and check the fuel lines and cooling system
for any leakage.
The vehicle requires more frequent service due to
off-road use. Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for
additional information.
Driving at Night
Night driving is more dangerous than day driving because
some drivers are likely to be impaired — by alcohol or
drugs, with night vision problems, or by fatigue.
Night driving tips include:
• Drive defensively.
• Do not drink and drive.
• Reduce headlamp glare by adjusting the inside
rearview mirror.
• Slow down and keep more space between you and
other vehicles because headlamps can only light up
so much road ahead.
•
•
•
•
•
Watch for animals.
When tired, pull off the road.
Do not wear sunglasses.
Avoid staring directly into approaching headlamps.
Keep the windshield and all glass on your vehicle
clean — inside and out.
• Keep your eyes moving, especially during turns or
curves.
No one can see as well at night as in the daytime.
But, as we get older, these differences increase.
A 50-year-old driver might need at least twice as much
light to see the same thing at night as a 20-year-old.
5-25
Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads
Hydroplaning
Rain and wet roads can reduce vehicle traction
and affect your ability to stop and accelerate. Always
drive slower in these types of driving conditions
and avoid driving through large puddles and
deep-standing or flowing water.
Hydroplaning is dangerous. Water can build up under
your vehicle’s tires so they actually ride on the
water. This can happen if the road is wet enough and
you are going fast enough. When your vehicle is
hydroplaning, it has little or no contact with the road.
{ WARNING:
Wet brakes can cause crashes. They might not
work as well in a quick stop and could cause
pulling to one side. You could lose control of the
vehicle.
After driving through a large puddle of water or a
car/vehicle wash, lightly apply the brake pedal until
the brakes work normally.
Flowing or rushing water creates strong forces.
Driving through flowing water could cause your
vehicle to be carried away. If this happens, you
and other vehicle occupants could drown. Do not
ignore police warnings and be very cautious about
trying to drive through flowing water.
5-26
There is no hard and fast rule about hydroplaning. The
best advice is to slow down when the road is wet.
Other Rainy Weather Tips
Besides slowing down, other wet weather driving tips
include:
•
•
•
•
•
Allow extra following distance.
Pass with caution.
Keep windshield wiping equipment in good shape.
Keep the windshield washer fluid reservoir filled.
Have good tires with proper tread depth. See Tires
on page 6-57.
• Turn off cruise control.
Before Leaving on a Long Trip
Highway Hypnosis
To prepare your vehicle for a long trip, consider having
it serviced by your dealer/retailer before departing.
Always be alert and pay attention to your surroundings
while driving. If you become tired or sleepy, find a
safe place to park your vehicle and rest.
Things to check on your own include:
• Windshield Washer Fluid: Reservoir full? Windows
clean — inside and outside?
•
•
•
•
Wiper Blades: In good shape?
Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: All levels checked?
Lamps: Do they all work and are lenses clean?
Tires: Are treads good? Are tires inflated to
recommended pressure?
Other driving tips include:
• Keep the vehicle well ventilated.
• Keep interior temperature cool.
• Keep your eyes moving — scan the road ahead
and to the sides.
• Check the rearview mirror and vehicle instruments
often.
• Weather and Maps: Safe to travel? Have
up-to-date maps?
5-27
Hill and Mountain Roads
Driving on steep hills or through mountains is different
than driving on flat or rolling terrain. Tips for driving
in these conditions include:
• Keep the vehicle serviced and in good shape.
• Check all fluid levels and brakes, tires, cooling
system, and transmission.
• Going down steep or long hills, shift to a
lower gear.
{ WARNING:
If you do not shift down, the brakes could get so
hot that they would not work well. You would then
have poor braking or even none going down a hill.
You could crash. Shift down to let the engine
assist the brakes on a steep downhill slope.
{ WARNING:
Coasting downhill in N (Neutral) or with the ignition
off is dangerous. The brakes will have to do all the
work of slowing down and they could get so hot
that they would not work well. You would then
have poor braking or even none going down a hill.
You could crash. Always have the engine running
and the vehicle in gear when going downhill.
• Stay in your own lane. Do not swing wide or cut
across the center of the road. Drive at speeds
that let you stay in your own lane.
• Top of hills: Be alert — something could be in your
lane (stalled car, accident).
• Pay attention to special road signs (falling rocks
area, winding roads, long grades, passing or
no-passing zones) and take appropriate action.
See Off-Road Driving on page 5-13 for information
about driving off-road.
5-28
Winter Driving
Driving on Snow or Ice
Drive carefully when there is snow or ice between the
tires and the road, creating less traction or grip. Wet ice
can occur at about 32°F (0°C) when freezing rain
begins to fall, resulting in even less traction. Avoid
driving on wet ice or in freezing rain until roads can be
treated with salt or sand.
Drive with caution, whatever the condition. Accelerate
gently so traction is not lost. Accelerating too quickly
causes the wheels to spin and makes the surface under
the tires slick, so there is even less traction.
Try not to break the fragile traction. If you accelerate too
fast, the drive wheels will spin and polish the surface
under the tires even more.
The StabiliTrak® System on page 5-6 improves the
ability to accelerate on slippery roads, but slow down
and adjust your driving to the road conditions. When
driving through deep snow, it might be beneficial to turn
off the traction control part of the StabiliTrak® System
to help maintain vehicle motion at lower speeds.
Once beyond the deep snow, push the StabiliTrak®
button again to turn traction control back on.
The Antilock Brake System (ABS) on page 5-5 improves
vehicle stability during hard stops on a slippery roads,
but apply the brakes sooner than when on dry
pavement.
Allow greater following distance on any slippery road
and watch for slippery spots. Icy patches can occur on
otherwise clear roads in shaded areas. The surface
of a curve or an overpass can remain icy when
the surrounding roads are clear. Avoid sudden steering
maneuvers and braking while on ice.
Turn off cruise control, if equipped, on slippery surfaces.
5-29
Blizzard Conditions
Being stuck in snow can be in a serious situation. Stay
with the vehicle unless there is help nearby. If possible,
use the Roadside Assistance Program on page 8-7.
To get help and keep everyone in the vehicle safe:
• Turn on the Hazard Warning Flashers on page 4-3.
• Tie a red cloth to an outside mirror.
WARNING:
• Open a window about 5 cm (two inches) on
•
•
{ WARNING:
Snow can trap engine exhaust under the vehicle.
This may cause exhaust gases to get inside.
Engine exhaust contains carbon monoxide (CO)
which cannot be seen or smelled. It can cause
unconsciousness and even death.
If the vehicle is stuck in the snow:
• Clear away snow from around the base of
your vehicle, especially any that is blocking
the exhaust pipe.
• Check again from time to time to be sure
snow does not collect there.
WARNING:
5-30
(Continued)
(Continued)
the side of the vehicle that is away from the
wind to bring in fresh air.
Fully open the air outlets on or under the
instrument panel.
Adjust the Climate Control system to a setting
that circulates the air inside the vehicle and
set the fan speed to the highest setting. See
Climate Control System in the Index.
For more information about carbon monoxide, see
Engine Exhaust on page 3-34.
Snow can trap exhaust gases under your vehicle.
This can cause deadly CO (carbon monoxide) gas
to get inside. CO could overcome you and kill you.
You cannot see it or smell it, so you might not
know it is in your vehicle. Clear away snow from
around the base of your vehicle, especially any
that is blocking the exhaust.
Run the engine for short periods only as needed to
keep warm, but be careful.
To save fuel, run the engine for only short periods as
needed to warm the vehicle and then shut the engine off
and close the window most of the way to save heat.
Repeat this until help arrives but only when you
feel really uncomfortable from the cold. Moving about to
keep warm also helps.
If it takes some time for help to arrive, now and then
when you run the engine, push the accelerator
pedal slightly so the engine runs faster than the idle
speed. This keeps the battery charged to restart
the vehicle and to signal for help with the headlamps.
Do this as little as possible to save fuel.
If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand,
Mud, Ice, or Snow
Slowly and cautiously spin the wheels to free the
vehicle when stuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow. See
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out on page 5-32.
If stuck too severely for the traction system to free the
vehicle, turn the traction system off and use the
rocking method.
{ WARNING:
If you let your vehicle’s tires spin at high speed, they
can explode, and you or others could be injured.
The vehicle can overheat, causing an engine
compartment fire or other damage. Spin the wheels
as little as possible and avoid going above 35 mph
(55 km/h) as shown on the speedometer.
For information about using tire chains on the vehicle,
see Tire Chains on page 6-78.
5-31
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out
Turn the steering wheel left and right to clear the
area around the front wheels. For four-wheel drive
vehicles, shift into 4HI. Turn off any traction system.
Shift back and forth between R (Reverse) and a forward
gear, or with a manual transmission, between 1 (First)
or 2 (Second) and R (Reverse), spinning the wheels
as little as possible. To prevent transmission wear, wait
until the wheels stop spinning before shifting gears.
Release the accelerator pedal while shifting, and press
lightly on the accelerator pedal when the transmission
is in gear. Slowly spinning the wheels in the forward and
reverse directions causes a rocking motion that could
free the vehicle. If that does not get the vehicle out after
a few tries, it might need to be towed out. Recovery
hooks can be used, if the vehicle has them. If the vehicle
does need to be towed out, see Towing Your Vehicle
on page 5-41.
5-32
Recovery Hooks
{ WARNING:
These hooks, when used, are under a lot of force.
Always pull the vehicle straight out. Never pull on
the hooks at a sideways angle. The hooks could
break off and you or others could be injured from
the chain or cable snapping back.
Loading the Vehicle
It is very important to know how much weight your
vehicle can carry. This weight is called the vehicle
capacity weight and includes the weight of all
occupants, cargo, and all nonfactory-installed
options. Two labels on your vehicle show how much
weight it may properly carry, the Tire and Loading
Information label and the Certification/Tire label.
{ WARNING:
Notice: Never use recovery hooks to tow the
vehicle. Your vehicle could be damaged and it would
not be covered by warranty.
For vehicles with recovery hooks at the front of the
vehicle, you can use them if you are stuck off-road and
need to be pulled to some place where you can
continue driving.
Do not load the vehicle any heavier than the
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), or
either the maximum front or rear Gross Axle
Weight Rating (GAWR). If you do, parts on the
vehicle can break, and it can change the way
your vehicle handles. These could cause you
to lose control and crash. Also, overloading
can shorten the life of the vehicle.
5-33
Tire and Loading Information Label
Label Example
A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Information
label is attached to the vehicle’s center pillar
(B-pillar). With the driver door open, you will
find the label attached below the door latch post.
5-34
Vehicle’s without a center pillar, like extended cab
models, will have the Tire and Loading Information
label attached to the driver side extended cab door,
above the door latch post. The Tire and Loading
Information label shows the number of occupant
seating positions (A), and the maximum vehicle
capacity weight (B) in kilograms and pounds.
The Tire and Loading Information label also shows
the size of the original equipment tires (C) and
the recommended cold tire inflation pressures (D).
For more information on tires and inflation see
Tires on page 6-57 and Inflation - Tire Pressure on
page 6-64.
There is also important information on the
Certification/Tire label. It tells you the Gross
Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) and the Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for the front and rear
axles. See “Certification/Tire Label” later in this
section.
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight
of occupants and cargo should never exceed
XXX kg or XXX lbs” on your vehicle’s placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver
and passengers that will be riding in your
vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver
and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.
4. The resulting figure equals the available
amount of cargo and luggage load capacity.
For example, if the “XXX” amount equals
1400 lbs and there will be five 150 lb
passengers in your vehicle, the amount of
available cargo and luggage load capacity is
650 lbs (1400 − 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs).
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage
and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That
weight may not safely exceed the available
cargo and luggage load capacity calculated
in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, the load
from your trailer will be transferred to your
vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how
this reduces the available cargo and luggage
load capacity of your vehicle.
See Towing a Trailer on page 5-48 for important
information on towing a trailer, towing safety,
and trailering tips.
5-35
Example 1
Item
A
B
C
5-36
Description
Vehicle Capacity
Weight for
Example 1 =
Subtract Occupant
Weight 150 lbs
(68 kg) x 2 =
Available Cargo
Weight =
Example 2
Total
Item
1,000 lbs
(453 kg)
A
300 lbs (136 kg)
B
700 lbs (317 kg)
C
Description
Vehicle Capacity
Weight for
Example 2 =
Subtract Occupant
Weight 150 lbs
(68 kg) x 5 =
Available Cargo
Weight =
Total
1,000 lbs
(453 kg)
750 lbs (340 kg)
250 lbs (113 kg)
Refer to your vehicle’s Tire and Loading
Information label for specific information about
your vehicle’s capacity weight and seating
positions. The combined weight of the driver,
passengers, cargo, and any accessories or
equipment added to your vehicle after it left the
factory should never exceed your vehicle’s
capacity weight.
Example 3
Item
A
B
C
Description
Vehicle Capacity
Weight for
Example 3 =
Subtract Occupant
Weight 200 lbs
(91 kg) x 5 =
Available Cargo
Weight =
Total
1,000 lbs
(453 kg)
1,000 lbs
(453 kg)
0 lbs (0 kg)
5-37
Certification/Tire Label
Label Example
A vehicle specific Certification/Tire label is attached
to the bottom section of the driver side center pillar
(B-pillar) or on the end of the driver side instrument
panel. Vehicles without a center pillar, like extended
cab models, will have the Certification/Tire label
attached to the edge of the driver side, extended
5-38
cab door, below the door latch post. The label
shows the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR).
The GVWR includes the weight of the vehicle, all
occupants, fuel, cargo, and trailer tongue weight, if
pulling a trailer.
The Certification/Tire label also tells you the
maximum weights for the front and rear axles,
called Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR).
To find out the actual loads on your front and
rear axles, you need to go to a weigh station and
weigh your vehicle. Your dealer can help you
with this. Be sure to spread out your load equally
on both sides of the centerline.
Never exceed the GVWR for your vehicle, or the
GAWR for either the front or rear axle.
If the load is heavy, it should be spread out.
Similar appearing vehicles may have different
GVWRs and capacity weights. Please note your
vehicle’s Certification/Tire label or consult
your dealer/retailer for additional details.
{ WARNING:
{ WARNING:
Do not load the vehicle any heavier than the
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), or
either the maximum front or rear Gross Axle
Weight Rating (GAWR). If you do, parts on the
vehicle can break, and it can change the way
your vehicle handles. These could cause you
to lose control and crash. Also, overloading
can shorten the life of the vehicle.
Things you put inside your vehicle can strike
and injure people in a sudden stop or turn, or
in a crash.
• Put things in the cargo area of your
vehicle. Try to spread the weight evenly.
• Never stack heavier things, like
suitcases, inside the vehicle so that some
of them are above the tops of the seats.
• Do not leave an unsecured child restraint
in your vehicle.
• When you carry something inside the
vehicle, secure it whenever you can.
• Do not leave a seat folded down unless
you need to.
Using heavier suspension components to get
added durability might not change your weight
ratings. Ask your dealer/retailer to help you load
your vehicle the right way.
Notice: Overloading the vehicle may cause
damage. Repairs would not be covered by the
vehicle warranty. Do not overload the vehicle.
If you put things inside your vehicle — like
suitcases, tools, packages, or anything
else — they will go as fast as the vehicle goes.
If you have to stop or turn quickly, or if there is a
crash, they will keep going.
There is also important loading information for
off-road driving in this manual. See “Loading Your
Vehicle for Off-Road Driving” under Off-Road
Driving on page 5-13.
Remember not to exceed the Gross Axle Weight
rating (GAWR) of the front or rear axle.
5-39
Two-Tiered Loading
By positioning four 2” X 6” wooden planks across
the width of the pickup box, you can create an
upper load platform. The planks must be inserted
in the pickup box depressions. The length of
the planks must allow for at least a 2 cm (3/4 inch)
bearing surface on each end of the plank.
When using this upper load platform, be sure the
load is securely tied down to prevent it from
shifting. The load’s center of gravity should be
positioned in a zone over the rear axle.
Any load that extends beyond the vehicle’s
taillamp area must be properly marked according
to local laws and regulations.
Remember not to exceed the Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR) of the rear axle.
Add-On Equipment
When you carry removable items, you may need
to put a limit on how many people you carry
inside your vehicle. Be sure to weigh your vehicle
before you buy and install the new equipment.
Notice: Overloading the vehicle may cause
damage. Repairs would not be covered by the
vehicle warranty. Do not overload the vehicle.
5-40
Remember not to exceed the Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR) of the rear axle.
A reinforcement kit for mounting a toolbox is
recommended. See your dealer/retailer.
Truck-Camper Loading Information
The vehicle was neither designed nor intended
to carry a slide-in type camper.
Notice: Adding a slide-in camper or similar
equipment to the vehicle can damage it,
and the repairs would not be covered by the
vehicle warranty. Do not install a slide-in
camper or similar equipment on the vehicle.
Pickup Conversion to Chassis Cab
We are aware that some vehicle owners might consider
having the pickup box removed and a commercial or
recreational body installed. However, we recommend
that conversions of this type not be done to pickups.
Owners should be aware that, as manufactured, there
are differences between a chassis cab and a pickup with
the box removed which could affect vehicle safety.
Towing
Towing Your Vehicle
To avoid damage, the disabled vehicle should be towed
with all four wheels off the ground. Consult your
dealer/retailer or a professional towing service if the
disabled vehicle must be towed. See Roadside
Assistance Program on page 8-7.
To tow the vehicle behind another vehicle for
recreational purposes, such as behind a motorhome,
see “Recreational Vehicle Towing” following.
Recreational Vehicle Towing
Recreational vehicle towing means towing the vehicle
behind another vehicle – such as behind a motorhome.
The two most common types of recreational vehicle
towing are known as dinghy towing and dolly towing.
Dinghy towing is towing the vehicle with all four wheels
on the ground. Dolly towing is towing the vehicle
with two wheels on the ground and two wheels up on a
device known as a dolly.
Here are some important things to consider before
recreational vehicle towing:
• What is the towing capacity of the towing vehicle?
Be sure to read the tow vehicle manufacturer’s
recommendations.
• What is the distance that will be travelled? Some
vehicles have restrictions on how far and how
long they can tow.
• Is the proper towing equipment going to be used?
See your dealer/retailer or trailering professional
for additional advice and equipment
recommendations.
• Is the vehicle ready to be towed? Just as preparing
the vehicle for a long trip, make sure the vehicle is
prepared to be towed. See Before Leaving on a
Long Trip on page 5-27.
5-41
Dinghy Towing
Four-Wheel Drive Vehicles
Two-Wheel Drive Vehicles
Use the following procedure to dinghy tow a
four-wheel-drive vehicle:
Notice: If the vehicle is towed with all four wheels
on the ground, the drivetrain components could
be damaged. The repairs would not be covered by
the vehicle warranty. Do not tow the vehicle with all
four wheels on the ground.
Two-wheel-drive vehicles should not be towed with
all four wheels on the ground. Two-wheel-drive
transmissions have no provisions for internal lubrication
while being towed.
5-42
1. Position the vehicle being towed behind the tow
vehicle.
2. Put an automatic transmission in P (Park) or a
manual transmission in 1 (First).
3. Turn the engine off and firmly set the parking brake.
See Parking Brake on page 3-30.
4. Securely attach the vehicle being towed to the tow
vehicle.
{ WARNING:
Shifting a full-time four-wheel-drive vehicle’s
transfer case into N (Neutral) can cause the
vehicle to roll even if the automatic transmission is
in P (Park) or the manual transmission is in any
gear. You or others could be injured. Make sure
the parking brake is firmly set before the transfer
case is shifted to N (Neutral).
5. Shift the transfer case to N (Neutral). See “Shifting
into N (Neutral)” under Four-Wheel Drive on
page 3-25.
6. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF and remove the
key — the front wheels will still turn.
7. Release the parking brake only after the vehicle
being towed is firmly attached to the towing
vehicle.
After towing see “Shifting Out of N (Neutral)” under
Four-Wheel Drive on page 3-25.
If the vehicle being towed will not be started or driven
for six weeks or more, remove the battery cable from the
negative terminal (post) of the battery to prevent the
battery from draining.
5-43
Dolly Towing
Front Towing (Front Wheels Off the
Ground)
Two-Wheel-Drive Vehicles
Notice: If a two-wheel-drive vehicle is towed with
the rear wheels on the ground, the transmission
could be damaged. The repairs would not be
covered by the vehicle warranty. Never tow the
vehicle with the rear wheels on the ground.
Two-wheel-drive vehicles should not be towed with
the rear wheels on the ground. Two-wheel-drive
transmissions have no provisions for internal lubrication
while being towed.
To dolly tow a two-wheel-drive vehicle, the vehicle must
be towed with the rear wheels on the dolly. See
“Rear Towing (Rear Wheels Off the Ground)” later in
this section for more information.
5-44
Four-Wheel-Drive Vehicles
{ WARNING:
Shifting a full-time four-wheel-drive vehicle’s
transfer case into N (Neutral) can cause the
vehicle to roll even if the automatic transmission is
in P (Park) or the manual transmission is in any
gear. You or others could be injured. Make sure
the parking brake is firmly set before the transfer
case is shifted to N (Neutral).
5. Secure the vehicle to the dolly following the
manufacturer’s instructions.
Use the following procedure to dolly tow a
four-wheel-drive vehicle from the front:
1. Attach the dolly to the tow vehicle following the
dolly manufacturer’s instructions.
2. Drive the front wheels onto the dolly.
3. Put an automatic transmission in P (Park) or a
manual transmission in 1 (First).
4. Turn the engine off and firmly set the parking brake.
See Parking Brake on page 3-30.
6. Shift the transfer case to N (Neutral). See “Shifting
into N (Neutral)” under Four-Wheel Drive on
page 3-25.
7. Release the parking brake only after the vehicle
being towed is firmly attached to the towing vehicle.
8. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF.
After towing, see “Shifting Out of N (Neutral)” under
Four-Wheel Drive on page 3-25.
If the vehicle being towed will not be started or driven
for six weeks or more, remove the battery cable from the
negative terminal (post) of the battery to prevent the
battery from draining.
5-45
Rear Towing (Rear Wheels Off the Ground)
Two-Wheel-Drive Vehicles
3. Firmly set the parking brake. See Parking Brake on
page 3-30.
4. Put an automatic transmission in P (Park) or a
manual transmission in 1 (First).
5. Secure the vehicle to the dolly following the
manufacturer’s instructions.
6. Use an adequate clamping device designed for
towing to ensure that the front wheels are locked
into the straight position.
7. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF.
If the vehicle being towed will not be started or
driven for six weeks or more, remove the battery
cable from the negative terminal (post) of the battery
to prevent the battery from draining.
Use the following procedure to dolly tow a
two-wheel-drive vehicle from the rear:
1. Attach the dolly to the tow vehicle following the
dolly manufacturer’s instructions.
2. Drive the rear wheels onto the dolly.
5-46
Four-Wheel-Drive Vehicles
5. Secure the vehicle to the dolly following the
manufacturer’s instructions.
6. Use an adequate clamping device designed for
towing to ensure that the front wheels are locked
into the straight position.
{ WARNING:
Shifting a full-time four-wheel-drive vehicle’s
transfer case into N (Neutral) can cause the
vehicle to roll even if the automatic transmission is
in P (Park) or the manual transmission is in any
gear. You or others could be injured. Make sure
the parking brake is firmly set before the transfer
case is shifted to N (Neutral).
Use the following procedure to dolly tow a
four-wheel-drive vehicle from the rear:
1. Attach the dolly to the tow vehicle following the
dolly manufacturer’s instructions.
2. Drive the rear wheels onto the dolly.
3. Firmly set the parking brake. See Parking Brake on
page 3-30.
4. Put an automatic transmission in P (Park) or a
manual transmission in 1 (First).
7. Shift the transfer case to N (Neutral). See “Shifting
into N (Neutral)” under Four-Wheel Drive on
page 3-25.
8. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF.
If the vehicle being towed will not be started or
driven for six weeks or more, remove the battery
cable from the negative terminal (post) of the battery
to prevent the battery from draining.
After towing, see “Shifting Out of N (Neutral)” under
Four-Wheel Drive on page 3-25.
5-47
Towing a Trailer
{ WARNING:
The driver can lose control when pulling a trailer if
the correct equipment is not used or the vehicle is
not driven properly. For example, if the trailer is
too heavy, the brakes may not work well — or
even at all. The driver and passengers could be
seriously injured. The vehicle may also be
damaged; the resulting repairs would not be
covered by the vehicle warranty. Pull a trailer only
if all the steps in this section have been followed.
Ask your dealer/retailer for advice and information
about towing a trailer with the vehicle.
5-48
Notice: Pulling a trailer improperly can damage the
vehicle and result in costly repairs not covered
by the vehicle warranty. To pull a trailer correctly,
follow the advice in this section and see your
dealer/retailer for important information about
towing a trailer with the vehicle.
To identify the trailering capacity of the vehicle, read the
information in “Weight of the Trailer” that appears
later in this section.
Trailering is different than just driving the vehicle by
itself. Trailering means changes in handling,
acceleration, braking, durability and fuel economy.
Successful, safe trailering takes correct equipment, and
it has to be used properly.
The following information has many time-tested,
important trailering tips and safety rules. Many of these
are important for your safety and that of your passengers.
So please read this section carefully before pulling a
trailer.
Pulling A Trailer
Here are some important points:
• There are many different laws, including speed limit
restrictions, having to do with trailering. Make sure
the rig will be legal, not only where you live but
also where you will be driving. A good source for
this information can be state or provincial police.
• Consider using a sway control. See “Hitches” later
in this section.
• Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles
(800 km) the new vehicle is driven. The engine,
axle or other parts could be damaged.
• Then, during the first 500 miles (800 km) that a
trailer is towed, do not drive over 50 mph (80 km/h)
and do not make starts at full throttle. This helps
the engine and other parts of the vehicle wear in at
the heavier loads.
• Vehicles with automatic transmissions can tow in
D (Drive), but you may want to shift to a lower
gear selection if the transmission shifts too often
(e.g., under heavy loads and/or hilly conditions).
If the vehicle has a manual transmission it is better
not to use the highest gear.
Three important considerations have to do with weight:
• The weight of the trailer
• The weight of the trailer tongue
• The weight on the vehicle’s tires
Weight of the Trailer
How heavy can a trailer safely be?
It depends on how the rig is used. For example, speed,
altitude, road grades, outside temperature and how
much the vehicle is used to pull a trailer are all
important. It can depend on any special equipment on
the vehicle, and the amount of tongue weight the vehicle
can carry. See “Weight of the Trailer Tongue” later in
this section for more information.
Maximum trailer weight is calculated assuming only the
driver is in the tow vehicle and it has all the required
trailering equipment. The weight of additional optional
equipment, passengers and cargo in the tow vehicle
must be subtracted from the maximum trailer weight.
5-49
Use the following chart to determine how much the vehicle can weigh, based upon the vehicle model and options.
Vehicle
2WD Regular Cab
2.9L L4 Automatic Transmission
2.9L L4 Manual Transmission
3.7L L5 Automatic Transmission
2WD Extended Cab
2.9L L4 Automatic Transmission
2.9L L4 Manual Transmission
3.7L L5 Automatic Transmission
Axle Ratio
Maximum Trailer Weight
GCWR*
3.73
3.73
3.73
3,400 lbs (1 542 kg)
2,400 lbs (1 089 kg)
4,000 lbs (1 814 kg)
7,000 lbs (3 175 kg)
6,000 lbs (2 722 kg)
8,500 lbs (3 856 kg)
3.73
3.73
3.73
3.42
3.73
3,200 lbs (1 452 kg)
2,200 lbs (998 kg)
5,500 lbs (2 495 kg)
7,000 lbs (3 175 kg)
6,000 lbs (2 722 kg)
9,500 lbs (4 309 kg)
6,000 lbs (2 722 kg)
10,400 lbs (4 717 kg)
3.42
4,000 lbs (1 814 kg)
8,500 lbs (3 856 kg)
3,000 lbs (1 361 kg)
2,100 lbs (953 kg)
5,500 lbs (2 495 kg)
7,000 lbs (3 175 kg)
6,000 lbs (2 722 kg)
9,500 lbs (4 309 kg)
5.3L V8 Automatic Transmission
3.73
3.73
3.73
3.42
3.73
6,000 lbs (2 722 kg)
10,400 lbs (4 717 kg)
5.3L V8 Automatic Transmission,
ZQ8 Sport Suspension
3.42
3,800 lbs (1 724 kg)
8,500 lbs (3 856 kg)
5.3L V8 Automatic Transmission
5.3L V8 Automatic Transmission,
ZQ8 Sport Suspension
2WD Crew Cab
2.9L L4 Automatic Transmission
2.9L L4 Manual Transmission
3.7L L5 Automatic Transmission
5-50
Vehicle
4WD Regular Cab
2.9L L4 Automatic Transmission
2.9L L4 Manual Transmission
3.7L L5 Automatic Transmission
4WD Extended Cab
2.9L L4 Automatic Transmission
2.9L L4 Manual Transmission
3.7L L5 Automatic Transmission
5.3L V8 Automatic Transmission
Axle Ratio
Maximum Trailer Weight
GCWR*
3.73
3.73
3.73
3,100 lbs (1 406 kg)
2,100 lbs (953 kg)
4,000 lbs (1 814 kg)
7,000 lbs (3 175 kg)
6,000 lbs (2 722 kg)
9,000 lbs (4 082 kg)
3.73
3.73
3.73
3.42
4.10
2,900 lbs (1 315 kg)
1,900 lbs (861 kg)
5,500 lbs (2 495 kg)
7,000 lbs (3 175 kg)
6,000 lbs (2 722 kg)
9,800 lbs (4 445 kg)
6,000 lbs (2 722 kg)
10,400 lbs (4 717 kg)
4WD Crew Cab
3.7L L5 Automatic Transmission
3.73
5,500 lbs (2 495 kg)
9,800 lbs (4 445 kg)
3.42
5.3L V8 Automatic Transmission
6,000 lbs (2 722 kg)
10,400 lbs (4 717 kg)
4.10
*The Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR) is the total allowable weight of the completely loaded vehicle and
trailer including any passengers, cargo, equipment and conversions. The GCWR for the vehicle should not be
exceeded.
Ask your dealer/retailer for our trailering information or
advice, or write us at our Customer Assistance
Offices. See Customer Assistance Offices on page 8-6
for more information.
5-51
Weight of the Trailer Tongue
The tongue load (A) of any trailer is an important weight
to measure because it affects the total gross weight
of the vehicle. The Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW)
includes the curb weight of the vehicle, any cargo
carried in it, and the people who will be riding in the
vehicle. If there are a lot of options, equipment,
passengers or cargo in the vehicle, it will reduce the
tongue weight the vehicle can carry, which will also
reduce the trailer weight the vehicle can tow. If towing a
trailer, the tongue load must be added to the GVW
because the vehicle will be carrying that weight, too. See
Loading the Vehicle on page 5-33 for more information
about the vehicle’s maximum load capacity.
5-52
The trailer tongue weight (A) should be 10 percent to
15 percent of the total loaded trailer weight, up to
a maximum of 500 lbs (226 kg) with a weight carrying
hitch.
Do not exceed the maximum allowable tongue weight
for the vehicle. Choose the shortest hitch extension that
will position the hitch ball closest to the vehicle. This
will help reduce the effect of trailer tongue weight on the
rear axle.
After loading the trailer, weigh the trailer and then the
tongue, separately, to see if the weights are proper.
If they are not, adjustments might be made by moving
some items around in the trailer.
Consider the following example:
A vehicle model base weight is 5,500 lbs (2 495 kg);
2,800 lbs (1 270 kg) at the front axle and 2,700 lbs
(1 225 kg) at the rear axle. It has a GVWR of 7,200 lbs
(3 266 kg), a RGAWR of 4,000 lbs (1 814 kg) and a
GCWR (Gross Combination Weight Rating) of
14,000 lbs (6 350 kg). The trailer rating should be:
Trailering may be limited by the vehicle’s ability to carry
tongue weight. Tongue weight cannot cause the vehicle
to exceed the GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) or
the RGAWR (Rear Gross Axle Weight Rating). The effect
of additional weight may reduce the trailering capacity
more than the total of the additional weight.
Expect tongue weight to be at least 10 percent of trailer
weight (850 lbs (386 kg)) and because the weight is
applied well behind the rear axle, the effect on the rear
axle is greater than just the weight itself, as much as
1.5 times as much. The weight at the rear axle could be
850 lbs (386 kg) X 1.5 = 1,275 lbs (578 kg). Since the
rear axle already weighs 2,700 lbs (1 225 kg), adding
1,275 lbs (578 kg) brings the total to 3,975 lbs (1 803 kg).
This is very close to, but within the limit for RGAWR as
well. The vehicle is set to trailer up to 8,500 lbs
(3 856 kg).
5-53
If the vehicle has many options and there is a front seat
passenger and two rear seat passengers with some
luggage and gear in the vehicle as well. 300 lbs (136 kg)
could be added to the front axle weight and 400 lbs
(181 kg) to the rear axle weight. The vehicle now weighs:
The effect of tongue weight is about 1.5 times the actual
weight. Dividing the 900 lbs (408 kg) by 1.5 leaves only
600 lbs (272 kg) of tongue weight that can be handled.
Since tongue weight is usually at least 10 percent of total
loaded trailer weight, expect that the largest trailer the
vehicle can properly handle is 6,000 lbs (2 721 kg).
It is important that the vehicle does not exceed any of
its ratings — GCWR, GVWR, RGAWR, Maximum Trailer
Rating or Tongue Weight. The only way to be sure it
is not exceeding any of these ratings is to weigh
the vehicle and trailer.
Total Weight on the Vehicle’s Tires
Weight is still below 7,200 lbs (3 266 kg) and you
might think 700 additional pounds (318 kg) should be
subtracted from the trailering capacity to stay within
GCWR limits. The maximum trailer would only be
7,800 lbs (3 538 kg). You may go further and think the
tongue weight should be limited to less than 1,000 lbs
(454 kg) to avoid exceeding GVWR. But the effect on the
rear axle must still be considered. Because the rear axle
now weighs 3,100 lbs (1 406 kg), 900 lbs (408 kg) can
be put on the rear axle without exceeding RGAWR.
5-54
Be sure the vehicle’s tires are inflated to the upper limit
for cold tires. These numbers can be found on the
Certification/Tire label located at the bottom of the center
pillar on the driver’s side of the vehicle, or see Loading
the Vehicle on page 5-33. Make sure not to go over the
GVW limit for the vehicle, or the GAWR, including the
weight of the trailer tongue. If using a weight distributing
hitch, make sure not to go over the rear axle limit before
applying the weight distribution spring bars.
Hitches
It is important to have the correct hitch equipment.
Crosswinds, large trucks going by and rough roads are
a few reasons why the right hitch is needed.
Weight-Distributing Hitches and Weight
Carrying Hitches
A step bumper hitch can be used for trailers up to
2,000 lbs (907 kg) total weight, and 200 lbs (90 kg)
tongue weight.
Notice: If a step-bumper hitch is used, the bumper
could be damaged in sharp turns. Make sure there is
ample room when turning to avoid contact between
the trailer and the bumper.
Safety Chains
safety chains may be provided by the hitch manufacturer
or by the trailer manufacturer. For trailers up to 2,000 lbs
(907 kg) safety chains may be attached to the attaching
points on the bumper. For heavier trailers, follow the
trailer or hitch manufacturer’s recommendation for
attaching safety chains. Always leave just enough slack
so the rig can turn. Never allow safety chains to drag on
the ground.
Trailer Brakes
A loaded trailer that weighs more than 1,000 lbs
(450 kg) needs to have its own brake system that is
adequate for the weight of the trailer. Be sure to read
and follow the instructions for the trailer brakes so
they are installed, adjusted and maintained properly.
Since the vehicle is equipped with StabiliTrak®,
the trailer cannot tap into the vehicle’s hydraulic brake
system.
Always attach chains between the vehicle and the trailer.
Cross the safety chains under the tongue of the trailer to
help prevent the tongue from contacting the road if it
becomes separated from the hitch. Instructions about
5-55
Driving with a Trailer
{ WARNING:
When towing a trailer, exhaust gases may collect
at the rear of the vehicle and enter if the liftgate,
trunk/hatch, or rear-most window is open.
Engine exhaust contains carbon monoxide (CO)
which cannot be seen or smelled. It can cause
unconsciousness and even death.
To maximize safety when towing a trailer:
• Have the exhaust system inspected for leaks
and make necessary repairs before starting
a trip.
• Never drive with the liftgate, trunk/hatch, or
rear-most window open.
• Fully open the air outlets on or under the
instrument panel.
• Adjust the Climate Control system to a setting
that brings in only outside air and set the fan
speed to the highest setting. See Climate
Control System in the Index.
For more information about carbon monoxide, see
Engine Exhaust on page 3-34.
5-56
Towing a trailer requires a certain amount of experience.
Get to know the rig before setting out for the open
road. Get acquainted with the feel of handling and
braking with the added weight of the trailer. And always
keep in mind that the vehicle you are driving is now
longer and not as responsive as the vehicle is by itself.
Before starting, check all trailer hitch parts and
attachments, safety chains, electrical connectors, lamps,
tires and mirror adjustments. If the trailer has electric
brakes, start the vehicle and trailer moving and
then apply the trailer brake controller by hand to be sure
the brakes are working. This checks the electrical
connection at the same time.
During the trip, check occasionally to be sure that the
load is secure, and that the lamps and any trailer brakes
are still working.
While towing a trailer or when exposed to long periods
of sunshine, the floor of the truck bed may become
very warm. Avoid putting items in the truck bed
that might be affected by high ambient temperatures.
Following Distance
Making Turns
Stay at least twice as far behind the vehicle ahead as
you would when driving the vehicle without a trailer. This
can help to avoid situations that require heavy braking
and sudden turns.
Notice: Making very sharp turns while trailering
could cause the trailer to come in contact with the
vehicle. The vehicle could be damaged. Avoid
making very sharp turns while trailering.
Passing
When turning with a trailer, make wider turns than
normal. Do this so the trailer will not strike soft shoulders,
curbs, road signs, trees or other objects. Avoid jerky or
sudden maneuvers. Signal well in advance.
More passing distance is needed when towing a trailer.
Because the rig is longer, it is necessary to go much
farther beyond the passed vehicle before returning to
the lane.
Backing Up
Hold the bottom of the steering wheel with one hand.
Then, to move the trailer to the left, move that hand
to the left. To move the trailer to the right, move your
hand to the right. Always back up slowly and, if possible,
have someone guide you.
Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer
The arrows on the instrument panel flash whenever
signaling a turn or lane change. Properly hooked up, the
trailer lamps also flash, telling other drivers the vehicle
is turning, changing lanes or stopping.
When towing a trailer, the arrows on the instrument panel
flash for turns even if the bulbs on the trailer are burned
out. For this reason you may think other drivers are
seeing the signal when they are not. It is important to
check occasionally to be sure the trailer bulbs are still
working.
5-57
Driving On Grades
Reduce speed and shift to a lower gear before starting
down a long or steep downgrade. If the transmission is
not shifted down, the brakes might have to be used so
much that they would get hot and no longer work well.
Vehicles with automatic transmissions can tow in
D (Drive), but you may want to shift to a lower gear
selection if the transmission shifts too often (e.g., under
heavy loads and/or hilly conditions). If the vehicle has
a manual transmission it is better not to use the
highest gear.
When towing at high altitude on steep uphill grades,
consider the following: Engine coolant will boil at a lower
temperature than at normal altitudes. If the engine is
turned off immediately after towing at high altitude on
steep uphill grades, the vehicle may show signs similar to
engine overheating. To avoid this, let the engine run while
5-58
parked, preferably on level ground, with an automatic
transmission in P (Park) or a manual transmission in
N (Neutral) with the parking brake applied, for a
few minutes before turning the engine off. If the overheat
warning comes on, see Engine Overheating on page 6-35.
Parking on Hills
{ WARNING:
Parking the vehicle on a hill with the trailer
attached can be dangerous. If something goes
wrong, the rig could start to move. People can be
injured, and both the vehicle and the trailer can be
damaged. When possible, always park the rig on a
flat surface.
If parking the rig on a hill:
1. Press the brake pedal, but do not shift into P (Park)
yet for vehicles with an automatic transmission, or
into gear for vehicles with a manual transmission.
Turn the wheels into the curb if facing downhill
or into traffic if facing uphill.
2. Have someone place chocks under the trailer
wheels.
3. When the wheel chocks are in place, release the
brake pedal until the chocks absorb the load.
4. Reapply the brake pedal. Then apply the parking
brake and shift into P (Park) for vehicles with an
automatic transmission or into gear for vehicles with
a manual transmission.
5. If the vehicle has four-wheel-drive, be sure
the transfer case is in a drive gear and not in
N (Neutral). See Four-Wheel Drive on page 3-25
for more information.
6. Release the brake pedal.
Leaving After Parking on a Hill
1. Apply and hold the brake pedal while you:
• Start the engine
• Shift into a gear
• Release the parking brake
2. Let up on the brake pedal.
3. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of the chocks.
4. Stop and have someone pick up and store the
chocks.
5-59
Maintenance When Trailer Towing
Trailer Recommendations
The vehicle needs service more often when pulling a
trailer. See Scheduled Maintenance on page 7-3 or the
Index for more information. Things that are especially
important in trailer operation are automatic transmission
fluid, engine oil, axle lubricant, belts, cooling system
and brake system. It is a good idea to inspect
these before and during the trip.
Subtract the hitch loads from the Cargo Weight Rating
(CWR). CWR is the maximum weight of the load
the vehicle can carry. It does not include the weight of
the people inside, but you can figure about 150 lbs.
(68 kg) for each passenger. The total cargo load must
not be more than the vehicles CWR.
Check periodically to see that all hitch nuts and bolts
are tight.
Trailer Wiring Harness
The vehicle may be equipped with a four-pin trailer
towing harness. This harness has a four-pin trailer
connector that is attached to a bracket on the hitch
platform. The four-wire harness contains the following
trailer circuits:
•
•
•
•
Yellow: Left Stop/Turn Signal
Green: Right Stop/Turn Signal
Brown: Taillamps/Park lamps
White: Ground
5-60
Weigh the vehicle with the trailer attached, so the
GVWR or GAWR are not exceeded. If using a
weight-distributing hitch, weigh the vehicle without the
spring bars in place.
The best performance is obtained by correctly spreading
out the weight of the load and choosing the correct
hitch and trailer brakes.
For more information see Towing a Trailer on page 5-48.
Section 6
Service and Appearance Care
Service ............................................................6-3
Accessories and Modifications ..........................6-3
California Proposition 65 Warning .....................6-4
California Perchlorate Materials Requirements .....6-4
Doing Your Own Service Work .........................6-4
Adding Equipment to the Outside of the
Vehicle ......................................................6-5
Fuel ................................................................6-5
Gasoline Octane ............................................6-5
Gasoline Specifications ....................................6-6
California Fuel ...............................................6-6
Additives .......................................................6-6
Fuels in Foreign Countries ...............................6-7
Filling the Tank ..............................................6-8
Filling a Portable Fuel Container .....................6-10
Checking Things Under the Hood ....................6-10
Hood Release ..............................................6-11
Engine Compartment Overview .......................6-12
Engine Oil ...................................................6-15
Engine Oil Life System ..................................6-18
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter ................................6-20
Automatic Transmission Fluid .........................6-21
Manual Transmission Fluid .............................6-25
Hydraulic Clutch ...........................................6-26
Cooling System ............................................6-27
Engine Coolant .............................................6-29
Engine Overheating .......................................6-35
Engine Fan Noise .........................................6-36
Power Steering Fluid .....................................6-37
Windshield Washer Fluid ................................6-38
Brakes ........................................................6-39
Battery ........................................................6-42
Jump Starting ...............................................6-43
Rear Axle .......................................................6-47
Four-Wheel Drive ............................................6-48
Front Axle ......................................................6-49
Headlamp Aiming ...........................................6-50
Bulb Replacement ..........................................6-50
Halogen Bulbs ..............................................6-50
Headlamps ..................................................6-51
Front Turn Signal, Parking and Daytime
Running Lamps (DRL) ................................6-52
Center High-Mounted Stoplamp (CHMSL) .........6-52
Taillamps, Turn Signal, Stoplamps and
Back-up Lamps .........................................6-53
License Plate Lamp ......................................6-54
Replacement Bulbs .......................................6-54
Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement ..............6-55
6-1
Section 6
Service and Appearance Care
Tires ..............................................................6-57
Tire Sidewall Labeling ...................................6-58
Tire Terminology and Definitions .....................6-61
Inflation - Tire Pressure .................................6-64
High-Speed Operation ...................................6-65
Tire Pressure Monitor System .........................6-66
Tire Pressure Monitor Operation .....................6-67
Tire Inspection and Rotation ...........................6-71
When It Is Time for New Tires .......................6-72
Buying New Tires .........................................6-73
Different Size Tires and Wheels ......................6-75
Uniform Tire Quality Grading ..........................6-75
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ..................6-77
Wheel Replacement ......................................6-77
Tire Chains ..................................................6-78
If a Tire Goes Flat ........................................6-79
Changing a Flat Tire .....................................6-80
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools ................6-81
Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the
Spare Tire ................................................6-85
Secondary Latch System ...............................6-93
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools ............6-96
Spare Tire .................................................6-101
Appearance Care ..........................................6-102
Interior Cleaning .........................................6-102
Fabric/Carpet ..............................................6-103
6-2
Leather ......................................................6-104
Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other Plastic
Surfaces .................................................6-105
Care of Safety Belts ....................................6-105
Weatherstrips .............................................6-105
Washing Your Vehicle ..................................6-106
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses ....................6-106
Finish Care ................................................6-107
Windshield and Wiper Blades .......................6-107
Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels and Trim ...6-108
Tires .........................................................6-108
Sheet Metal Damage ...................................6-109
Finish Damage ...........................................6-109
Underbody Maintenance ...............................6-109
Chemical Paint Spotting ...............................6-109
Vehicle Identification .....................................6-110
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) ................6-110
Service Parts Identification Label ...................6-110
Electrical System ..........................................6-111
Add-On Electrical Equipment .........................6-111
Windshield Wiper Fuses ...............................6-111
Fuses and Circuit Breakers ..........................6-111
Engine Compartment Fuse Block ...................6-112
Capacities and Specifications ........................6-118
Service
Accessories and Modifications
For service and parts needs, visit your dealer/retailer.
You will receive genuine GM parts and GM-trained and
supported service people.
When non-dealer/non-retailer accessories are added to
the vehicle, they can affect vehicle performance and
safety, including such things as airbags, braking, stability,
ride and handling, emissions systems, aerodynamics,
durability, and electronic systems like antilock brakes,
traction control, and stability control. Some of these
accessories could even cause malfunction or damage
not covered by the vehicle warranty.
Genuine GM parts have one of these marks:
Damage to vehicle components resulting from the
installation or use of non-GM certified parts, including
control module modifications, are not covered under the
terms of the vehicle warranty and may affect remaining
warranty coverage for affected parts.
GM Accessories are designed to complement and
function with other systems on the vehicle. Your GM
dealer/retailer can accessorize the vehicle using genuine
GM Accessories. When you go to your GM dealer/
retailer and ask for GM Accessories, you will know
that GM-trained and supported service technicians
will perform the work using genuine GM Accessories.
Also, see Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle on page 2-80.
6-3
California Proposition 65 Warning
Most motor vehicles, including this one, contain and/or
emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause
cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm.
Engine exhaust, many parts and systems, many fluids,
and some component wear by-products contain and/or
emit these chemicals.
California Perchlorate Materials
Requirements
Certain types of automotive applications, such as
airbag initiators, seat belt pretensioners, and lithium
batteries contained in remote keyless transmitters,
may contain perchlorate materials. Special handling
may be necessary. For additional information, see
www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.
Doing Your Own Service Work
{ WARNING:
You can be injured and the vehicle could be
damaged if you try to do service work on a vehicle
without knowing enough about it.
• Be sure you have sufficient knowledge,
experience, the proper replacement parts,
and tools before attempting any vehicle
maintenance task.
• Be sure to use the proper nuts, bolts, and
other fasteners. English and metric fasteners
can be easily confused. If the wrong fasteners
are used, parts can later break or fall off.
You could be hurt.
If doing some of your own service work, use the proper
service manual. It tells you much more about how to
service the vehicle than this manual can. To order
the proper service manual, see Service Publications
Ordering Information on page 8-15.
6-4
This vehicle has an airbag system. Before attempting
to do your own service work, see Servicing Your
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on page 2-79.
Keep a record with all parts receipts and list the
mileage and the date of any service work performed.
See Maintenance Record on page 7-14.
Adding Equipment to the Outside of
the Vehicle
Things added to the outside of the vehicle can affect the
airflow around it. This can cause wind noise and can
affect fuel economy and windshield washer performance.
Check with your dealer/retailer before adding equipment
to the outside of the vehicle.
Fuel
Use of the recommended fuel is an important part of the
proper maintenance of this vehicle. To help keep the
engine clean and maintain optimum vehicle performance,
we recommend the use of gasoline advertised as
TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline.
Look for the TOP TIER label on the fuel pump to
ensure gasoline meets enhanced detergency standards
developed by auto companies. A list of marketers
providing TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline can be
found at www.toptiergas.com.
Gasoline Octane
Use regular unleaded gasoline with a posted octane
rating of 87 or higher. If the octane rating is less than 87,
you might notice an audible knocking noise when you
drive, commonly referred to as spark knock. If this occurs,
use a gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher as soon as
possible. If you are using gasoline rated at 87 octane or
higher and you hear heavy knocking, the engine needs
service.
6-5
Gasoline Specifications
Additives
At a minimum, gasoline should meet ASTM specification
D 4814 in the United States or CAN/CGSB-3.5 or 3.511 in
Canada. Some gasolines contain an octane-enhancing
additive called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese
tricarbonyl (MMT). We recommend against the use of
gasolines containing MMT. See Additives on page 6-6
for additional information.
To provide cleaner air, all gasolines in the United States
are now required to contain additives that help prevent
engine and fuel system deposits from forming, allowing
the emission control system to work properly. In most
cases, you should not have to add anything to the fuel.
However, some gasolines contain only the minimum
amount of additive required to meet U.S. Environmental
Protection Agency regulations. To help keep fuel injectors
and intake valves clean, or if the vehicle experiences
problems due to dirty injectors or valves, look for gasoline
that is advertised as TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline.
California Fuel
If the vehicle is certified to meet California Emissions
Standards, it is designed to operate on fuels that meet
California specifications. See the underhood emission
control label. If this fuel is not available in states adopting
California emissions standards, the vehicle will operate
satisfactorily on fuels meeting federal specifications, but
emission control system performance might be affected.
The malfunction indicator lamp could turn on and the
vehicle might fail a smog-check test. See Malfunction
Indicator Lamp on page 4-28. If this occurs, return to your
authorized dealer/retailer for diagnosis. If it is determined
that the condition is caused by the type of fuel used,
repairs might not be covered by the vehicle warranty.
6-6
For customers who do not use TOP TIER Detergent
Gasoline regularly, one bottle of GM Fuel System
Treatment PLUS, added to the fuel tank at every engine
oil change, can help clean deposits from fuel injectors
and intake valves. GM Fuel System Treatment PLUS
is the only gasoline additive recommended by General
Motors.
Also, your dealer/retailer has additives that will help
correct and prevent most deposit-related problems.
(MMT); ask the attendant where you buy gasoline
whether the fuel contains MMT. We recommend
against the use of such gasolines. Fuels containing
MMT can reduce the life of spark plugs and the
performance of the emission control system could be
affected. The malfunction indicator lamp might turn on.
If this occurs, return to your dealer/retailer for service.
Gasolines containing oxygenates, such as ethers and
ethanol, and reformulated gasolines might be available in
your area. We recommend that you use these gasolines,
if they comply with the specifications described earlier.
However, E85 (85% ethanol) and other fuels containing
more than 10% ethanol must not be used in vehicles that
were not designed for those fuels.
Fuels in Foreign Countries
Notice: This vehicle was not designed for fuel
that contains methanol. Do not use fuel containing
methanol. It can corrode metal parts in the fuel
system and also damage plastic and rubber parts.
That damage would not be covered under the
vehicle warranty.
If you plan on driving in another country outside the
United States or Canada, the proper fuel might be hard
to find. Never use leaded gasoline or any other fuel not
recommended in the previous text on fuel. Costly repairs
caused by use of improper fuel would not be covered by
the vehicle warranty.
Some gasolines that are not reformulated for low
emissions can contain an octane-enhancing additive
called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl
To check the fuel availability, ask an auto club, or
contact a major oil company that does business in
the country where you will be driving.
6-7
Filling the Tank
{ WARNING:
Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel fire can
cause bad injuries. To help avoid injuries to you
and others, read and follow all the instructions on
the fuel pump island. Turn off the engine when
refueling. Do not smoke near fuel or when
refueling the vehicle. Do not use cellular phones.
Keep sparks, flames, and smoking materials away
from fuel. Do not leave the fuel pump unattended
when refueling the vehicle. This is against the law
in some places. Do not re-enter the vehicle while
pumping fuel. Keep children away from the fuel
pump; never let children pump fuel.
The tethered fuel cap is located behind a hinged fuel
door on the driver side of the vehicle.
To remove the fuel cap, turn it slowly counterclockwise.
While refueling, hang the tethered fuel cap from the
hook on the fuel door.
6-8
{ WARNING:
Fuel can spray out on you if you open the fuel cap
too quickly. If you spill fuel and then something
ignites it, you could be badly burned. This spray
can happen if the tank is nearly full, and is more
likely in hot weather. Open the fuel cap slowly and
wait for any hiss noise to stop. Then unscrew the
cap all the way.
Be careful not to spill fuel. Do not top off or overfill the
tank and wait a few seconds after you have finished
pumping before removing the nozzle. Clean fuel from
painted surfaces as soon as possible. See Washing
Your Vehicle on page 6-106.
When replacing the fuel cap, turn it clockwise until it
clicks. Make sure the cap is fully installed. The diagnostic
system can determine if the fuel cap has been left off or
improperly installed. This would allow fuel to evaporate
into the atmosphere. If the fuel cap is not properly
installed, the FUEL CAP message appears on the Driver
Information Center (DIC) and the check engine light will
be lit on the instrument panel cluster. See DIC Warnings
and Messages on page 4-37 and Malfunction Indicator
Lamp on page 4-28 for more information.
{ WARNING:
If a fire starts while you are refueling, do not
remove the nozzle. Shut off the flow of fuel by
shutting off the pump or by notifying the station
attendant. Leave the area immediately.
Notice: If you need a new fuel cap, be sure to get
the right type. Your dealer/retailer can get one
for you. If you get the wrong type, it may not fit
properly. This may cause the malfunction indicator
lamp to light and may damage the fuel tank and
emissions system. See Malfunction Indicator Lamp
on page 4-28.
6-9
Filling a Portable Fuel Container
Checking Things Under
the Hood
{ WARNING:
Never fill a portable fuel container while it is in
the vehicle. Static electricity discharge from the
container can ignite the fuel vapor. You can be
badly burned and the vehicle damaged if this
occurs. To help avoid injury to you and others:
• Dispense fuel only into approved containers.
• Do not fill a container while it is inside a
vehicle, in a vehicle’s trunk, pickup bed,
or on any surface other than the ground.
• Bring the fill nozzle in contact with the inside
of the fill opening before operating the nozzle.
Contact should be maintained until the filling
is complete.
• Do not smoke while pumping fuel.
• Do not use a cellular phone while
pumping fuel.
6-10
{ WARNING:
Things that burn can get on hot engine parts and
start a fire. These include liquids like fuel, oil,
coolant, brake fluid, windshield washer and other
fluids, and plastic or rubber. You or others could
be burned. Be careful not to drop or spill things
that will burn onto a hot engine.
Hood Release
3. Lift the hood.
To open the hood, do the following:
4. Release the hood prop from its retainer and put the
hood prop into the slot in the hood.
1. Pull the handle with
this symbol on it. It is
located inside the
vehicle on the lower left
side of the instrument
panel.
Before closing the hood, be sure all the filler caps are
on properly. Then lift the hood to relieve pressure on the
hood prop. Remove the hood prop from the slot in the
hood and return the prop to its retainer. Lower the hood
10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm) above the vehicle and
release it to latch fully. Check to make sure the hood is
closed and repeat the procedure if necessary.
2. Release the secondary latch on the hood. It is
located below the front center of the hood.
6-11
Engine Compartment Overview
When you open the hood on the 3.7L engine (2.9L engine similar), you will see the following:
6-12
A. Windshield Washer Fluid. See “Adding Washer
Fluid” under Windshield Washer Fluid on page 6-38.
B. Engine Coolant Recovery Tank. See Engine
Coolant on page 6-29.
C. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on page 6-20.
D. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir (low in engine
compartment). See Power Steering Fluid on
page 6-37.
E. Automatic Transmission Fluid Dipstick (If Equipped).
See “Checking the Fluid Level” under Automatic
Transmission Fluid on page 6-21.
F. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to Add Engine Oil”
under Engine Oil on page 6-15.
G. Radiator Pressure Cap. See Cooling System on
page 6-27.
H. Remote Negative (−) Terminal (GND). See Jump
Starting on page 6-43.
I. Engine Oil Dipstick. See “Checking Engine Oil”
under Engine Oil on page 6-15.
J. Remote Positive (+) Terminal. See Jump Starting on
page 6-43.
K. Brake Fluid Reservoir. See “Brake Fluid” under
Brakes on page 6-39.
L. Engine Compartment Fuse Block on page 6-112.
M. Battery on page 0-0.
N. Hydraulic Clutch Fluid Reservoir (If Equipped).
See Hydraulic Clutch on page 6-26.
6-13
When you open the hood on the 5.3L engine, you will see the following:
6-14
A. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on page 6-20.
B. Air Filter Restriction Indicator (If Equipped).
See Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on page 6-20.
C. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See “Adding
Washer Fluid” under Windshield Washer Fluid
on page 6-38.
D. Engine Coolant Recovery Tank. See Engine Coolant
on page 6-29.
E. Automatic Transmission Fluid Dipstick (If Equipped).
See “Checking the Fluid Level” under Automatic
Transmission Fluid on page 6-21.
F. Engine Oil Dipstick. See “Checking Engine Oil”
under Engine Oil on page 6-15.
G. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to Add Engine Oil”
under Engine Oil on page 6-15.
H. Brake Fluid Reservoir. See “Brake Fluid” under
Brakes on page 6-39.
I. Battery on page 0-0.
J. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir. See Power Steering
Fluid on page 6-37.
K. Engine Compartment Fuse Block on page 6-112.
L. Radiator Pressure Cap. See Cooling System on
page 6-27.
Engine Oil
Checking Engine Oil
It is a good idea to check the engine oil level at each
fuel fill. In order to get an accurate reading, the oil must
be warm and the vehicle must be on level ground.
The engine oil dipstick handle is a yellow loop.
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 6-12
for the location of the engine oil dipstick.
1. Turn off the engine and give the oil several minutes
to drain back into the oil pan. If this is not done, the
oil dipstick might not show the actual level.
2. Pull out the dipstick and clean it with a paper towel
or cloth, then push it back in all the way. Remove it
again, keeping the tip down, and check the level.
6-15
When to Add Engine Oil
Notice: Do not add too much oil. If the engine
has so much oil that the oil level gets above the
cross-hatched area that shows the proper operating
range, the engine could be damaged.
See Engine Compartment
Overview on page 6-12
for the location of the
engine oil fill cap.
L4 and L5 Engines
V8 Engine
If the oil is below the cross-hatched area (L), add at least
one quart/liter of the recommended oil. This section
explains what kind of oil to use. For engine oil crankcase
capacity, see Capacities and Specifications on page 6-118.
6-16
Add enough oil to put the level somewhere in the proper
operating range. Push the dipstick all the way back in
when through.
What Kind of Engine Oil to Use
Look for three things:
• American Petroleum Institute (API) starburst symbol
Oils meeting these
requirements should have
the starburst symbol on
the container. This symbol
indicates that the oil has
been certified by the
American Petroleum
Institute (API).
Notice: Use only engine oil identified as meeting
GM Standard GM6094M and showing the American
Petroleum Institute Certified For Gasoline Engines
starburst symbol. Failure to use the recommended
oil can result in engine damage not covered by
the vehicle warranty.
Cold Temperature Operation
• GM6094M
Use only an oil that meets GM Standard GM6094M.
• SAE 5W-30
SAE 5W-30 is best for the vehicle. These numbers
on an oil container show its viscosity, or thickness.
Do not use other viscosity oils such as SAE 20W-50.
If in an area of extreme cold, where the temperature
falls below −20°F (−29°C), use either an SAE 5W-30
synthetic oil or an SAE 0W-30 engine oil. Both provide
easier cold starting for the engine at extremely low
temperatures. Always use an oil that meets the required
specification, GM6094M. See “What Kind of Engine
Oil to Use” for more information.
6-17
Engine Oil Additives / Engine Oil
Flushes
Do not add anything to the oil. The recommended
oils with the starburst symbol that meet GM Standard
GM6094M are all that is needed for good performance
and engine protection.
Engine oil system flushes are not recommended and
could cause engine damage not covered by the vehicle
warranty.
Engine Oil Life System
When to Change Engine Oil
This vehicle has a computer system that indicates when
to change the engine oil and filter. This is based on
engine revolutions and engine temperature, and not on
mileage. Based on driving conditions, the mileage at
which an oil change is indicated can vary considerably.
For the oil life system to work properly, the system
must be reset every time the oil is changed.
6-18
When the system has calculated that oil life has been
diminished, it indicates that an oil change is necessary.
A CHANGE OIL message comes on. See DIC Warnings
and Messages on page 4-37. Change the oil as soon
as possible within the next 600 miles (1 000 km). It is
possible that, if driving under the best conditions, the
oil life system might not indicate that an oil change is
necessary for over a year. However, the engine oil and
filter must be changed at least once a year and at this
time the system must be reset. Your dealer/retailer has
trained people who will perform this work using genuine
parts and reset the system. It is also important to check
the oil regularly and keep it at the proper level.
If the system is ever reset accidentally, the oil must be
changed at 3,000 miles (5 000 km) since the last oil
change. Remember to reset the oil life system whenever
the oil is changed.
How to Reset the Engine Oil Life
System
The Engine Oil Life System calculates when to change
the engine oil and filter based on vehicle use. Whenever
the oil is changed, reset the system so it can calculate
when the next oil change is required. If a situation occurs
where the oil is changed prior to a CHANGE OIL
message being turned on, reset the system.
To reset the Engine Oil Life system:
1. With the engine off, turn the ignition to ON/RUN.
2. Press and release the stem in the lower center
of the instrument cluster until the OIL LIFE
message is displayed.
What to Do with Used Oil
Used engine oil contains certain elements that can be
unhealthy for your skin and could even cause cancer.
Do not let used oil stay on your skin for very long. Clean
your skin and nails with soap and water, or a good hand
cleaner. Wash or properly dispose of clothing or rags
containing used engine oil. See the manufacturer’s
warnings about the use and disposal of oil products.
Used oil can be a threat to the environment. If you
change your own oil, be sure to drain all the oil from the
filter before disposal. Never dispose of oil by putting it
in the trash, pouring it on the ground, into sewers, or into
streams or bodies of water. Recycle it by taking it to a
place that collects used oil.
3. Once the alternating OIL LIFE and RESET
messages appear, press and hold the stem
until several beeps sound. This confirms that
the oil life system has been reset.
4. Turn the key to LOCK/OFF.
If the CHANGE OIL message comes back on when the
vehicle is started, the engine oil life system has not
reset. Repeat the procedure. See DIC Warnings
and Messages on page 4-37.
6-19
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
When to Inspect the Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter
Inspect the air cleaner/filter at the Maintenance II
intervals and replace it at the first oil change after
each 50,000 mile (80 000 km) interval. See Scheduled
Maintenance on page 7-3 for more information.
If you are driving in dusty/dirty conditions, inspect
the filter at each engine oil change.
How to Inspect the Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter
To inspect or replace the engine air cleaner/filter, do the
following:
1. Unfasten the clips that hold the cover on and
remove the cover.
The engine air cleaner/filter is located in the engine
compartment on the passenger’s side of the vehicle.
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 6-12
for more information on location.
2. Lift out the engine air cleaner/filter.
3. Inspect or replace the air filter. See Maintenance
Replacement Parts on page 7-12 to determine
which filter to use.
4. Reinstall the engine air cleaner/filter cover. Fasten
the clips to hold the cover in place.
6-20
Automatic Transmission Fluid
{ WARNING:
Operating the engine with the air cleaner/filter off
can cause you or others to be burned. The air
cleaner not only cleans the air; it helps to stop
flames if the engine backfires. If it is not there and
the engine backfires, you could be burned. Do not
drive with it off, and be careful working on the
engine with the air cleaner/filter off.
When to Check and Change Automatic
Transmission Fluid
A good time to check the automatic transmission fluid
level is when the engine oil is changed.
Change the fluid and filter at the intervals listed in
Scheduled Maintenance on page 7-3, and be sure
to use the transmission fluid listed in Recommended
Fluids and Lubricants on page 7-10.
Notice: If the air cleaner/filter is off, a backfire
can cause a damaging engine fire. And, dirt
can easily get into the engine, which will damage it.
Always have the air cleaner/filter in place when
you are driving.
6-21
How to Check Automatic Transmission
Fluid
To get the right reading, the fluid should be at
normal operating temperature, which is 82°C to 93°C
(180°F to 200°F).
Because this operation can be a little difficult, you may
choose to have this done at the dealer/retailer service
department.
Get the vehicle warmed up by driving about 24 km
(15 miles) when outside temperatures are above
10°C (50°F). If it is colder than 10°C (50°F), drive the
vehicle in 3 (Third) until the engine temperature gage
moves and then remains steady for 10 minutes.
If adding it yourself, be sure to follow all the instructions
here, or there could be a false reading on the dipstick.
Notice: Too much or too little fluid can damage
your transmission. Too much can mean that some
of the fluid could come out and fall on hot engine
parts or exhaust system parts, starting a fire.
Too little fluid could cause the transmission to
overheat. Be sure to get an accurate reading if
you check your transmission fluid.
Wait at least 30 minutes before checking the
transmission fluid level if you have been driving:
•
•
•
•
When outside temperatures are above 32°C (90°F).
At high speed for quite a while.
In heavy traffic — especially in hot weather.
While pulling a trailer.
6-22
A cold fluid check can be made after the vehicle has
been sitting for eight hours or more with the engine off,
but this is used only as a reference. Let the engine
run at idle for five minutes if outside temperatures are
10°C (50°F) or more. If it is colder than 10°C (50°F),
the engine might have to idle longer. Should the
fluid level be low during this cold check, check the fluid
hot before adding fluid. Checking the fluid hot gives
a more accurate reading of the fluid level.
Checking the Fluid Level
To prepare the vehicle:
1. Park the vehicle on a level place. Keep the engine
running.
2. With the parking brake applied, place the shift lever
in P (Park).
3. With your foot on the brake pedal, move the shift
lever through each gear range, pausing for about
three seconds in each range. Then, position
the shift lever in P (Park).
4. Let the engine run at idle for three minutes or more.
Then, without shutting off the engine:
1. Flip the handle up and then pull out the dipstick
and wipe it with a clean rag or paper towel.
The automatic transmission
dipstick handle with this
symbol on it is located in
the engine compartment on
the passenger side of the
vehicle.
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 6-12
for more information on location.
2. Push it back in all the way, wait three seconds, and
pull it back out again.
6-23
How to Add Automatic Transmission
Fluid
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what
kind of transmission fluid to use. See Recommended
Fluids and Lubricants on page 7-10.
3. Check both sides of the dipstick, and read the lower
level. The fluid level must be in the COLD area,
below the cross-hatched area, for a cold check or
in the HOT or cross-hatched area for a hot check.
Be sure to keep the dipstick pointed down to get an
accurate reading.
4. If the fluid level is in the acceptable range, push the
dipstick back in all the way; then flip the handle
down to lock the dipstick in place.
Add fluid only after checking the transmission fluid while
it is hot. A cold check is used only as a reference. If the
fluid level is low, add only enough of the proper fluid to
bring the level up to the HOT area for a hot check. It does
not take much fluid, generally less than one pint (0.5 L).
Do not overfill.
Notice: Use of the incorrect automatic transmission
fluid may damage the vehicle, and the damages
may not be covered by the vehicle’s warranty.
Always use the automatic transmission fluid listed
in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 7-10.
• After adding fluid, recheck the fluid level as
described under “How to Check Automatic
Transmission Fluid,” earlier in this section.
• When the correct fluid level is obtained, push the
dipstick back in all the way; then flip the handle
down to lock the dipstick in place.
6-24
Manual Transmission Fluid
After this is done:
When to Check
A good time to check the manual transmission fluid is
when the engine oil is changed. However, the fluid in
the manual transmission does not require changing.
How to Check
Because this operation can be a little difficult, you may
choose to have this done at your GM dealer/retailer
service department.
If doing it yourself, be sure to follow all the instructions
here, or there could be a false reading.
Notice: Too much or too little fluid can damage
your transmission. Too little fluid could cause
the transmission to overheat. Be sure to get an
accurate reading if you check your transmission
fluid.
1. Remove the filler plug.
Check the fluid level only when the engine is off, the
vehicle is parked on a level place and the transmission
is cool enough to touch the transmission case.
3. If the fluid level is good, install the plug and be sure
it is fully seated. If the fluid level is low, add more
fluid as described in the next steps.
2. Check that the lubricant level is up to the bottom of
the filler plug hole.
6-25
How to Add Fluid
Hydraulic Clutch
Here is how to add fluid. Refer to the Maintenance
Schedule to determine what kind of fluid to use.
See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 7-10.
The hydraulic clutch linkage in the vehicle is
self-adjusting. The clutch master cylinder reservoir
is filled with hydraulic clutch fluid.
1. Remove the filler plug.
2. Add fluid at the filler plug hole. Add only enough
fluid to bring the fluid level up to the bottom of the
filler plug hole.
3. Install the filler plug. Be sure the plug is fully
seated.
The hydraulic clutch fluid
reservoir cap has this
symbol on it. See Engine
Compartment Overview
on page 6-12 for reservoir
location.
It is not necessary to regularly check clutch fluid unless
a leak in the system is suspected. Adding fluid will
not correct a leak.
A fluid loss in this system could indicate a problem.
Have the system inspected and repaired.
6-26
When to Check and What to Use
Cooling System
The cooling system allows the engine to maintain the
correct working temperature.
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine how
often to check the fluid level in the clutch master cylinder
reservoir and for the proper fluid. See Recommended
Fluids and Lubricants on page 7-10.
How to Check and Add Fluid
The proper fluid should be added if the level does not
reach the bottom of the diaphragm when it is in place in
the reservoir. See the instructions on the reservoir cap.
2.9L Engine shown (3.7L Engine similar)
A. Coolant Recovery Tank
B. Engine Cooling Fan
C. Radiator Pressure Cap
6-27
{ WARNING:
An electric engine cooling fan under the hood can
start up even when the engine is not running and
can cause injury. Keep hands, clothing, and tools
away from any underhood electric fan.
5.3L Engine
A. Coolant Recovery Tank
B. Radiator Pressure Cap
C. Engine Cooling Fan
6-28
Engine Coolant
{ WARNING:
Heater and radiator hoses, and other engine parts,
can be very hot. Do not touch them. If you do, you
can be burned.
Do not run the engine if there is a leak. If you run
the engine, it could lose all coolant. That could
cause an engine fire, and you could be burned.
Get any leak fixed before you drive the vehicle.
The cooling system in the vehicle is filled with
DEX-COOL® engine coolant. This coolant is designed
to remain in the vehicle for five years or 150,000 miles
(240 000 km), whichever occurs first.
The following explains the cooling system and how
to check and add coolant when it is low. If there
is a problem with engine overheating, see Engine
Overheating on page 6-35.
Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL® can
cause premature engine, heater core, or radiator
corrosion. In addition, the engine coolant could
require changing sooner, at 50 000 km (30,000 miles)
or 24 months, whichever occurs first. Any repairs
would not be covered by the vehicle warranty.
Always use DEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant
in the vehicle.
6-29
What to Use
{ WARNING:
Adding only plain water to the cooling system can
be dangerous. Plain water, or some other liquid
such as alcohol, can boil before the proper coolant
mixture will. The vehicle’s coolant warning system
is set for the proper coolant mixture. With plain
water or the wrong mixture, the engine could get
too hot but you would not get the overheat
warning. The engine could catch fire and you or
others could be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of
clean, drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant.
Use a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and
DEX-COOL® coolant. If using this mixture, nothing
else needs to be added. This mixture:
• Gives freezing protection down to −34°F (−37°C),
outside temperature.
• Gives boiling protection up to 265°F (129°C),
engine temperature.
6-30
• Protects against rust and corrosion.
• Will not damage aluminum parts.
• Helps keep the proper engine temperature.
Notice: If an improper coolant mixture is used,
the engine could overheat and be badly damaged.
The repair cost would not be covered by the vehicle
warranty. Too much water in the mixture can freeze
and crack the engine, radiator, heater core, and other
parts.
Notice: If extra inhibitors and/or additives are used
in the vehicle’s cooling system, the vehicle could
be damaged. Use only the proper mixture of
the engine coolant listed in this manual for the
cooling system. See Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 7-10 for more information.
Checking Coolant
The vehicle must be on a level surface when checking
the coolant level.
The coolant recovery tank
cap has this symbol on it.
Check to see if coolant is visible in the coolant recovery
tank. If the coolant inside the coolant recovery tank
is boiling, do not do anything else until it cools down.
If coolant is visible but the coolant level is not at or above
the FULL COLD mark, add a 50/50 mixture of clean,
drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant at the coolant
recovery tank, but be sure the cooling system is cool
before this is done.
The vehicle must be on a level surface. When the engine
is cold, the coolant level should be at FULL COLD, or a
little higher. When the engine is warm, the level could be
above the FULL COLD level.
When the engine is cold, the coolant level should be
at least up to the FULL COLD mark. If it is not,
there could be a leak in the cooling system.
It is located toward the rear of the engine compartment
on the passenger side of the vehicle. See Engine
Compartment Overview on page 6-12 for more
information on location.
6-31
How to Add Coolant to the
Recovery Tank
How to Add Coolant to the Radiator
{ WARNING:
{ WARNING:
You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol
and it will burn if the engine parts are hot enough.
Do not spill coolant on a hot engine.
Notice: This vehicle has a specific coolant fill
procedure. Failure to follow this procedure could
cause the engine to overheat and be severely
damaged.
When the coolant in the coolant recovery tank is at the
FULL COLD mark, start the vehicle.
If coolant is needed, add the proper DEX-COOL®
coolant mixture at the coolant recovery tank.
6-32
An electric engine cooling fan under the hood can
start up even when the engine is not running and
can cause injury. Keep hands, clothing, and tools
away from any underhood electric fan.
{ WARNING:
Steam and scalding liquids from a hot cooling
system can blow out and burn you badly. They are
under pressure, and if you turn the surge tank
pressure cap — even a little — they can come
out at high speed. Never turn the cap when the
cooling system, including the surge tank pressure
cap, is hot. Wait for the cooling system and surge
tank pressure cap to cool if you ever have to turn
the pressure cap.
If coolant is needed, add the proper mixture directly to
the radiator, but be sure the cooling system is cool
before this is done.
1. Remove the radiator pressure cap when the
cooling system, including the upper radiator hose,
is no longer hot. Turn the pressure cap slowly
counterclockwise about one full turn.
If you hear a hiss, wait for that to stop. A hiss
means there is still some pressure left.
3. Fill the radiator with the proper DEX-COOL®
coolant mixture, up to the base of the filler
neck. See Engine Coolant on page 6-29 for more
information about the proper coolant mixture.
4. Fill the coolant recovery tank to the
FULL COLD mark.
5. Reinstall the cap on the coolant recovery tank,
but leave the radiator pressure cap off.
2. Keep turning the cap to remove it.
6-33
7. By this time, the coolant level inside the radiator
filler neck might be lower. If the level is lower, add
more of the proper DEX-COOL® coolant mixture
through the filler neck until the level reaches
the base of the filler neck.
8. Then replace the pressure cap.
At any time during this procedure if coolant begins to
flow out of the filler neck, reinstall the pressure cap.
Notice: If the pressure cap is not tightly installed,
coolant loss and possible engine damage may
occur. Be sure the cap is properly and tightly
secured.
6. Start the engine and let it run until you can feel the
upper radiator hose getting hot. Watch out for the
engine cooling fan.
6-34
Engine Overheating
The vehicle has a coolant temperature gage displayed
on the instrument panel to warn if the engine is
overheating. See Engine Coolant Temperature Gage on
page 4-27. If the engine is too hot, the air conditioning
might stop working. This is normal and helps cool
the engine.
You may decide not to lift the hood when the warning
appears, but instead get service help right away.
See Roadside Assistance Program on page 8-7.
If you do decide to lift the hood, make sure the vehicle
is parked on a level surface.
Then check to see if the engine cooling fan is running.
If the engine is overheating, the fan should be running.
If it is not, do not continue to run the engine and have the
vehicle serviced.
The engine cooling fan speed should increase when
idle speed is doubled by pushing the accelerator
pedal down. If it does not, the vehicle needs service.
Turn off the engine.
If Steam is Coming from the Engine
Compartment
{ WARNING:
Steam from an overheated engine can burn you
badly, even if you just open the hood. Stay away
from the engine if you see or hear steam coming
from it. Just turn it off and get everyone away
from the vehicle until it cools down. Wait until
there is no sign of steam or coolant before you
open the hood.
If you keep driving when your engine is
overheated, the liquids in it can catch fire. You or
others could be badly burned. Stop your engine if
it overheats, and get out of the vehicle until the
engine is cool.
Notice: Engine damage from running the engine
without coolant is not covered by the warranty.
Notice: If the engine catches fire because of being
driven with no coolant, your vehicle can be badly
damaged. The costly repairs would not be covered
by the vehicle warranty.
6-35
If No Steam is Coming from the Engine
Compartment
If an engine overheat warning is displayed but no steam
can be seen or heard, the problem may not be too
serious. Sometimes the engine can get a little too hot
when the vehicle:
•
•
•
•
Climbs a long hill on a hot day.
Stops after high-speed driving.
Idles for long periods in traffic.
Tows a trailer. See “Driving on Grades” under
Towing a Trailer on page 5-48.
If the overheat warning is displayed with no sign of
steam:
1. Turn the air conditioning off.
2. Turn the heater on to the highest temperature and
to the highest fan speed. Open the windows as
necessary.
3. In heavy traffic, let the engine idle in N (Neutral)
while stopped. If it is safe to do so, pull off the
road, shift to P (Park) or N (Neutral) and let
the engine idle.
If the temperature overheat gage is no longer in the
overheat zone or an overheat warning no longer
displays, the vehicle can be driven. Continue to drive
6-36
the vehicle slow for about 10 minutes. Keep a safe
vehicle distance from the car in front of you. If the
warning does not come back on, continue to drive
normally.
If the warning continues, pull over, stop, and park the
vehicle right away.
If there is no sign of steam, idle the engine for three
minutes while parked. If the warning is still displayed,
turn off the engine until it cools down.
Engine Fan Noise
This vehicle has a clutched engine cooling fan. When the
clutch is engaged, the fan spins faster to provide more air
to cool the engine. In most everyday driving conditions,
the clutch is not engaged. This improves fuel economy
and reduces fan noise. Under heavy vehicle loading,
trailer towing and/or high outside temperatures, the fan
speed increases when the clutch engages. So you may
hear an increase in fan noise. This is normal and should
not be mistaken as the transmission slipping or making
extra shifts. It is merely the cooling system functioning
properly. The fan will slow down when additional cooling
is not required and the clutch disengages.
You may also hear this fan noise when you start the
engine. It will go away as the fan clutch disengages.
Power Steering Fluid
The power steering fluid
reservoir is located near
the front of the engine
compartment, behind the
radiator. See Engine
Compartment Overview
on page 6-12 for reservoir
location.
How to Check Power Steering Fluid
1. Turn the key off and let the engine compartment
cool down.
2. Wipe the cap and the top of the reservoir clean.
3. Unscrew the cap and wipe the dipstick with a
clean rag.
4. Replace the cap and completely tighten it.
5. Then remove the cap again and look at the fluid
level on the dipstick.
The level should be between the ADD and FULL marks.
If necessary, add only enough fluid to bring the level
up to the proper range.
When to Check Power Steering Fluid
What to Use
It is not necessary to regularly check power steering fluid
unless you suspect there is a leak in the system or
you hear an unusual noise. A fluid loss in this system
could indicate a problem. Have the system inspected
and repaired.
To determine what kind of fluid to use, see
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 7-10.
Always use the proper fluid.
Notice: Use of the incorrect fluid may damage the
vehicle and the damages may not be covered by the
vehicle’s warranty. Always use the correct fluid listed
in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 7-10.
6-37
Windshield Washer Fluid
• When using concentrated washer fluid, follow
What to Use
When windshield washer fluid is needed, be sure
to read the manufacturer’s instructions before use.
If operating the vehicle in an area where the temperature
may fall below freezing, use a fluid that has sufficient
protection against freezing.
Adding Washer Fluid
Open the cap with the
washer symbol on it.
Add washer fluid until the
tank is full. See Engine
Compartment Overview
on page 6-12 for reservoir
location.
6-38
Notice:
the manufacturer’s instructions for adding
water.
• Do not mix water with ready-to-use washer fluid.
Water can cause the solution to freeze and
damage your washer fluid tank and other parts
of the washer system. Also, water does not
clean as well as washer fluid.
• Fill the washer fluid tank only three-quarters
full when it is very cold. This allows for fluid
expansion if freezing occurs, which could
damage the tank if it is completely full.
• Do not use engine coolant (antifreeze) in your
windshield washer. It can damage the vehicle’s
windshield washer system and paint.
Brakes
Brake Fluid
The brake master cylinder
reservoir is filled with
DOT 3 brake fluid. See
Engine Compartment
Overview on page 6-12 for
the location of the reservoir.
There are only two reasons why the brake fluid level in
the reservoir might go down:
• The brake fluid level goes down because of normal
brake lining wear. When new linings are installed,
the fluid level goes back up.
Do not top off the brake fluid. Adding fluid does not
correct a leak. If fluid is added when the linings are worn,
there will be too much fluid when new brake linings are
installed. Add or remove brake fluid, as necessary, only
when work is done on the brake hydraulic system.
{ WARNING:
If too much brake fluid is added, it can spill on
the engine and burn, if the engine is hot enough.
You or others could be burned, and the vehicle
could be damaged. Add brake fluid only when
work is done on the brake hydraulic system.
See “Checking Brake Fluid” in this section.
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine when
to check the brake fluid. See Scheduled Maintenance
on page 7-3.
• A fluid leak in the brake hydraulic system can also
cause a low fluid level. Have the brake hydraulic
system fixed, since a leak means that sooner
or later the brakes will not work well.
6-39
Checking Brake Fluid
Check brake fluid by looking at the brake fluid reservoir.
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 6-12.
The fluid level should
be above the PP mark.
If it is not, have the brake
hydraulic system checked
to see if there is a leak.
{ WARNING:
With the wrong kind of fluid in the brake hydraulic
system, the brakes might not work well. This could
cause a crash. Always use the proper brake fluid.
Notice:
• Using the wrong fluid can badly damage brake
After work is done on the brake hydraulic system, make
sure the level is above the PP mark but not over the
MAX mark.
What to Add
Use only new DOT 3 brake fluid from a sealed container.
See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 7-10.
Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and the
area around the cap before removing it. This helps
keep dirt from entering the reservoir.
6-40
hydraulic system parts. For example, just a
few drops of mineral-based oil, such as engine
oil, in the brake hydraulic system can damage
brake hydraulic system parts so badly that they
will have to be replaced. Do not let someone
put in the wrong kind of fluid.
• If brake fluid is spilled on the vehicle’s painted
surfaces, the paint finish can be damaged.
Be careful not to spill brake fluid on the vehicle.
If you do, wash it off immediately. See Washing
Your Vehicle on page 6-106.
Brake Wear
This vehicle has front disc brakes and rear drum
brakes.
Disc brake pads have built-in wear indicators that make
a high-pitched warning sound when the brake pads are
worn and new pads are needed. The sound can come
and go or be heard all the time the vehicle is moving,
except when applying the brake pedal firmly.
{ WARNING:
The brake wear warning sound means that soon
the brakes will not work well. That could lead to an
accident. When the brake wear warning sound is
heard, have the vehicle serviced.
Notice: Continuing to drive with worn-out brake
pads could result in costly brake repair.
Some driving conditions or climates can cause a brake
squeal when the brakes are first applied or lightly applied.
This does not mean something is wrong with the brakes.
Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessary to help
prevent brake pulsation. When tires are rotated, inspect
brake pads for wear and evenly tighten wheel nuts
in the proper sequence to torque specifications
in Capacities and Specifications on page 6-118.
Rear drum brakes do not have wear indicators, but if you
ever hear a rear brake rubbing noise, have the rear brake
linings inspected immediately. Also, the rear brake drums
should be removed and inspected each time the tires are
removed for rotation or changing. When you have the
front brake pads replaced, have the rear brakes
inspected, too.
Brake linings should always be replaced as complete
axle sets.
Brake Pedal Travel
See your dealer/retailer if the brake pedal does not
return to normal height, or if there is a rapid increase in
pedal travel. This could be a sign that brake service
might be required.
Brake Adjustment
Every brake stop, the brakes adjust for wear.
6-41
Replacing Brake System Parts
The braking system on a vehicle is complex. Its many
parts have to be of top quality and work well together if
the vehicle is to have really good braking. The vehicle
was designed and tested with top-quality brake parts.
When parts of the braking system are replaced — for
example, when the brake linings wear down and new
ones are installed — be sure to get new approved
replacement parts. If this is not done, the brakes might
not work properly. For example, if someone puts in
brake linings that are wrong for the vehicle, the balance
between the front and rear brakes can change — for the
worse. The braking performance expected can change
in many other ways if the wrong replacement brake parts
are installed.
Battery
Refer to the replacement number on the original battery
label when a new battery is needed. See Engine
Compartment Overview on page 6-12 for battery location.
{ DANGER:
Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds, chemicals
known to the State of California to cause cancer
and reproductive harm. Wash hands after handling.
Vehicle Storage
{ WARNING:
Batteries have acid that can burn you and gas that
can explode. You can be badly hurt if you are not
careful. See Jump Starting on page 6-43 for tips
on working around a battery without getting hurt.
Infrequent Usage: Remove the black, negative (−) cable
from the battery to keep the battery from running down.
Extended Storage: Remove the black, negative (−) cable
from the battery or use a battery trickle charger.
6-42
Jump Starting
If the vehicle battery has run down, you may want to use
another vehicle and some jumper cables to start your
vehicle. Be sure to use the following steps to do it safely.
{ WARNING:
Batteries can hurt you. They can be dangerous
because:
• They contain acid that can burn you.
• They contain gas that can explode or ignite.
• They contain enough electricity to burn you.
If you do not follow these steps exactly, some or
all of these things can hurt you.
Notice: Ignoring these steps could result in costly
damage to the vehicle that would not be covered
by the warranty.
Trying to start the vehicle by pushing or pulling it
will not work, and it could damage the vehicle.
1. Check the other vehicle. It must have a 12-volt
battery with a negative ground system.
Notice: If the other vehicle’s system is not a 12-volt
system with a negative ground, both vehicles can
be damaged. Only use vehicles with 12-volt systems
with negative grounds to jump start your vehicle.
2. Get the vehicles close enough so the jumper cables
can reach, but be sure the vehicles are not touching
each other. If they are, it could cause a ground
connection you do not want. You would not be
able to start your vehicle, and the bad grounding
could damage the electrical systems.
To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling, set the
parking brake firmly on both vehicles involved in the
jump start procedure. Put an automatic transmission
in P (Park) or a manual transmission in Neutral
before setting the parking brake. If you have a
four-wheel-drive vehicle, be sure the transfer case
is not in Neutral.
6-43
Notice: If you leave the radio or other accessories
on during the jump starting procedure, they could
be damaged. The repairs would not be covered by
the warranty. Always turn off the radio and other
accessories when jump starting the vehicle.
3. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles. Unplug
unnecessary accessories plugged into the cigarette
lighter or the accessory power outlets. Turn off the
radio and all lamps that are not needed. This will
avoid sparks and help save both batteries. And it
could save the radio!
4. Open the hoods and locate the positive (+) and
negative (−) terminal locations on the other vehicle.
Your vehicle has a remote positive (+) and a remote
negative (−) jump starting terminal. See Engine
Compartment Overview on page 6-12 for more
information on the terminal locations.
6-44
{ WARNING:
Using a match near a battery can cause battery
gas to explode. People have been hurt doing this,
and some have been blinded. Use a flashlight if
you need more light.
Be sure the batteries have enough water. You do
not need to add water to the ACDelco® battery
(or batteries) installed in your new vehicle. But if a
battery has filler caps, be sure the right amount of
fluid is there. If it is low, add water to take care of
that first. If you do not, explosive gas could be
present.
Battery fluid contains acid that can burn you.
Do not get it on you. If you accidentally get it in
your eyes or on your skin, flush the place with
water and get medical help immediately.
{ WARNING:
Fans or other moving engine parts can injure you
badly. Keep your hands away from moving parts
once the engine is running.
5. Check that the jumper cables do not have loose
or missing insulation. If they do, you could get a
shock. The vehicles could be damaged too.
Before you connect the cables, here are some
basic things you should know. Positive (+) will go
to positive (+) or to a remote positive (+) terminal
if the vehicle has one. Negative (−) will go to a
heavy, unpainted metal engine part or to a remote
negative (−) terminal if the vehicle has one.
Do not connect positive (+) to negative (−) or you
will get a short that would damage the battery
and maybe other parts too. And do not connect the
negative (−) cable to the negative (−) terminal on
the dead battery because this can cause sparks.
6. Connect the red positive (+) cable to the positive (+)
terminal of the dead battery. Use a remote
positive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one.
7. Do not let the other end touch metal. Connect it to
the positive (+) terminal of the good battery. Use a
remote positive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one.
6-45
8. Now connect the black negative (−) cable to the
negative (−) terminal of the good battery. Use a
remote negative (−) terminal if the vehicle has one.
Do not let the other end touch anything until the
next step. The other end of the negative (−) cable
does not go to the dead battery. It goes to a heavy,
unpainted metal engine part, or to a remote
negative (−) terminal on the vehicle with the
dead battery.
Notice: If the jumper cables are connected or
removed in the wrong order, electrical shorting may
occur and damage the vehicle. The repairs would
not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Always
connect and remove the jumper cables in the correct
order, making sure that the cables do not touch
each other or other metal.
9. Connect the other end of the negative (−) cable at
least 18 inches (45 cm) away from the dead battery,
but not near engine parts that move. The electrical
connection is just as good there, and the chance
of sparks getting back to the battery is much less.
Your vehicle has a remote negative (−) terminal
for this purpose.
10. Now start the vehicle with the good battery and run
the engine for a while.
11. Try to start the vehicle that had the dead battery.
If it will not start after a few tries, it probably needs
service.
Jumper Cable Removal
A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine Part or Remote
Negative (−) Terminal
B. Good Battery or Remote Positive (+) and Remote
Negative (−) Terminals
C. Dead Battery or Remote Positive (+) Terminal
6-46
To disconnect the jumper cables from both vehicles, do
the following:
How to Check Lubricant
1. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from the
vehicle that had the dead battery.
2. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from the
vehicle with the good battery.
3. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the
vehicle with the good battery.
4. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the other
vehicle.
Rear Axle
When to Check and Change Lubricant
It is not necessary to regularly check rear axle fluid
unless you suspect there is a leak or you hear an
unusual noise. A fluid loss could indicate a problem.
Have it inspected and repaired.
To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should be on a
level surface.
The proper level is from 0 to 3/8 inch (0 mm to 10 mm)
below the bottom of the filler plug hole, located on
the rear axle.
What to Use
See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 7-10
to determine which kind of lubricant to use.
6-47
Four-Wheel Drive
Lubricant checks in this section apply to this vehicle.
There are two additional systems that need lubrication.
Transfer Case
When to Check Lubricant
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine
how often to check the lubricant. See Scheduled
Maintenance on page 7-3.
How to Check Lubricant
To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should be on a
level surface.
A. Drain Plug
B. Filler Plug
If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hole,
located on the transfer case, you’ll need to add some
lubricant. Remove the plug and add enough lubricant
to raise the level to the bottom of the filler plug hole.
Use care not to overtighten the plug.
What to Use
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what
kind of lubricant to use. See Recommended Fluids
and Lubricants on page 7-10.
6-48
Front Axle
When to Check and Change Lubricant
It is not necessary to regularly check your front axle
fluid unless you suspect there is a leak or you hear an
unusual noise. A fluid loss could indicate a problem.
Have it inspected and repaired.
How to Check Lubricant
If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hole,
located on the front axle, you may need to add some
lubricant.
When the differential is cold, add enough lubricant to
raise the level to 1/2 inch (12 mm) below the filler
plug hole.
When the differential is at operating temperature
(warm), add enough lubricant to raise the level to
the bottom of the filler plug hole.
What to Use
See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 7-10
to determine what kind of lubricant to use.
To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should be on a
level surface.
6-49
Headlamp Aiming
Bulb Replacement
Headlamp aim has been preset at the factory and
should need no further adjustment.
For the proper type of replacement bulbs, see
Replacement Bulbs on page 6-54.
However, if your vehicle is damaged in a crash, the
headlamp aim may be affected. Aim adjustment to the
low-beam headlamps may be necessary if oncoming
drivers flash their high-beam headlamps at you
(for vertical aim).
For any bulb changing procedure not listed in this
section, contact your dealer/retailer.
If the headlamps need to be re-aimed, it is
recommended that you take the vehicle to your
dealer/retailer for service.
Halogen Bulbs
{ WARNING:
Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas inside and
can burst if you drop or scratch the bulb. You or
others could be injured. Be sure to read and follow
the instructions on the bulb package.
6-50
Headlamps
3. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise to remove it
from the headlamp assembly and pull it straight out.
A. Low-Beam Headlamp/Daytime Running
Lamps (DRL)
B. High-Beam Headlamp
To replace one of these bulbs:
4. Unplug the electrical connector from the old bulb by
releasing the clips on the bulb socket.
5. Pull the old bulb straight out.
1. Open the hood. See Hood Release on page 6-11.
6. Push the new bulb straight in until it clicks to
secure it.
2. Reach in and access the bulb sockets from
inside the engine compartment.
7. Plug in the electrical connector to the new bulb
socket.
8. Push the bulb socket straight in and turn it clockwise
to secure it in the headlamp assembly.
6-51
Front Turn Signal, Parking and
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)
To replace one of these bulbs:
1. Open the hood. See Hood Release on page 6-11.
5. Push the new bulb into the socket until it clicks.
6. Push the bulb socket straight into the lamp
assembly and turn it clockwise to secure.
Center High-Mounted
Stoplamp (CHMSL)
To replace the CHMSL bulb:
1. Remove the two screws and lift off the lamp
assembly from the vehicle.
2. Reach in to access either one of the bulb sockets in
the engine compartment.
3. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise and remove
it from the lamp assembly.
4. Holding the socket, pull the old bulb to release it
from the bulb socket.
6-52
2. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise and remove
it from the lamp assembly.
3. Holding the socket, pull the bulb to release it from
the socket.
4. Push the new bulb into the socket until it clicks.
5. Insert the bulb socket into the lamp assembly and
turn it clockwise to secure.
6. Reinstall the lamp assembly and tighten the screws.
Taillamps, Turn Signal, Stoplamps
and Back-up Lamps
A. Stoplamp/Taillamp
B. Turn Signal/Taillamp
C. Back-up Lamp
To replace one of these bulbs:
1. Open the tailgate. See Tailgate on page 3-8.
2. Remove the two rear
lamp assembly screws
near the tailgate latch.
3. Pull the lamp assembly away from the vehicle.
4. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise to remove it
from the taillamp assembly.
5. Holding the socket, pull the old bulb straight out to
release it from the socket.
6. Push the new bulb straight into the socket until it
clicks.
7. Insert the bulb socket into the taillamp assembly
and turn it clockwise to secure.
8. Reinstall the taillamp assembly and tighten the
screws.
6-53
License Plate Lamp
To replace one of these bulbs:
Replacement Bulbs
Exterior Lamp
Center High-Mounted
Stoplamp (CHMSL)
License Plate Bulb
Bulb Number
912
W5W
Headlamps
High-beam
9005
Low-beam/Daytime Running
Lamp (DRL)
9006
Parking/Front Turn Signal
1. Reach under the rear bumper for the bulb socket.
Parking Lamp (Inboard)
2. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise and pull
the bulb socket out of the connector.
Stoplamp, Rear Turn Signal,
Taillamp, and Back-up Lamp
3. Pull the old bulb straight out from the bulb socket.
4. Push the new bulb straight in until it clicks to
secure it.
5. Reach under the rear bumper to reinstall the bulb
socket into the connector.
6. Turn the bulb socket clockwise to secure it to the
connector.
6-54
3757KA
3157A
3057
For replacement bulbs not listed here, contact your
dealer/retailer.
Windshield Wiper Blade
Replacement
Windshield wiper blades should be inspected for wear
and cracking. See Scheduled Maintenance on page 7-3
for more information.
Replacement blades come in different types and are
removed in different ways. For proper type and length,
see Maintenance Replacement Parts on page 7-12.
Allowing the wiper blade arm to touch the windshield
when no wiper blade is installed could damage the
windshield. Any damage that occurs would not be
covered by your warranty. Do not allow the wiper
blade arm to touch the windshield.
1. To remove the old wiper blades, lift the wiper arm
until it locks into a vertical position.
A. Blade Assembly
B. Arm Assembly
C. Locking Tab
D. Blade Pivot
E. Hook Slot
F. Arm Hook
2. Press down on the blade assembly pivot locking
tab. Pull down on the blade assembly to release it
from the wiper arm hook.
6-55
3. Remove the insert from the blade assembly.
The insert has two notches at one end that are
locked by bottom claws of the blade assembly.
At the notched end, pull the insert from the blade
assembly.
4. To install the new wiper insert, slide the insert (D),
notched end last, into the end with two blade
claws (A). Slide the insert all the way through the
blade claws at the opposite end (B). The plastic
caps (C) will be forced off as the insert is fully
inserted.
5. Be sure that the notches are locked by the bottom
claws. Make sure that all other claws are properly
locked on both sides of the insert slots.
6-56
A. Claw in Notch
B. Correct Installation
C. Incorrect Installation
6. Put the blade assembly pivot in the wiper arm hook.
Pull up until the pivot locking tab locks in the
hook slot.
7. Carefully lower the wiper arm and blade assembly
onto the windshield.
Tires
WARNING:
Your new vehicle comes with high-quality tires
made by a leading tire manufacturer. If you ever
have questions about your tire warranty and where
to obtain service, see your vehicle Warranty
booklet for details. For additional information
refer to the tire manufacturer.
{ WARNING:
Poorly maintained and improperly used tires
are dangerous.
• Overloading your vehicle’s tires can
cause overheating as a result of too
much flexing. You could have an air-out
and a serious accident. See Loading the
Vehicle on page 5-33.
WARNING:
(Continued)
• Underinflated tires pose the same danger
as overloaded tires. The resulting accident
could cause serious injury. Check all tires
frequently to maintain the recommended
pressure. Tire pressure should be
checked when your vehicle’s tires are
cold. See Inflation - Tire Pressure on
page 6-64.
• Overinflated tires are more likely to be
cut, punctured, or broken by a sudden
impact — such as when you hit a pothole.
Keep tires at the recommended pressure.
• Worn, old tires can cause accidents.
If the tire’s tread is badly worn, or if your
vehicle’s tires have been damaged,
replace them.
(Continued)
6-57
Tire Sidewall Labeling
Useful information about a tire is molded into its
sidewall. The examples below show a typical
passenger vehicle tire and a compact spare tire
sidewall.
(A) Tire Size: The tire size is a combination of
letters and numbers used to define a particular
tire’s width, height, aspect ratio, construction
type and service description. See the “Tire Size”
illustration later in this section for more detail.
(B) TPC Spec (Tire Performance Criteria
Specification): Original equipment tires designed
to GM’s specific tire performance criteria have a
TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall.
GM’s TPC specifications meet or exceed all federal
safety guidelines.
(C) DOT (Department of Transportation):
The Department of Transportation (DOT) code
indicates that the tire is in compliance with the
U.S. Department of Transportation Motor Vehicle
Safety Standards.
Passenger Vehicle Tire Example
(D) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The letters
and numbers following DOT code are the Tire
Identification Number (TIN). The TIN shows the
manufacturer and plant code, tire size, and date
the tire was manufactured. The TIN is molded onto
both sides of the tire, although only one side may
have the date of manufacture.
(E) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and number
of plies in the sidewall and under the tread.
6-58
(F) Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG):
Tire manufacturers are required to grade tires
based on three performance factors: treadwear,
traction and temperature resistance. For more
information see Uniform Tire Quality Grading on
page 6-75.
(G) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit:
Maximum load that can be carried and the
maximum pressure needed to support that load.
(A) Temporary Use Only: The compact
spare tire or temporary use tire has a tread life of
approximately 3,000 miles (5 000 km) and should
not be driven at speeds over 65 mph (105 km/h).
The compact spare tire is for emergency use
when a regular road tire has lost air and gone flat.
See “Compact Spare Tire” under Spare Tire on
page 6-101 for additional information.
(B) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and
number of plies in the sidewall and under
the tread.
(C) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The Tire
Identification Number (TIN). The TIN shows the
manufacturer and plant code, tire size, and date the
tire was manufactured. The TIN is molded onto both
sides of the tire, although only one side may have
the date of manufacture.
(D) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit:
Maximum load that can be carried and the
maximum pressure needed to support that load.
(E) Tire Inflation: The temporary use tire or
compact spare tire should be inflated to 60 psi
(420 kPa). For more information on tire pressure
and inflation see Inflation - Tire Pressure on
page 6-64.
Compact Spare Tire Example
6-59
(F) Tire Size : A combination of letters and
numbers define a tire’s width, height, aspect
ratio, construction type and service description.
The letter T as the first character in the tire
size means the tire is for temporary use only.
(G) TPC Spec (Tire Performance Criteria
Specification): Original equipment tires designed
to GM’s specific tire performance criteria have a
TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall.
GM’s TPC specifications meet or exceed all federal
safety guidelines.
Tire Size
The following illustration shows an example of a
typical passenger vehicle tire size.
(B) Tire Width: The three-digit number indicates
the tire section width in millimeters from sidewall
to sidewall.
(C) Aspect Ratio: A two-digit number that
indicates the tire height-to-width measurements.
For example, if the tire size aspect ratio is 70, as
shown in item C of the illustration, it would mean
that the tire’s sidewall is 70 percent as high as it
is wide.
(D) Construction Code: A letter code is used
to indicate the type of ply construction in the tire.
The letter R means radial ply construction; the
letter D means diagonal or bias ply construction;
and the letter B means belted-bias ply construction.
(E) Rim Diameter: Diameter of the wheel in
inches.
(F) Service Description: These characters
represent the load index and speed rating of the
tire. The load index represents the load carry
capacity a tire is certified to carry. The speed
rating is the maximum speed a tire is certified
to carry a load.
(A) P-Metric Tire: The United States version of
a metric tire sizing system. The letter P as the first
character in the tire size means a passenger
vehicle tire engineered to standards set by the
U.S. Tire and Rim Association.
6-60
Tire Terminology and Definitions
Air Pressure: The amount of air inside the
tire pressing outward on each square inch of
the tire. Air pressure is expressed in pounds
per square inch (psi) or kilopascal (kPa).
Accessory Weight: This means the combined
weight of optional accessories. Some examples of
optional accessories are, automatic transmission,
power steering, power brakes, power windows,
power seats, and air conditioning.
Aspect Ratio: The relationship of a tire’s height
to its width.
Belt: A rubber coated layer of cords that is
located between the plies and the tread. Cords
may be made from steel or other reinforcing
materials.
Bead: The tire bead contains steel wires wrapped
by steel cords that hold the tire onto the rim.
Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the plies
are laid at alternate angles less than 90 degrees
to the centerline of the tread.
Cold Tire Pressure: The amount of air pressure in
a tire, measured in pounds per square inch (psi) or
kilopascals (kPa) before a tire has built up heat
from driving. See Inflation - Tire Pressure on
page 6-64.
Curb Weight: The weight of a motor vehicle
with standard and optional equipment including
the maximum capacity of fuel, oil, and coolant,
but without passengers and cargo.
DOT Markings: A code molded into the sidewall
of a tire signifying that the tire is in compliance
with the U.S. Department of Transportation (DOT)
motor vehicle safety standards. The DOT code
includes the Tire Identification Number (TIN), an
alphanumeric designator which can also identify
the tire manufacturer, production plant, brand, and
date of production.
GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight Rating.
See Loading the Vehicle on page 5-33.
GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the
front axle. See Loading the Vehicle on page 5-33.
GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the
rear axle. See Loading the Vehicle on page 5-33.
6-61
Intended Outboard Sidewall: The side of an
asymmetrical tire, that must always face outward
when mounted on a vehicle.
Kilopascal (kPa): The metric unit for air pressure.
Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: A tire used on
light duty trucks and some multipurpose passenger
vehicles.
Load Index: An assigned number ranging
from 1 to 279 that corresponds to the load carrying
capacity of a tire.
Maximum Inflation Pressure: The maximum
air pressure to which a cold tire can be inflated.
The maximum air pressure is molded onto the
sidewall.
Maximum Load Rating: The load rating for a tire
at the maximum permissible inflation pressure
for that tire.
Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight: The sum of
curb weight, accessory weight, vehicle capacity
weight, and production options weight.
6-62
Normal Occupant Weight: The number of
occupants a vehicle is designed to seat multiplied
by 150 lbs (68 kg). See Loading the Vehicle on
page 5-33.
Occupant Distribution: Designated seating
positions.
Outward Facing Sidewall: The side of an
asymmetrical tire that has a particular side that
faces outward when mounted on a vehicle.
The side of the tire that contains a whitewall,
bears white lettering, or bears manufacturer,
brand, and/or model name molding that is higher
or deeper than the same moldings on the other
sidewall of the tire.
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A tire used on
passenger cars and some light duty trucks and
multipurpose vehicles.
Recommended Inflation Pressure: Vehicle
manufacturer’s recommended tire inflation pressure
as shown on the tire placard. See Inflation - Tire
Pressure on page 6-64 and Loading the Vehicle
on page 5-33.
Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which
the ply cords that extend to the beads are laid
at 90 degrees to the centerline of the tread.
Rim: A metal support for a tire and upon which
the tire beads are seated.
Sidewall: The portion of a tire between the tread
and the bead.
Speed Rating: An alphanumeric code assigned to
a tire indicating the maximum speed at which a
tire can operate.
Traction: The friction between the tire and the
road surface. The amount of grip provided.
Tread: The portion of a tire that comes into
contact with the road.
Treadwear Indicators: Narrow bands, sometimes
called wear bars, that show across the tread of a
tire when only 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread remains.
See When It Is Time for New Tires on page 6-72.
UTQGS (Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Standards): A tire information system that
provides consumers with ratings for a tire’s
traction, temperature, and treadwear. Ratings are
determined by tire manufacturers using government
testing procedures. The ratings are molded into
the sidewall of the tire. See Uniform Tire Quality
Grading on page 6-75.
Vehicle Capacity Weight: The number of
designated seating positions multiplied by 150 lbs
(68 kg) plus the rated cargo load. See Loading
the Vehicle on page 5-33.
Vehicle Maximum Load on the Tire: Load on
an individual tire due to curb weight, accessory
weight, occupant weight, and cargo weight.
Vehicle Placard: A label permanently attached to
a vehicle showing the vehicle’s capacity weight and
the original equipment tire size and recommended
inflation pressure. See “Tire and Loading
Information Label” under Loading the Vehicle
on page 5-33.
6-63
Inflation - Tire Pressure
Tires need the correct amount of air pressure to
operate effectively.
Notice: Do not let anyone tell you that
under-inflation or over-inflation is all right.
It is not. If your tires do not have enough air
(under-inflation), you can get the following:
• Too much flexing
• Too much heat
• Tire overloading
• Premature or irregular wear
• Poor handling
• Reduced fuel economy
If your tires have too much air (over-inflation),
you can get the following:
• Unusual wear
• Poor handling
• Rough ride
• Needless damage from road hazards
6-64
A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Information
label is attached to your vehicle. This label shows
your vehicle’s original equipment tires and the
correct inflation pressures for your tires when they
are cold. The recommended cold tire inflation
pressure, shown on the label, is the minimum
amount of air pressure needed to support
your vehicle’s maximum load carrying capacity.
For additional information regarding how much
weight your vehicle can carry, and an example of
the Tire and Loading Information label, see Loading
the Vehicle on page 5-33. How you load your
vehicle affects vehicle handling and ride comfort.
Never load your vehicle with more weight than it
was designed to carry.
When to Check
Check your tires once a month or more. Also
check the tire pressure of the spare tire. If your
vehicle has a compact spare tire, it should
be at 60 psi (420 kPa). See Spare Tire on
page 6-101 for additional information.
How to Check
Use a good quality pocket-type gage to check tire
pressure. You cannot tell if your tires are properly
inflated simply by looking at them. Radial tires
may look properly inflated even when they are
underinflated. Check the tire’s inflation pressure
when the tires are cold. Cold means your vehicle
has been sitting for at least three hours or driven
no more than 1 mile (1.6 km).
Remove the valve cap from the tire valve stem.
Press the tire gage firmly onto the valve to
get a pressure measurement. If the cold tire
inflation pressure matches the recommended
pressure on the Tire and Loading Information
label, no further adjustment is necessary. If the
inflation pressure is low, add air until you reach
the recommended amount.
If you overfill the tire, release air by pushing on
the metal stem in the center of the tire valve.
Recheck the tire pressure with the tire gage.
Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valve
stems. They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirt
and moisture.
High-Speed Operation
{ WARNING:
Driving at high speeds, 160 km/h (100 mph) or
higher, puts an additional strain on tires. Sustained
high-speed driving causes excessive heat build up
and can cause sudden tire failure. You could have
a crash and you or others could be killed. Some
high-speed rated tires require inflation pressure
adjustment for high speed operation. When speed
limits and road conditions are such that a vehicle
can be driven at high speeds, make sure the tires
are rated for high speed operation, in excellent
condition, and set to the correct cold tire inflation
pressure for the vehicle load.
If your vehicle has P235/50R18 size tires, they will
require inflation pressure adjustment when driving your
vehicle at speeds of 100 mph (160 km/h) or higher.
6-65
Set the cold inflation pressure to the maximum inflation
pressure shown on the tire sidewall, or 35 psi (241 kPa),
whichever is lower. See the example following. When you
end this high-speed driving, return the tires to the cold
tire inflation pressure shown on the Tire and Loading
Information label. See Loading the Vehicle on page 5-33
and Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 6-64.
Example:
You will find the maximum load and inflation pressure
molded on the tire’s sidewall, in small letters, near the
rim flange. It will read something like this: Maximum load
690 kg (1521 lbs) 300 kPa (44 psi) Max. Press.
For this example, you would set the inflation pressure
for high-speed driving at 35 psi (241 kPa).
Tire Pressure Monitor System
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses radio
and sensor technology to check tire pressure levels.
The TPMS sensors monitor the air pressure in your
vehicle’s tires and transmit tire pressure readings to a
receiver located in the vehicle.
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be
checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation
pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer
on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label.
(If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size
6-66
indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure
label, you should determine the proper tire inflation
pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS)
that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one
or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale
illuminates, you should stop and check your tires
as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper
pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated
tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire
failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and
tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling
and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper
tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to
maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation
has not reached the level to trigger illumination of
the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS
malfunction indicator to indicate when the system
is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction
indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale.
When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will
flash for approximately one minute and then remain
continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue
upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the
malfunction exists.
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system
may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as
intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of
reasons, including the installation of replacement or
alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the
TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS
malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or
wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement
or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue
to function properly.
See Tire Pressure Monitor Operation on page 6-67 for
additional information.
Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) and Industry
and Science Canada
See Radio Frequency Statement on page 8-18
for information regarding Part 15 of the Federal
Communications Commission (FCC) Rules and
RSS-210/211 of Industry and Science Canada.
Tire Pressure Monitor Operation
This vehicle may have a Tire Pressure Monitor
System (TPMS). The TPMS is designed to warn the
driver when a low tire pressure condition exists. TPMS
sensors are mounted onto each tire and wheel assembly
on your vehicle, excluding the spare tire. The TPMS
sensors monitor the air pressure in your vehicle’s tires
and transmit the tire pressure readings to a receiver
located in the vehicle.
When a low tire pressure
condition is detected, the
TPMS illuminates the low
tire pressure warning light
located on the instrument
panel cluster.
At the same time, a Driver Information Center (DIC)
message is displayed on the DIC display screen.
The low tire pressure warning light and the DIC warning
message come on at each ignition cycle until the tires are
inflated to the correct inflation pressure. For additional
information and details about the DIC operation and
displays see DIC Operation and Displays on page 4-33
and DIC Warnings and Messages on page 4-37.
6-67
The low tire pressure warning light may come on in
cool weather when the vehicle is first started, and then
turn off as you start to drive. This could be an early
indicator that the air pressure in the tire(s) are getting
low and need to be inflated to the proper pressure.
A Tire and Loading Information label, attached to
your vehicle, shows the size of your vehicle’s original
equipment tires and the correct inflation pressure for
your vehicle’s tires when they are cold. See Loading the
Vehicle on page 5-33, for an example of the Tire and
Loading Information label and its location on your vehicle.
Also see Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 6-64.
Your vehicle’s TPMS can warn you about a low tire
pressure condition but it does not replace normal
tire maintenance. See Tire Inspection and Rotation
on page 6-71 and Tires on page 6-57.
Notice: Liquid tire sealants could damage the Tire
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) sensors. Sensor
damage caused by using a tire sealant is not covered
by your warranty. Do not use liquid tire sealants.
6-68
TPMS Malfunction Light and Message
The TPMS will not function properly if one or more of the
TPMS sensors are missing or inoperable. When the
system detects a malfunction, the low tire warning light
flashes for about one minute and then stays on for the
remainder of the ignition cycle. A DIC warning message
is also displayed. The low tire warning light and DIC
warning message come on at each ignition cycle until
the problem is corrected. Some of the conditions that
can cause the malfunction light and DIC message to
come on are:
• One of the road tires has been replaced with the
spare tire. The spare tire does not have a TPMS
sensor. The TPMS malfunction light and DIC
message should go off once you re-install the
road tire containing the TPMS sensor.
• The TPMS sensor matching process was started but
not completed or not completed successfully after
rotating the vehicle’s tires. The DIC message and
TPMS malfunction light should go off once the TPMS
sensor matching process is performed successfully.
See “TPMS Sensor Matching Process” later in this
section.
• One or more TPMS sensors are missing or
damaged. The DIC message and the TPMS
malfunction light should go off when the TPMS
sensors are installed and the sensor matching
process is performed successfully. See your
dealer/retailer for service.
• Replacement tires or wheels do not match your
vehicle’s original equipment tires or wheels. Tires
and wheels other than those recommended for your
vehicle could prevent the TPMS from functioning
properly. See Buying New Tires on page 6-73.
• Operating electronic devices or being near facilities
using radio wave frequencies similar to the TPMS
could cause the TPMS sensors to malfunction.
If the TPMS is not functioning it cannot detect or
signal a low tire condition. See your dealer/retailer for
service if the TPMS malfunction light and DIC message
comes on and stays on.
TPMS Sensor Matching Process
Each TPMS sensor has a unique identification code.
Any time you replace one or more of the TPMS sensors
or rotate your vehicle’s tires, the identification codes need
to be matched to the new tire/wheel position. The sensors
are matched to the tire/wheel positions in the following
order: driver side front tire, passenger side front tire,
passenger side rear tire, and driver side rear tire using
a TPMS diagnostic tool. See your dealer/retailer for
service.
The TPMS sensors can also be matched to each
tire/wheel position by increasing or decreasing the tire’s
air pressure. If increasing the tire’s air pressure, do
not exceed the maximum inflation pressure indicated on
the tire’s sidewall. To let air-pressure out of a tire you
can use the pointed end of the valve cap, a pencil-style
air pressure gage, or a key.
You have one minute to match the first tire/wheel
position, and five minutes overall, to match all four
tire/wheel positions. If it takes longer than one minute,
to match the first tire and wheel, or more than five
minutes to match all four tire and wheel positions, the
matching process stops and you need to start over.
6-69
The TPMS sensor matching procedure is outlined
below:
1. Set the parking brake.
2. Turn the ignition switch to ON/RUN with the
engine off.
3. Turn the exterior lamp switch from AUTO to OFF
four times within three seconds. A double horn chirp
will sound and the TPMS low tire warning light starts
flashing. The double horn chirp and flashing TPMS
warning light indicates the TPMS matching process
has started. The TPMS warning light should continue
flashing throughout the matching procedure.
The LOW TIRE message displays on the Driver
Information Center (DIC).
4. Start with the driver side front tire.
5. Remove the valve cap from the valve cap stem.
Activate the TPMS sensor by increasing or
decreasing the tire’s air pressure for 10 seconds,
then stop and listen for a single horn chirp. The
single horn chirp should sound within 15 seconds,
confirming that the sensor identification code has
been matched to this tire and wheel position. If you
do not hear the confirming single horn chirp, turn the
ignition switch to LOCK and start over beginning with
Step 2.
6-70
6. Proceed to the passenger side front tire, and repeat
the procedure in Step 5.
7. Proceed to the passenger side rear tire, and repeat
the procedure in Step 5.
8. Proceed to the driver side rear tire, and repeat the
procedure in Step 5.
9. After hearing the confirming horn chirp for the driver
side rear tire, check to see if the TPMS low tire
warning light and the DIC LOW TIRE messages
have turned off. If yes, the TPMS sensors have been
relearned. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK/OFF.
If the low tire warning light and the SERV TPM
message on the DIC are on after completing Step 5
for the driver side rear tire, the sensor relearn
process has not been successful. Turn the ignition
switch to LOCK/OFF and repeat the matching
process beginning with Step 2.
10. Set all four tires to the recommended air pressure
level as indicated on the Tire and Loading
Information label.
11. Put the valve caps back on the valve stems.
Tire Inspection and Rotation
We recommend that you regularly inspect your
vehicle’s tires, including the spare tire, for signs of
wear or damage. See When It Is Time for New
Tires on page 6-72 for more information.
Tires should be rotated every 5,000 to 8,000 miles
(8 000 to 13 000 km). See Scheduled Maintenance
on page 7-3.
The purpose of a regular tire rotation is to achieve a
uniform wear for all tires on the vehicle. This will
ensure that your vehicle continues to perform most
like it did when the tires were new. The first rotation
is the most important. See Scheduled Maintenance
on page 7-3.
Any time you notice unusual wear, rotate your
tires as soon as possible and check wheel
alignment. Also check for damaged tires or wheels.
See When It Is Time for New Tires on page 6-72
and Wheel Replacement on page 6-77.
When rotating your tires, always use the correct
rotation pattern shown here.
Do not include the spare or compact spare tire in
the tire rotation.
After the tires have been rotated, adjust the front
and rear inflation pressures as shown on the Tire
and Loading Information label. See Inflation - Tire
Pressure on page 6-64 and Loading the Vehicle on
page 5-33.
Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor System. See Tire
Pressure Monitor Operation on page 6-67.
6-71
Make certain that all wheel nuts are properly
tightened. See “Wheel Nut Torque” under
Capacities and Specifications on page 6-118.
{ WARNING:
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to
which it is fastened, can make wheel nuts
become loose after time. The wheel could
come off and cause an accident. When you
change a wheel, remove any rust or dirt from
places where the wheel attaches to the
vehicle. In an emergency, you can use a cloth
or a paper towel to do this; but be sure to use a
scraper or wire brush later, if needed, to get all
the rust or dirt off. See Changing a Flat Tire on
page 6-80.
Make sure the spare tire is stored securely.
Push, pull, and then try to rotate or turn the tire.
If it moves, tighten the cable. See Storing a Flat
or Spare Tire and Tools on page 6-96.
6-72
When It Is Time for New Tires
Various factors, such as maintenance, temperatures,
driving speeds, vehicle loading, and road conditions,
influence when you need new tires.
One way to tell when it is
time for new tires is to
check the treadwear
indicators, which appear
when your tires have
only 1/16 inch (1.6 mm)
or less of tread remaining.
Some commercial truck
tires may not have
treadwear indicators.
You need new tires if any of the following statements
are true:
• You can see the indicators at three or more places
around the tire.
• You can see cord or fabric showing through the
tire’s rubber.
• The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut, or snagged
deep enough to show cord or fabric.
• The tire has a bump, bulge, or split.
• The tire has a puncture, cut, or other damage that
cannot be repaired well because of the size or
location of the damage.
The rubber in tires degrades over time, even if they are
not being used. This is also true for the spare tire, if your
vehicle has one. Multiple conditions affect how fast this
aging takes place, including temperatures, loading
conditions, and inflation pressure maintenance. With
proper care and maintenance tires will typically wear out
before they degrade due to age. If you are unsure about
the need to replace your tires as they get older, consult
the tire manufacturer for more information.
Buying New Tires
GM has developed and matched specific tires for
your vehicle. The original equipment tires installed
on your vehicle, when it was new, were designed
to meet General Motors Tire Performance Criteria
Specification (TPC spec) system rating. If you need
replacement tires, GM strongly recommends that you
get tires with the same TPC Spec rating. This way,
your vehicle will continue to have tires that are designed
to give the same performance and vehicle safety,
during normal use, as the original tires.
GM’s exclusive TPC Spec system considers over a
dozen critical specifications that impact the overall
performance of your vehicle, including brake system
performance, ride and handling, traction control, and
tire pressure monitoring performance. GM’s TPC Spec
number is molded onto the tire’s sidewall near the tire
size. If the tires have an all-season tread design, the TPC
spec number will be followed by an MS for mud and
snow. See Tire Sidewall Labeling on page 6-58 for
additional information.
6-73
GM recommends replacing tires in sets of four. This is
because uniform tread depth on all tires will help keep
your vehicle performing most like it did when the tires
were new. Replacing less than a full set of tires can affect
the braking and handling performance of your vehicle.
See Tire Inspection and Rotation on page 6-71 for
information on proper tire rotation.
{ WARNING:
Mixing tires could cause you to lose control of
your vehicle while driving. If you mix tires of
different sizes, brands, or types (radial and
bias-belted tires) the vehicle may not handle
properly, and you could have a crash. Using tires
of different sizes, brands, or types may also cause
damage to your vehicle. Be sure to use the correct
size, brand, and type of tires on all wheels.
Your vehicle may have a compact spare tire and
wheel assembly. It is all right to drive with your
vehicle’s compact spare tire temporarily. It was
developed for use on your vehicle. See Spare Tire
on page 6-101.
6-74
{ WARNING:
If you use bias-ply tires on the vehicle,
the wheel rim flanges could develop cracks
after many miles of driving. A tire and/or
wheel could fail suddenly, causing a crash.
Use only radial-ply tires with the wheels on
the vehicle.
If you must replace your vehicle’s tires with those that do
not have a TPC Spec number, make sure they are the
same size, load range, speed rating, and construction
type (radial and bias-belted tires) as your vehicle’s
original tires.
Vehicles that have a tire pressure monitoring system
could give an inaccurate low-pressure warning if
non-TPC Spec rated tires are installed on your vehicle.
Non-TPC Spec rated tires may give a low-pressure
warning that is higher or lower than the proper warning
level you would get with TPC Spec rated tires. See Tire
Pressure Monitor System on page 6-66.
Your vehicle’s original equipment tires are listed on
the Tire and Loading Information Label. See Loading the
Vehicle on page 5-33, for more information about the
Tire and Loading Information Label and its location
on your vehicle.
Different Size Tires and Wheels
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
If you add wheels or tires that are a different size than
your original equipment wheels and tires, this may affect
the way your vehicle performs, including its braking, ride
and handling characteristics, stability, and resistance
to rollover. Additionally, if your vehicle has electronic
systems such as, antilock brakes, traction control, and
electronic stability control, the performance of these
systems can be affected.
Quality grades can be found where applicable
on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder
and maximum section width. For example:
{ WARNING:
If you add different sized wheels, your vehicle may
not provide an acceptable level of performance and
safety if tires not recommended for those wheels
are selected. You may increase the chance that you
will crash and suffer serious injury. Only use GM
specific wheel and tire systems developed for your
vehicle, and have them properly installed by a GM
certified technician.
See Buying New Tires on page 6-73 and Accessories
and Modifications on page 6-3 for additional information.
Treadwear 200 Traction AA
Temperature A
The following information relates to the system
developed by the United States National
Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA),
which grades tires by treadwear, traction, and
temperature performance. This applies only to
vehicles sold in the United States. The grades are
molded on the sidewalls of most passenger car
tires. The Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG)
system does not apply to deep tread, winter-type
snow tires, space-saver, or temporary use
spare tires, tires with nominal rim diameters
of 10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm), or to some
limited-production tires.
While the tires available on General Motors
passenger cars and light trucks may vary with
respect to these grades, they must also conform
to federal safety requirements and additional
General Motors Tire Performance Criteria (TPC)
standards.
6-75
Treadwear
Temperature – A, B, C
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating
based on the wear rate of the tire when tested
under controlled conditions on a specified
government test course. For example, a tire
graded 150 would wear one and a half (1.5)
times as well on the government course as a tire
graded 100. The relative performance of tires
depends upon the actual conditions of their use,
however, and may depart significantly from the
norm due to variations in driving habits, service
practices, and differences in road characteristics
and climate.
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B,
and C, representing the tire’s resistance to the
generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat
when tested under controlled conditions on a
specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained
high temperature can cause the material of the tire
to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive
temperature can lead to sudden tire failure.
The grade C corresponds to a level of performance
which all passenger car tires must meet under the
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109.
Grades B and A represent higher levels of
performance on the laboratory test wheel than the
minimum required by law. It should be noted that
the temperature grade for this tire is established for
a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive
loading, either separately or in combination, can
cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.
Traction – AA, A, B, C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA,
A, B, and C. Those grades represent the tire’s
ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under
controlled conditions on specified government test
surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C
may have poor traction performance.
6-76
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance
The tires and wheels on your vehicle were aligned and
balanced carefully at the factory to give you the longest
tire life and best overall performance. Adjustments to
wheel alignment and tire balancing will not be necessary
on a regular basis. However, if you notice unusual tire
wear or your vehicle pulling to one side or the other,
the alignment might need to be checked. If you notice
your vehicle vibrating when driving on a smooth road,
the tires and wheels might need to be rebalanced.
See your dealer/retailer for proper diagnosis.
Wheel Replacement
Replace any wheel that is bent, cracked, or badly rusted
or corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming loose, the wheel,
wheel bolts, and wheel nuts should be replaced. If the
wheel leaks air, replace it (except some aluminum
wheels, which can sometimes be repaired). See your
dealer/retailer if any of these conditions exist.
Your dealer/retailer will know the kind of wheel
you need.
Each new wheel should have the same load-carrying
capacity, diameter, width, offset, and be mounted
the same way as the one it replaces.
If you need to replace any of your wheels, wheel bolts,
wheel nuts, or Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)
sensors, replace them only with new GM original
equipment parts. This way, you will be sure to have the
right wheel, wheel bolts, wheel nuts, and TPMS sensors
for your vehicle.
{ WARNING:
Using the wrong replacement wheels, wheel bolts,
or wheel nuts on your vehicle can be dangerous.
It could affect the braking and handling of your
vehicle, make your tires lose air and make you
lose control. You could have a collision in which
you or others could be injured. Always use the
correct wheel, wheel bolts, and wheel nuts for
replacement.
Notice: The wrong wheel can also cause problems
with bearing life, brake cooling, speedometer or
odometer calibration, headlamp aim, bumper height,
vehicle ground clearance, and tire or tire chain
clearance to the body and chassis.
See Changing a Flat Tire on page 6-80 for more
information.
6-77
Used Replacement Wheels
WARNING:
{ WARNING:
Putting a used wheel on the vehicle is dangerous.
You cannot know how it has been used or how
far it has been driven. It could fail suddenly and
cause a crash. If you have to replace a wheel,
use a new GM original equipment wheel.
Tire Chains
{ WARNING:
If your vehicle has P215/70R16, P235/75R16,
P265/70R17, or P235/50R18 size tires, do not use
tire chains. They can damage your vehicle because
there is not enough clearance. Tire chains used on
WARNING:
6-78
(Continued)
(Continued)
a vehicle without the proper amount of clearance
can cause damage to the brakes, suspension, or
other vehicle parts. The area damaged by the
tire chains could cause you to lose control of
your vehicle and you or others may be injured
in a crash.
Use another type of traction device only if its
manufacturer recommends it for use on your
vehicle and tire size combination and road
conditions. Follow that manufacturer’s instructions.
To help avoid damage to your vehicle, drive
slowly, readjust, or remove the device if it is
contacting your vehicle. Do not spin the vehicle’s
wheels.
If you do find traction devices that will fit, install
them on the rear tires.
Notice: If your vehicle has a tire size other than
P215/70R16, P235/75R16, P265/70R17, or P235/50R18
use tire chains only where legal and only when
you must. Use chains that are the proper size for
your tires. Install them on the tires of the rear axle.
Do not use chains on the tires of the front axle.
Tighten them as tightly as possible with the ends
securely fastened. Drive slowly and follow the chain
manufacturer’s instructions. If you can hear the
chains contacting your vehicle, stop and retighten
them. If the contact continues, slow down until it
stops. Driving too fast or spinning the wheels with
chains on will damage your vehicle.
If a Tire Goes Flat
It is unusual for a tire to blowout while you are driving,
especially if you maintain your vehicle’s tires properly.
If air goes out of a tire, it is much more likely to leak out
slowly. But if you should ever have a blowout, here
are a few tips about what to expect and what to do:
If a front tire fails, the flat tire creates a drag that pulls
the vehicle toward that side. Take your foot off the
accelerator pedal and grip the steering wheel firmly.
Steer to maintain lane position, and then gently brake
to a stop well out of the traffic lane.
A rear blowout, particularly on a curve, acts much like a
skid and may require the same correction you would use
in a skid. In any rear blowout remove your foot from the
accelerator pedal. Get the vehicle under control by
steering the way you want the vehicle to go. It may be
very bumpy and noisy, but you can still steer. Gently
brake to a stop, well off the road if possible.
{ WARNING:
Lifting a vehicle and getting under it to do
maintenance or repairs is dangerous without the
appropriate safety equipment and training. If a jack
is provided with the vehicle, it is designed only for
changing a flat tire. If it is used for anything else,
you or others could be badly injured or killed if the
vehicle slips off the jack. If a jack is provided with
the vehicle, only use it for changing a flat tire.
If a tire goes flat, the next part shows how to use the
jacking equipment to change a flat tire safely.
6-79
Changing a Flat Tire
If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheel damage
by driving slowly to a level place. Turn on the hazard
warning flashers. See Hazard Warning Flashers
on page 4-3.
(Continued)
3. If you have a four-wheel-drive vehicle,
be sure the transfer case is in a drive
gear – not in Neutral.
4. Turn off the engine and do not restart while
the vehicle is raised.
{ WARNING:
Changing a tire can be dangerous. The vehicle
can slip off the jack and roll over or fall on you or
other people. You and they could be badly injured
or even killed. Find a level place to change your
tire. To help prevent the vehicle from moving:
1. Set the parking brake firmly.
2. Put an automatic transmission shift lever in
P (Park), or shift a manual transmission to
1 (First) or R (Reverse).
WARNING:
6-80
WARNING:
(Continued)
5. Do not allow passengers to remain in the
vehicle.
To be even more certain the vehicle will not move,
put blocks at the front and rear of the tire farthest
away from the one being changed. That would be
the tire on the other side, at the opposite end of
the vehicle.
When the vehicle has a flat tire (B), use the following
example as a guide to assist you in the placement
of wheel blocks (A).
A. Wheel Block
B. Flat Tire
The following information explains how to use the jack
and change a tire.
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools
A. Wing Nut
B. Storage Bag and Tools
The tools you will need are located under the right front
passenger seat.
1. Move the seat all the way forward to locate the
tool bag.
2. Locate the wing nut (A) used to retain the storage
bag and tools (B). Turn it counterclockwise to
release the bag.
Put the tools to the side while you access the jack and
wheel blocks.
6-81
Regular/Extended Cab
For regular and extended cab vehicles, the jack and
wheel blocks are located under the cover at the center
of the vehicle behind the front seats.
A.
B.
C.
D.
1. Turn the wing nut on the cover counterclockwise to
remove it.
Jack
Wheel Blocks
Wing Nut
Jack Knob
2. Lower the jack (A) by turning the jack knob (D)
counterclockwise to release the jack from the
bracket.
3. Turn the wing nut (C) holding the wheel blocks (B)
to the back of the vehicle counterclockwise to
release the wheel blocks.
6-82
Crew Cab
For crew cab models, the jack and wheel blocks are
located under the driver side rear seat.
1. Reach under the rear seat to access the jack and
wheel blocks.
A. Jack Handle
Extensions
B. Jack
C. Jack Handle
D. Wheel Wrench
E. Wheel Blocks
2. Turn the jack knob counterclockwise to lower the
jack all the way and release it from the bracket.
3. Remove the wheel blocks and the wheel block
retainer by turning the wing nut counterclockwise.
Use the jack handle extensions and the wheel wrench
to remove the underbody-mounted spare tire.
6-83
1. Assemble the wheel wrench (D), the jack handle
extensions (A) and the jack handle (C) as shown.
2. Insert the chiseled end of the jack handle (C) at a
slight angle through the hole in the rear bumper
and into the funnel-shaped guide.
6-84
3. Turn the wheel wrench (D) counterclockwise to
lower the spare tire to the ground. Continue to
turn the wheel wrench until the spare tire can be
pulled out from under the vehicle.
If the spare tire does not lower to the ground,
the secondary latch is engaged causing the tire
not to lower. See Secondary Latch System
on page 6-93.
Removing the Flat Tire and
Installing the Spare Tire
Use the following pictures and instructions to remove
the flat tire and raise the vehicle.
The tools you will be using include the jack (A), the
wheel blocks (B), the extension tool (C), the jack handle
extensions (D), and the wheel wrench (E).
4. Tilt the retainer when
the tire has been
lowered, and slide it up
the cable so it can be
pulled up through the
wheel opening.
5. Put the spare tire near the flat tire.
1. Do a safety check before proceeding. See Changing
a Flat Tire on page 6-80 for more information.
6-85
2. Remove the center cap by placing the chisel end of
the wheel wrench (E) into one of the slots on the
wheel and gently prying the cap out.
6-86
3. Use the wheel wrench to loosen all the wheel nuts
by turning it counterclockwise. Do not remove the
wheel nuts yet.
{ WARNING:
Getting under a vehicle when it is jacked up is
dangerous. If the vehicle slips off the jack you
could be badly injured or killed. Never get under
a vehicle when it is supported only by a jack.
{ WARNING:
Raising your vehicle with the jack improperly
positioned can damage the vehicle and even
make the vehicle fall. To help avoid personal injury
and vehicle damage, be sure to fit the jack lift
head into the proper location before raising the
vehicle.
Front Position
4. Position the jack (A) under the vehicle as shown for
the front or rear locations.
6-87
Front Position
If the flat tire is on the front of the vehicle, position
the jack to the rear of the front tire in the pocket
off of the frame.
6-88
Front Position — XFE
For Extended Fuel Economy (XFE) vehicles,
position the jack on the flat portion of the jacking
pocket structure rearward of the jacking pocket.
5. Make sure the jack head is positioned so that the
rear axle is resting securely between the grooves
that are on the jack head.
6. Turn the wheel wrench clockwise to raise the
vehicle. Raise the vehicle far enough off the ground
so there is enough room for the spare tire to fit
under the wheel well.
7. Remove all the wheel
nuts and the flat tire.
Rear Position
If the flat tire is on the rear, position the jack under
the rear axle and get as close as possible to the
shock absorber.
6-89
9. Install the spare tire.
{ WARNING:
{ WARNING:
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to which it is
fastened, can make wheel nuts become loose after
time. The wheel could come off and cause an
accident. When changing a wheel, remove any rust
or dirt from places where the wheel attaches to the
vehicle. In an emergency, use a cloth or a paper
towel to do this; but be sure to use a scraper or wire
brush later, if needed, to get all the rust or dirt off.
See Changing a Flat Tire on page 6-80.
8. Remove any rust or dirt
from the wheel bolts,
mounting surfaces
and spare wheel.
6-90
Never use oil or grease on bolts or nuts because
the nuts might come loose. The vehicle’s wheel
could fall off, causing a crash.
10. Put the wheel nuts back
on with the rounded
end of the nuts toward
the wheel. Tighten each
wheel nut by hand.
Then use the wheel
wrench to tighten the
nuts until the wheel is
held against the hub.
Front Position
Rear Position
11. Turn the wheel wrench counterclockwise to lower
the vehicle. Lower the jack completely.
6-91
{ WARNING:
Wheel nuts that are improperly or incorrectly
tightened can cause the wheels to become loose or
come off. The wheel nuts should be tightened with
a torque wrench to the proper torque specification
after replacing. Follow the torque specification
supplied by the aftermarket manufacturer when
using accessory locking wheel nuts. See Capacities
and Specifications on page 6-118 for original
equipment wheel nut torque specifications.
Notice: Improperly tightened wheel nuts can lead
to brake pulsation and rotor damage. To avoid
expensive brake repairs, evenly tighten the wheel
nuts in the proper sequence and to the proper torque
specification. See Capacities and Specifications on
page 6-118 for the wheel nut torque specification.
6-92
12. Tighten the wheel nuts
firmly in a crisscross
sequence as shown
by turning the wheel
wrench clockwise.
When you reinstall the regular wheel and tire, you must
also reinstall the center cap. Place the cap on the wheel
and tap it into place until it seats flush with the wheel.
The cap only goes on one way. Be sure to line up the tab
on the center cap with the indentation on the wheel.
Secondary Latch System
Your vehicle has an underbody-mounted tire hoist
assembly that has a secondary latch system. It is
designed to stop the spare tire from suddenly falling off
your vehicle. For the secondary latch to work, the spare
must be installed with the valve stem pointing down.
See Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools on page 6-96.
To release the spare tire from the secondary latch:
1. Check under the
vehicle to see if the
cable end fitting
is visible.
{ WARNING:
Before beginning this procedure read all the
instructions. Failure to read and follow the
instructions could damage the hoist assembly
and you and others could get hurt. Read and
follow the instructions listed next.
2. If the cable end fitting is not visible, proceed to
Step 6.
If it is visible, first try to tighten the cable by turning
the wheel wrench clockwise until you hear two clicks
or feel it skip twice. You cannot overtighten the cable.
6-93
3. Loosen the cable by turning the wheel wrench
counterclockwise three or four turns.
4. Repeat this procedure at least two times. If the
spare tire lowers to the ground, continue with
Step 5 under Removing the Spare Tire and Tools
on page 6-81.
5. Turn the wrench counterclockwise until
approximately 6 inches (15 cm) of cable is
exposed.
6. Stand the wheel blocks on their shortest ends,
with the backs facing each other.
7. Place the bottom
edge of the jack (A) on
the wheel blocks (B),
separating them so that
the jack is balanced
securely.
8. Attach the jack handle, extension, and wheel
wrench to the jack and place it (with the wheel
blocks) under the vehicle towards the front of the
rear bumper. Position the center lift point of the
jack under the wheel.
9. Turn the wheel wrench clockwise to raise the jack
until it lifts the tire.
10. Continue raising the jack until the tire stops moving
upward and is held firmly in place.
6-94
{ WARNING:
Someone standing too close during the procedure
could be injured by the jack. If the spare tire does
not slide off the jack completely, make sure no
one is behind you or on either side of you as you
pull the jack out from under the spare.
11. Remove the jack handle and insert the hoist end of
the extension through the hole in the rear bumper.
Turn the wheel wrench counterclockwise one
turn or until the wheel retainer assembly is
disengaged.
13. Disconnect the jack handle from the jack and
carefully remove the jack. Use one hand to push
against the spare while firmly pulling the jack out
from under the spare tire with the other hand.
If the spare tire is hanging from the cable, insert
the hoist end of the extension into the hoist shaft
hole in the bumper and turn the wheel wrench
counterclockwise to lower the spare the rest of
the way.
12. Reinsert the jack handle into the jack. Lower the
jack by turning the wheel wrench counterclockwise.
Keep lowering the jack until the spare tire slides
off the jack or is hanging by the cable.
6-95
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and
Tools
{ WARNING:
Storing a jack, a tire, or other equipment in the
passenger compartment of the vehicle could
cause injury. In a sudden stop or collision, loose
equipment could strike someone. Store all these in
the proper place.
14. Tilt the tire retainer at the end of the cable and pull
it through the wheel opening. Pull the tire out from
under the vehicle.
15. If the cable is hanging under the vehicle, turn the
wheel wrench clockwise to raise the cable.
Have the hoist assembly inspected as soon as you
can. You will not be able to store a spare or flat
tire using the hoist assembly until it has been
replaced.
To continue changing the flat tire, see Removing the
Flat Tire and Installing the Spare Tire on page 6-85.
6-96
Notice: Storing an aluminum wheel with a flat tire
under your vehicle for an extended period of time
or with the valve stem pointing up can damage
the wheel. Always stow the wheel with the valve
stem pointing down and have the wheel/tire repaired
as soon as possible.
Store the tire under the rear of the vehicle in the spare
tire carrier.
1. Put the tire on the ground at the rear of the vehicle
with the valve stem pointed down.
3. Assemble the wheel wrench, the jack handle
extensions, and the jack handle as shown.
2. Tilt the retainer downward and through the center
wheel opening. Make sure the retainer is fully
seated across the underside of the wheel.
6-97
5. Turn the wheel wrench clockwise to raise the tire part
way up. Make sure the retainer is seated in the wheel
opening and the valve stem is pointed down.
Continue raising the tire, watch to make sure it
does not get caught on anything on the underbody.
If the tire does get caught, loosen two or three
turns and push and pull the tire and then retighten.
Repeat this procedure as many times as needed
to ensure proper stowage.
6. When the tire is properly seated to the underbody,
continue turning the wheel wrench clockwise until
you hear two clicks or feel it skip twice. You cannot
overtighten the cable.
4. Insert the chiseled end of the jack handle at a slight
angle through the hole in the rear bumper and into
the funnel-shaped guide.
6-98
To store the jack and wheel blocks:
Regular/Extended Cab
7. Make sure the tire is stored securely. Push, pull (A),
and then try to turn (B) the tire. If the tire moves,
check to make sure the tire valve stem is pointing
down, then use the wheel wrench to loosen
and then tighten the cable.
To store the tools:
1. Return the tools to the storage bag.
2. Attach the storage bag to the floor under the front
passenger seat.
3. Reinstall the wing nut to secure the bag to the
vehicle.
A. Jack
B. Wheel Blocks
C. Wing Nut
1. Install the wheel blocks (B) first.
2. Reinstall the wing nut (C) by turning it clockwise to
secure the wheel blocks to the vehicle.
6-99
3. Lower the jack (A) all the way and insert the jack
into the bracket.
Crew Cab
4. Raise the jack by turning the handle clockwise to
secure the jack within the bracket.
5. Put the cover in position and insert and tighten the
wing nut to secure it.
A. Jack
B. Wheel Blocks
C. Wing Nut
1. Attach the wheel blocks (B) to the jack (A) with the
wheel block retainer and the wing nut (C).
2. Reinstall the jack and wheel block assembly in the
mounting bracket. Be sure to position the holes in
the base of the jack onto the pins in the mounting
bracket.
3. Turn the handle to raise the jack until it is secure,
but do not overtighten the jack in the bracket.
6-100
Spare Tire
Compact Spare Tire
Your vehicle may have a compact spare tire. Although
the compact spare tire was fully inflated when your
vehicle was new, it can lose air over time. Check the
inflation pressure regularly. It should be 60 psi (420 kPa).
Notice: If the vehicle has four-wheel drive and the
compact spare tire is installed on the vehicle, do not
drive in four-wheel drive until you can have the flat
tire repaired and/or replaced. You could damage the
vehicle, and the repair costs would not be covered by
your warranty. Never use four-wheel drive when the
compact spare tire is installed on the vehicle.
After installing the compact spare on your vehicle, you
should stop as soon as possible and make sure your
vehicle’s spare tire is correctly inflated. The compact
spare is made to perform well at speeds up to 62 mph
(100 km/h) for distances up to 500 miles (804 km).
For heavy payloads or towing, and for low traction or
four-wheel-drive conditions, repair or replace the full-size
tire. Of course, it is best to replace your vehicle’s spare
with a full-size tire as soon as you can. The spare tire
will last longer and be in good shape in case you need
it again.
Notice: When the compact spare is installed,
do not take the vehicle through an automatic car
wash with guide rails. The compact spare can
get caught on the rails which can damage the
tire, wheel and other parts of the vehicle.
Do not use your compact spare on other vehicles.
And do not mix your compact spare tire or wheel with
other wheels or tires. They will not fit. Keep your
spare tire and its wheel together.
Notice: Tire chains will not fit the compact spare.
Using them can damage the vehicle and can damage
the chains too. Do not use tire chains on the
compact spare.
Full-Size Spare Tire
Your vehicle may have a full-size spare tire, which,
when new, was fully inflated. A spare tire may lose
air over time, so check its inflation pressure regularly.
See Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 6-64 and Loading
the Vehicle on page 5-33 for information regarding proper
tire inflation and loading your vehicle. For instruction
on how to remove, install, or store a spare tire, see
Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the Spare Tire
on page 6-85 and Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and
Tools on page 6-96.
6-101
Your vehicle may have a different size spare tire
than the road tires originally installed on your vehicle.
This spare was developed for use on your vehicle, so it
is alright to drive on it. If your vehicle has four-wheel
drive and the different size spare tire is installed, keep
the vehicle in two-wheel drive.
Notice: If the vehicle has four-wheel drive and the
different size spare tire is installed on the vehicle, do
not drive in four-wheel drive until you can have your
flat tire repaired and/or replaced. You could damage
the vehicle, and the repair costs would not be
covered by your warranty. Never use four-wheel drive
when the different size spare tire is installed on the
vehicle.
After installing the spare tire on your vehicle, you should
stop as soon as possible and make sure the spare is
correctly inflated. The spare tire is made to perform well
at speeds up to 62 mph (100 km/h) for distances up to
500 miles (804 km). For heavy payloads or towing, and
for low traction or four-wheel-drive conditions, repair or
replace the full-size tire. Have the damaged or flat road
tire repaired or replaced as soon as you can and installed
back onto your vehicle. This way, the spare tire will be
available in case you need it again.
Do not mix tires and wheels of different sizes, because
they will not fit. Keep your spare tire and its wheel
together.
6-102
Appearance Care
Interior Cleaning
The vehicle’s interior will continue to look its best if it is
cleaned often. Although not always visible, dust and
dirt can accumulate on the upholstery. Dirt can damage
carpet, fabric, leather, and plastic surfaces. Regular
vacuuming is recommended to remove particles from the
upholstery. It is important to keep the upholstery from
becoming and remaining heavily soiled. Soils should be
removed as quickly as possible. The vehicle’s interior
may experience extremes of heat that could cause
stains to set rapidly.
Lighter colored interiors may require more frequent
cleaning. Use care because newspapers and garments
that transfer color to home furnishings may also transfer
color to the vehicle’s interior.
When cleaning the vehicle’s interior, only use cleaners
specifically designed for the surfaces being cleaned.
Permanent damage may result from using cleaners on
surfaces for which they were not intended. Use glass
cleaner only on glass. Remove any accidental over-spray
from other surfaces immediately. To prevent over-spray,
apply cleaner directly to the cleaning cloth.
Notice: Using abrasive cleaners when cleaning
glass surfaces on the vehicle, could scratch
the glass and/or cause damage to the rear window
defogger. When cleaning the glass on the vehicle,
use only a soft cloth and glass cleaner.
• Laundry detergents or dishwashing soaps with
Many cleaners contain solvents that may become
concentrated in the vehicle’s breathing space. Before
using cleaners, read and adhere to all safety instructions
on the label. While cleaning the vehicle’s interior,
maintain adequate ventilation by opening the vehicle’s
doors and windows.
• Too much cleaner that saturates the upholstery.
• Organic solvents such as naptha, alcohol, etc. that
Dust may be removed from small buttons and knobs
using a small brush with soft bristles.
Products that remove odors from the vehicle’s
upholstery and clean the vehicle’s glass can be
obtained from your dealer/retailer.
Do not clean the vehicle using:
• A knife or any other sharp object to remove a soil
from any interior surface.
• A stiff brush. It can cause damage to the vehicle’s
interior surfaces.
• Heavy pressure or aggressive rubbing with a
cleaning cloth. Use of heavy pressure can damage
the interior and does not improve the effectiveness
of soil removal.
degreasers can leave residue that streaks and
attracts dirt. For liquid cleaners, about 20 drops
per gallon (3.78 L) of water is a good guide.
Use only mild, neutral-pH soaps.
can damage the vehicle’s interior.
Fabric/Carpet
Use a vacuum cleaner with a soft brush attachment
frequently to remove dust and loose dirt. A canister
vacuum with a beater bar in the nozzle may only
be used on floor carpet and carpeted floor mats.
For any soil, always try to remove it first with plain
water or club soda. Before cleaning, gently remove
as much of the soil as possible using one of the
following techniques:
• For liquids: gently blot the remaining soil with a
paper towel. Allow the soil to absorb into the
paper towel until no more can be removed.
• For solid dry soils: remove as much as possible
and then vacuum.
6-103
To clean:
1. Saturate a lint-free, clean white cloth with water or
club soda.
2. Wring the cloth to remove excess moisture.
3. Start on the outside edge of the soil and gently rub
toward the center. Continue cleaning, using a clean
area of the cloth each time it becomes soiled.
4. Continue to gently rub the soiled area until the
cleaning cloth remains clean.
5. If the soil is not completely removed, use a mild
soap solution and repeat the cleaning process
that was used with plain water.
If any of the soil remains, a commercial fabric cleaner
or spot lifter may be necessary. When a commercial
upholstery cleaner or spot lifter is to be used, test
a small hidden area for colorfastness first. If the
locally cleaned area gives any impression that a
ring formation may result, clean the entire surface.
After the cleaning process has been completed, a paper
towel can be used to blot excess moisture from the
fabric or carpet.
6-104
Leather
A soft cloth dampened with water can be used to remove
dust. If a more thorough cleaning is necessary, a soft
cloth dampened with a mild soap solution can be used.
Allow the leather to dry naturally. Do not use heat to dry.
Never use steam to clean leather. Never use spot lifters
or spot removers on leather. Many commercial leather
cleaners and coatings that are sold to preserve and
protect leather may permanently change the appearance
and feel of the leather and are not recommended. Do not
use silicone or wax-based products, or those containing
organic solvents to clean the vehicle’s interior because
they can alter the appearance by increasing the gloss in a
non-uniform manner. Never use shoe polish on leather.
Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other
Plastic Surfaces
A soft cloth dampened with water may be used to remove
dust. If a more thorough cleaning is necessary, a clean
soft cloth dampened with a mild soap solution can be
used to gently remove dust and dirt. Never use spot
lifters or removers on plastic surfaces. Many commercial
cleaners and coatings that are sold to preserve and
protect soft plastic surfaces may permanently change
the appearance and feel of the interior and are not
recommended. Do not use silicone or wax-based
products, or those containing organic solvents to
clean the vehicle’s interior because they can alter the
appearance by increasing the gloss in a non-uniform
manner.
Some commercial products may increase gloss on the
instrument panel. The increase in gloss may cause
annoying reflections in the windshield and even make
it difficult to see through the windshield under certain
conditions.
Care of Safety Belts
Keep belts clean and dry.
{ WARNING:
Do not bleach or dye safety belts. It may severely
weaken them. In a crash, they might not be able
to provide adequate protection. Clean safety belts
only with mild soap and lukewarm water.
Weatherstrips
Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them last
longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak. Apply
silicone grease with a clean cloth. During very cold,
damp weather frequent application may be required.
See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 7-10.
6-105
Washing Your Vehicle
The best way to preserve the vehicle’s finish is to keep
it clean by washing it often.
Notice: Certain cleaners contain chemicals that can
damage the emblems or nameplates on the vehicle.
Check the cleaning product label. If it states that
it should not be used on plastic parts, do not use it
on the vehicle or damage may occur and it would
not be covered by the warranty.
Do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight. Use a car
washing soap. Do not use cleaning agents that are
petroleum based or that contain acid or abrasives, as
they can damage the paint, metal or plastic on the
vehicle. Approved cleaning products can be obtained
from your dealer/retailer. Follow all manufacturers’
directions regarding correct product usage, necessary
safety precautions and appropriate disposal of any
vehicle care product.
6-106
Rinse the vehicle well, before washing and after to
remove all cleaning agents completely. If they are
allowed to dry on the surface, they could stain.
Dry the finish with a soft, clean chamois or an all-cotton
towel to avoid surface scratches and water spotting.
High pressure car washes may cause water to enter
the vehicle. Avoid using high pressure washes closer
than 12 inches (30 cm) to the surface of the vehicle.
Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi (8 274 kPa)
can result in damage or removal of paint and decals.
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses
Use only lukewarm or cold water, a soft cloth and a
car washing soap to clean exterior lamps and lenses.
Follow instructions under Washing Your Vehicle on
page 6-106.
Finish Care
Protecting Exterior Bright Metal Parts
Occasional waxing or mild polishing of the vehicle
by hand may be necessary to remove residue from
the paint finish. Approved cleaning products can
be obtained from your dealer/retailer.
Bright metal parts should be cleaned regularly to keep
their luster. Washing with water is all that is usually
needed. However, chrome polish may be used on
chrome or stainless steel trim, if necessary.
If the vehicle has a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish, the
clearcoat gives more depth and gloss to the colored
basecoat. Always use waxes and polishes that are
non-abrasive and made for a basecoat/clearcoat
paint finish.
Use special care with aluminum trim. To avoid damaging
protective trim, never use auto or chrome polish, steam or
caustic soap to clean aluminum. A coating of wax, rubbed
to high polish, is recommended for all bright metal parts.
Notice: Machine compounding or aggressive
polishing on a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish
may damage it. Use only non-abrasive waxes and
polishes that are made for a basecoat/clearcoat
paint finish on the vehicle.
Foreign materials such as calcium chloride and other
salts, ice melting agents, road oil and tar, tree sap,
bird droppings, chemicals from industrial chimneys,
etc., can damage the vehicle’s finish if they remain on
painted surfaces. Wash the vehicle as soon as possible.
If necessary, use non-abrasive cleaners that are marked
safe for painted surfaces to remove foreign matter.
Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging, weather
and chemical fallout that can take their toll over a
period of years. To help keep the paint finish looking
new, keep the vehicle garaged or covered whenever
possible.
Windshield and Wiper Blades
Clean the outside of the windshield with glass cleaner.
Clean the rubber blades using a lint free cloth or paper
towel soaked with windshield washer fluid or a mild
detergent. Wash the windshield thoroughly when
cleaning the blades. Bugs, road grime, sap, and a
buildup of vehicle wash/wax treatments may cause
wiper streaking. Replace the wiper blades if they are
worn or damaged.
Wipers can be damaged by:
•
•
•
•
Extreme dusty conditions
Sand and salt
Heat and sun
Snow and ice, without proper removal
6-107
Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels
and Trim
cleaners with acid, or abrasive cleaning brushes on
them because they could damage the surface. Do not
use chrome polish on aluminum wheels.
The vehicle may have either aluminum or chrome-plated
wheels.
Notice: Using chrome polish on aluminum wheels
could damage the wheels. The repairs would not
be covered by the vehicle warranty. Use chrome
polish on chrome wheels only.
Keep the wheels clean using a soft clean cloth with mild
soap and water. Rinse with clean water. After rinsing
thoroughly, dry with a soft clean towel. A wax may then
be applied.
Notice: Chrome wheels and other chrome trim may
be damaged if the vehicle is not washed after driving
on roads that have been sprayed with magnesium,
calcium or sodium chloride. These chlorides are
used on roads for conditions such as ice and dust.
Always wash the vehicle’s chrome with soap and
water after exposure.
Notice: Using strong soaps, chemicals, abrasive
polishes, cleaners, brushes, or cleaners that contain
acid on aluminum or chrome-plated wheels, could
damage the surface of the wheel(s). The repairs
would not be covered by the vehicle warranty.
Use only approved cleaners on aluminum or
chrome-plated wheels.
The surface of these wheels is similar to the painted
surface of the vehicle. Do not use strong soaps,
chemicals, abrasive polishes, abrasive cleaners,
6-108
Use chrome polish only on chrome-plated wheels, but
avoid any painted surface of the wheel, and buff off
immediately after application.
Notice: Driving the vehicle through an automatic car
wash that has silicone carbide tire cleaning brushes,
could damage the aluminum or chrome-plated
wheels. The repairs would not be covered by the
vehicle warranty. Never drive a vehicle that has
aluminum or chrome-plated wheels through an
automatic car wash that uses silicone carbide
tire cleaning brushes.
Tires
To clean the tires, use a stiff brush with tire cleaner.
Notice: Using petroleum-based tire dressing
products on the vehicle may damage the paint finish
and/or tires. When applying a tire dressing, always
wipe off any overspray from all painted surfaces
on the vehicle.
Sheet Metal Damage
Underbody Maintenance
If the vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metal
repair or replacement, make sure the body repair
shop applies anti-corrosion material to parts repaired
or replaced to restore corrosion protection.
Chemicals used for ice and snow removal and dust
control can collect on the underbody. If these are
not removed, corrosion and rust can develop on the
underbody parts such as fuel lines, frame, floor pan,
and exhaust system even though they have corrosion
protection.
Original manufacturer replacement parts will provide
the corrosion protection while maintaining the vehicle
warranty.
Finish Damage
Any stone chips, fractures or deep scratches in the finish
should be repaired right away. Bare metal will corrode
quickly and may develop into major repair expense.
Minor chips and scratches can be repaired with touch-up
materials available from your dealer/retailer. Larger
areas of finish damage can be corrected in your
dealer’s/retailer’s body and paint shop.
At least every spring, flush these materials from the
underbody with plain water. Clean any areas where
mud and debris can collect. Dirt packed in close areas
of the frame should be loosened before being flushed.
Your dealer/retailer or an underbody car washing system
can do this.
Chemical Paint Spotting
Some weather and atmospheric conditions can create a
chemical fallout. Airborne pollutants can fall upon and
attack painted surfaces on the vehicle. This damage
can take two forms: blotchy, ring-shaped discolorations,
and small, irregular dark spots etched into the paint
surface.
Although no defect in the paint job causes this, we
will repair, at no charge to the owner, the surfaces
of new vehicles damaged by this fallout condition within
12 months or 12,000 miles (20 000 km) of purchase,
whichever occurs first.
6-109
Vehicle Identification
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
Engine Identification
The eighth character in the VIN is the engine code.
This code identifies the vehicle’s engine, specifications,
and replacement parts. See “Engine Specifications”
under Capacities and Specifications on page 6-118 for the
vehicle’s engine code.
Service Parts Identification Label
This label, on the inside of the glove box, has the
following information:
This legal identifier is in the front corner of the
instrument panel, on the driver side. It can be seen
through the windshield from outside. The VIN also
appears on the Certification/Tire and Service Parts
labels and certificates of title and registration.
6-110
•
•
•
•
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
Model designation
Paint information
Production options and special equipment
Do not remove this label from the vehicle.
Electrical System
Add-On Electrical Equipment
Notice: Do not add anything electrical to the
vehicle unless you check with your dealer/retailer
first. Some electrical equipment can damage
the vehicle and the damage would not be covered
by the vehicle’s warranty. Some add-on electrical
equipment can keep other components from
working as they should.
Add-on equipment can drain the vehicle battery, even if
the vehicle is not operating.
The vehicle has an airbag system. Before attempting to
add anything electrical to the vehicle, see Servicing Your
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on page 2-79 and Adding
Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on
page 2-80.
Windshield Wiper Fuses
The windshield wiper motor is protected by a circuit
breaker and a fuse. If the motor overheats due to heavy
snow, etc., the wiper will stop until the motor cools.
If the overload is caused by some electrical problem,
have it fixed.
Fuses and Circuit Breakers
The wiring circuits in the vehicle are protected from
short circuits by a combination of fuses and circuit
breakers. This greatly reduces the chance of fires
caused by electrical problems.
Look at the silver-colored band inside the fuse. If the
band is broken or melted, replace the fuse. Be sure
you replace a bad fuse with a new one of the identical
size and rating.
If you ever have a problem on the road and do not have
a spare fuse, you can borrow one that has the same
amperage. Just pick some feature of the vehicle that
you can get along without — like the radio or cigarette
lighter — and use its fuse, if it is the correct amperage.
Replace it as soon as you can.
6-111
Engine Compartment Fuse Block
To remove the cover, push in on the tab on the end of
the cover and lift. To reinstall the cover, line up the
tab and push down on the cover until the tab clicks
into place.
Notice: Spilling liquid on any electrical components
on the vehicle may damage it. Always keep the
covers on any electrical component.
The engine compartment fuse block is located on the
driver side of the engine compartment. See Engine
Compartment Overview on page 6-12 for more
information on location.
6-112
6-113
Fuses
The trailer brake relay is located on the bottom side of
the battery harness.
Fuses
Usage
Usage
ABS 1
ABS 1 (ABS Logic)
ABS 2
ABS 2 (ABS Pump)
AUX PWR 1
Accessory Power 1
AUX PWR 2
Accessory Power 2
BCK/UP
Back-up Lights
BLWR
Climate Control Fan
CLSTR
Cluster
CNSTR VENT
Fuel Canister Vent Solenoid
CRUISE
Cruise Control Switch,
Inside Rearview Mirror,
Transfer Case Control Module,
Brake Switch, Clutch Disable
DR/LCK
Power Door Locks (If Equipped)
DRL
Daylight Running Lamps
Oxygen Sensors, Air Injection
Reactor (AIR) Relay
ERLS
A/C
Air Conditioning Control Head,
Power Seats
Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor,
Can Purge Solenoid, Air Injector
Reactor (AIR) Relay
ETC
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC)
A/C CMPRSR
Air Conditioning Compressor
FOG/LAMP
Fog Lamps (If Equipped)
ABS
Antilock Brake System (ABS),
ABS Module, Four-Wheel Drive,
Gravity Sensor
O2 SNSR
6-114
Fuses
Usage
Fuses
Usage
FRT PRK
LAMP
Front Park/Turn Lamps, Driver and
Passenger Side Power Window
Switches Lighting
REAR PRK
LAMP
Rear Parking Lamp 1, Passenger
Side Taillamp, License Plate Lamps
FRT/AXLE
Front Axle Actuator
FSCM
Fuel System Control Module
REAR PRK
LAMP2
Driver Side Rear Taillamp,
Passenger Side Airbag Indicator
Lighting, Instrument Panel Dimming
Power (2WD/4WD switch lighting)
BACKUP LAMP Backup Lamp
RT HDLP
Passenger Side Headlamp
HORN
Horn
RVC
Regulated Voltage Control
HTD/SEAT
Heated Seat (If Equipped)
S/ROOF
Sunroof (If Equipped)
STOP
Stop Lamps
IGN
Ignition, Clutch Starter Switch,
Neutral Safety Back-Up Switch,
Ignition Coils 1-5, Air Conditioning
Relay
STRTR
Starter Solenoid Relay
TBC
Truck Body Controller
INJ
Injectors
TCM
Transmission Control Module
LT HDLP
Driver Side Headlamp
TCCM
Transfer Case Control Module
PCM B
Power Control Module (PCM) B
PCMI
Power Control Module (PCM)
TRAILER
BRAKE
Trailer Brake
PWR/SEAT
Power Seat Circuit Breaker
(If Equipped)
TRANS
Transmission Solenoid
PWR/WNDW
Power Windows (If Equipped)
TRN/HAZRD
FRT
Turn/Hazard/Courtesy/Cargo
Lamps/Mirrors
RDO
Radio
TRN/HAZRD
REAR
Rear Turn/Hazard Lights
6-115
Fuses
Usage
VSES/STOP
Vehicle Stability Enhancement
System/STOP
WPR
Wiper
WSW
Wiper/Washer Switch
Relays
Usage
Relays
Usage
RAP
Retained Accessory Power
(Power Window Fuse,
Wiper/Washer Switch Fuse),
Sunroof Fuse
RUN/CRNK
Run/Crank, Airbag System Fuse,
Cruise Control Fuse, Ignition Fuse,
Back-Up Lamps, ABS Fuse, Front
Axle, PCM-1, Injectors Fuse,
Transmission Fuse, ERLS
STRTR
Starter Relay (PCM Relay)
VSES
Vehicle Stability Enhancement
System
WPR
Wipers (On/Off)
WPR 2
Wiper 2 (High/Low)
A/C CMPRSR
Air Conditioning Compressor
BEAM SEL
Beam Selection
DRL
Daylight Running Lamps
FOG/LAMP
Fog Lamps (If Equipped)
BK UP LP
Back Up Lamp
HDLP
Headlamps
HORN
Horn
Miscellaneous
IGN 3 HVAC
Ignition 3, Climate Control,
Climate Control Head Fuse,
Power Seat Fuse
A/C CLTCH
Diode — Air Conditioning, Clutch
MEGA FUSE
Mega Fuse
PRK/LAMP
Front Parking Lamp Fuse,
Rear Parking Lamps
WPR
Diode — Wiper
PWR/TRN
Powertrain, Electronic Throttle
Control Fuse, Oxygen Sensor Fuse
6-116
Usage
5.3L
2.9L and 3.7L
Fuses
Usage
A
Trailer Park Lamp
B
Communication Interface Module
C
Supplemental Inflatable Restraint
System, Sensing and Diagnostic
Module
D
Trailer Auxiliary Maxi-Fuse
6-117
Capacities and Specifications
The following approximate conversion capacities are given in English and metric conversions. See Recommended
Fluids and Lubricants on page 7-10 for more information.
Capacities and Specifications
Capacities
Application
Air Conditioning Refrigerant R134a
Metric
English
For the air conditioning system refrigerant charge
amount, see the refrigerant caution label located
under the hood. See your dealer/retailer for more
information.
Cooling System
2.9L L4 Engine
9.8 L
10.4 qt
3.7L L5 Engine
10.0 L
10.6 qt
5.3L V8 Engine
13.0 L
13.7 qt
2.9L L4 Engine
4.7 L
5.0 qt
3.7L L5 Engine
5.7 L
6.0 qt
5.3L V8 Engine
5.7 L
6.0 qt
74 L
19.5 gal
Engine Oil with Filter
Fuel Tank
6-118
Capacities and Specifications (cont’d)
Capacities
Application
Metric
English
Automatic (Pan Removal and Filter Replacement)
4.7 L
5.0 qt
Manual – Rear-Wheel Drive (Drain and Refill)
2.2 L
2.3 qt
Manual – Four-Wheel Drive (Drain and Refill)
2.3 L
2.4 qt
140 Y
100 lb ft
Transmission
Wheel Nut Torque
All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level, as recommended in this
manual. Recheck fluid level after filling.
Engine Specifications
Type
VIN Code
Transmission
Spark Plug Gap
2.9L L4
9
Automatic
Manual
1.01 mm (0.040 in)
3.7L L5
E
Automatic
1.01 mm (0.040 in)
5.3L V8
P
Automatic
1.01 mm (0.040 in)
6-119
✍ NOTES
6-120
Section 7
Maintenance Schedule
Maintenance Schedule ......................................7-2
Introduction ...................................................7-2
Scheduled Maintenance ...................................7-3
Owner Checks and Services ............................7-8
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ...............7-10
Maintenance Replacement Parts .....................7-12
Engine Drive Belt Routing ..............................7-13
Maintenance Record .....................................7-14
7-1
Maintenance Schedule
Introduction
Notice: Maintenance intervals, checks, inspections,
recommended fluids, and lubricants are necessary to
keep this vehicle in good working condition. Damage
caused by failure to follow scheduled maintenance
might not be covered by the vehicle warranty.
Proper vehicle maintenance helps to keep the vehicle in
good working condition, improves fuel economy, and
reduces vehicle emissions for better air quality.
Because of all the different ways people use vehicles,
maintenance needs vary. The vehicle might need
more frequent checks and services. Please read the
information under Scheduled Maintenance. To keep
the vehicle in good condition, see your dealer/retailer.
The maintenance schedule is for vehicles that:
• carry passengers and cargo within recommended
limits on the Tire and Loading Information label.
See Loading the Vehicle on page 5-33.
• are driven on reasonable road surfaces within legal
driving limits.
• are driven off-road in the recommended manner.
See Off-Road Driving on page 5-13.
• use the recommended fuel. See Gasoline Octane
on page 6-5.
7-2
{ WARNING:
Performing maintenance work on a vehicle can be
dangerous. In trying to do some jobs, you can be
seriously injured. Do your own maintenance work
only if you have the required know-how and the
proper tools and equipment for the job. If you have
any doubt, see your dealer/retailer to have a
qualified technician do the work. See Doing Your
Own Service Work on page 6-4.
At your General Motors dealer/retailer, you can be
certain that you will receive the highest level of service
available. Your dealer/retailer has specially trained
service technicians, uses genuine GM replacement
parts, as well as, up to date tools and equipment
to ensure fast and accurate diagnostics.
The proper replacement parts, fluids, and lubricants to
use are listed in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
on page 7-10 and Maintenance Replacement Parts on
page 7-12. We recommend the use of genuine parts from
your dealer/retailer.
Rotation of New Tires
To maintain ride, handling, and performance of
the vehicle, it is important that the first rotation
service for new tires be performed when they
have 8 000 to 13 000 km (5,000 to 8,000 miles).
See Tire Inspection and Rotation on page 6-71.
When the Change Oil message displays, certain
services, checks, and inspections are required.
The services described for Maintenance I should be
performed at every engine oil change. The services
described for Maintenance II should be performed when:
• Maintenance I was performed the last time the
engine oil was changed.
Scheduled Maintenance
When the Change Oil Message
Displays
• It has been 10 months or more since the Change
Oil message has displayed or since the last
service.
Maintenance I
Change engine oil and filter. See Engine Oil on
page 6-15. An Emission Control Service.
• Change engine oil and filter. See Engine Oil on
When the Change Oil message displays, service is
required for the vehicle as soon as possible, within the
next 1 000 km/600 miles. If driving under the best
conditions, the engine oil life system might not indicate
the need for vehicle service for more than a year.
The engine oil and filter must be changed at least
once a year and the oil life system must be reset. Your
dealer/retailer has trained service technicians who will
perform this work and reset the system. If the engine oil
life system is reset accidentally, service the vehicle within
5 000 km/3,000 miles since the last service. Reset the oil
life system whenever the oil is changed. See Engine Oil
Life System on page 6-18.
• Engine coolant level check. See Engine Coolant on
page 6-15. An Emission Control Service.
page 6-29.
• Windshield washer fluid level check. See Windshield
Washer Fluid on page 6-38.
• Tire inflation check. See Inflation - Tire Pressure on
page 6-64.
• Tire wear inspection. See Tire Inspection and
Rotation on page 6-71.
• Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 6-71.
7-3
• Fluids visual leak check (or every 12 months,
whichever occurs first). A leak in any system must
be repaired and the fluid level checked.
• Engine air cleaner filter inspection (vehicles driven
in dusty conditions only). See Engine Air Cleaner/
Filter on page 6-20.
• Brake system inspection (or every 12 months,
whichever occurs first).
Maintenance II
• Perform all services described in Maintenance I.
• Steering and suspension inspection. Visual
inspection for damaged, loose, or missing parts
or signs of wear.
• Engine cooling system inspection. Visual inspection
of hoses, pipes, fittings, and clamps and
replacement, if needed.
• Windshield wiper blade inspection for wear, cracking,
or contamination and windshield and wiper blade
cleaning, if contaminated. See Windshield and Wiper
Blades on page 6-107. Worn or damaged wiper
blade replacement. See Windshield Wiper Blade
Replacement on page 6-55.
7-4
• Body hinges and latches, key lock cylinders, and
folding seat hardware lubrication. Lubricate hood
safety lever pivot and prop rod pivot and tailgate
latch bolt, handle assembly pivot points, and hinges.
See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on
page 7-10. More frequent lubrication may be required
when vehicle is exposed to a corrosive environment.
Applying silicone grease on weatherstrips with a
clean cloth makes them last longer, seal better, and
not stick or squeak.
• Restraint system component check. See Checking
the Restraint Systems on page 2-81.
• Automatic transmission fluid level check and adding
fluid, if needed. See Automatic Transmission Fluid
on page 6-21.
• Four-wheel drive vehicles: Transfer case fluid level
check and adding fluid, if needed.
• Engine air cleaner filter inspection. See Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter on page 6-20.
Additional Required Services
At Each Fuel Stop
• Engine oil level check. See Engine Oil on page 6-15.
• Engine coolant level check. See Engine Coolant on
page 6-29.
• Windshield washer fluid level check. See Windshield
Washer Fluid on page 6-38.
Once a Month
• Tire inflation check. See Inflation - Tire Pressure on
page 6-64.
• Tire wear inspection. See Tire Inspection and
Rotation on page 6-71.
Once a Year
• Starter switch check. See Owner Checks and
• Automatic transmission shiftlock control system
check. See Owner Checks and Services on
page 7-8.
• Ignition transmission lock check. See Owner
Checks and Services on page 7-8.
• Engine cooling system and pressure cap pressure
check. Radiator and air conditioning condenser
outside cleaning. See Cooling System on page 6-27.
• Exhaust system and nearby heat shields inspection
for loose or damaged components.
• Accelerator pedal check for damage, high effort, or
binding. Replace if needed.
First Engine Oil Change After Every
40 000 km/25,000 Miles
• Fuel system inspection for damage or leaks.
Services on page 7-8.
• Parking brake and automatic transmission P (Park)
mechanism check. See Owner Checks and
Services on page 7-8.
7-5
First Engine Oil Change After Every
80 000 km/50,000 Miles
• Engine air cleaner filter replacement. See Engine
Air Cleaner/Filter on page 6-20.
• Automatic transmission fluid change (severe
service) for vehicles mainly driven in heavy
city traffic in hot weather, in hilly or mountainous
terrain, when frequently towing a trailer, or used for
taxi, police, or delivery service. See Automatic
Transmission Fluid on page 6-21.
First Engine Oil Change After Every
160 000 km/100,000 Miles
• Automatic transmission fluid change (normal
service). See Automatic Transmission Fluid
on page 6-21.
• Spark plug replacement. An Emission Control
Service.
7-6
First Engine Oil Change After Every
240 000 km/150,000 Miles
• Engine cooling system drain, flush, and refill,
cooling system and cap pressure check, and
cleaning of outside of radiator and air conditioning
condenser (or every 5 years, whichever occurs
first). See Engine Coolant on page 6-29. An
Emission Control Service.
• Engine accessory drive belt inspection for fraying,
excessive cracks, or obvious damage and
replacement, if needed. An Emission Control
Service.
Scheduled Maintenance
Service
Maintenance I
Maintenance II
Change engine oil and filter. Reset oil life system.
•
•
Engine coolant level check.
•
•
Windshield washer fluid level check.
•
•
Tire inflation pressures check.
•
•
Tire wear inspection.
•
•
Rotate tires.
•
•
Fluids visual leak check.
•
•
Engine air cleaner filter inspection (vehicles driven in dusty conditions only).
•
•
Brake system inspection.
•
•
Steering and suspension inspection.
•
Engine cooling system inspection.
•
Windshield wiper blades inspection.
•
Body components lubrication.
•
Restraint system components check.
•
Automatic transmission fluid level check.
•
Four-wheel drive only: Transfer case fluid level check.
•
Engine air cleaner filter inspection (vehicles not driven in dusty conditions).
•
7-7
Owner Checks and Services
Starter Switch Check
{ WARNING:
When you are doing this inspection, the vehicle
could move suddenly. If the vehicle moves, you or
others could be injured.
1. Before starting this check, be sure there is enough
room around the vehicle.
2. Firmly apply both the parking brake and the regular
brake. See Parking Brake on page 3-30.
Do not use the accelerator pedal, and be ready to
turn off the engine immediately if it starts.
3. For automatic transmission vehicles, try to start the
engine in each gear. The starter should work only
in P (Park) or N (Neutral). If the starter works in any
other position, your vehicle needs service.
7-8
For manual transmission vehicles, put the shift lever
in Neutral, push the clutch pedal down halfway, and
try to start the engine. The starter should work only
when the clutch pedal is pushed down all the way to
the floor. If the starter works when the clutch pedal is
not pushed all the way down, your vehicle needs
service.
Automatic Transmission Shift Lock
Control System Check
{ WARNING:
When you are doing this inspection, the vehicle
could move suddenly. If the vehicle moves, you or
others could be injured.
1. Before starting this check, be sure there is enough
room around the vehicle. It should be parked on a
level surface.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake. See Parking Brake
on page 3-30.
Be ready to apply the regular brake immediately if
the vehicle begins to move.
3. With the engine off, turn the ignition to ON/RUN,
but do not start the engine. Without applying the
regular brake, try to move the shift lever out
of P (Park) with normal effort. If the shift lever
moves out of P (Park), contact your dealer/retailer
for service.
Ignition Transmission Lock Check
While parked, and with the parking brake set, try to turn
the ignition to LOCK/OFF in each shift lever position.
• For automatic transmission vehicles, the ignition
should turn to LOCK/OFF only when the shift
lever is in P (Park). The ignition key should come
out only in LOCK/OFF.
• For manual transmission vehicles, the ignition
should turn to LOCK/OFF only when you press the
key release button.
On all vehicles, the ignition key should come out only in
LOCK/OFF.
Turn the steering wheel to the left and to the right.
It should only lock when turned to the right.
Contact your dealer/retailer if service is required.
Parking Brake and Automatic
Transmission P (Park) Mechanism
Check
{ WARNING:
When you are doing this check, the vehicle could
begin to move. You or others could be injured and
property could be damaged. Make sure there is
room in front of the vehicle in case it begins to roll.
Be ready to apply the regular brake at once should
the vehicle begin to move.
Park on a fairly steep hill, with the vehicle facing
downhill. Keeping your foot on the regular brake, set the
parking brake.
• To check the parking brake’s holding ability: With the
engine running and the transmission in N (Neutral),
slowly remove foot pressure from the regular brake
pedal. Do this until the vehicle is held by the parking
brake only.
• To check the P (Park) mechanism’s holding ability:
With the engine running, shift to P (Park). Then
release the parking brake followed by the regular
brake.
Contact your dealer/retailer if service is required.
7-9
Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants
Fluids and lubricants identified below by name, part
number, or specification can be obtained from your
dealer/retailer.
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
Engine oil which meets GM
Standard GM6094M and displays
the American Petroleum Institute
Engine Oil
Certified for Gasoline Engines
starburst symbol. To determine the
proper viscosity for your vehicle’s
engine, see Engine Oil on page 6-15.
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable
®
Engine Coolant water and use only DEX-COOL
Coolant. See Engine Coolant on
page 6-29.
3 Hydraulic Brake Fluid
Hydraulic Brake DOT
(GM Part No. U.S. 12377967,
System
in Canada 89021320).
Windshield
Optikleen® Washer Solvent.
Washer
7-10
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
Chassis Lubricant
(GM Part No. U.S. 12377985,
Parking Brake in Canada 88901242) or lubricant
Cable Guides meeting requirements of NLGI #2,
Category LB or GC-LB.
Power Steering GM Power Steering Fluid
(GM Part No. U.S. 89021184,
System
in Canada 89021186).
Automatic
DEXRON®-VI Automatic
Transmission Transmission Fluid.
Manual Transmission Fluid
Manual
Part No. U.S. 89021806,
Transmission (GM
in Canada 89021807).
Hydraulic Clutch Fluid
Hydraulic
(GM Part No. U.S. 12345347,
Clutch System in Canada 10953517) or equivalent
DOT-3 brake fluid.
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
Key Lock
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,
Cylinders
in Canada 10953474).
Chassis Lubricant
(GM Part No. U.S. 12377985,
Chassis
in Canada 88901242) or lubricant
Lubrication
meeting requirements of NLGI #2,
Category LB or GC-LB.
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
SAE 75W-90 Synthetic
Axle Lubricant
Front and
(GM Part No. U.S. 89021677,
Rear Axle
in Canada 89021678) meeting
GM Specification 9986115.
Synchromesh Transmission Fluid
Transfer Case (GM Part No. U.S. 12345349,
in Canada 10953465).
Lubricant
Rear Driveline Chassis
Part No. U.S. 12377985,
Center Spline (GM
Canada 88901242) or lubricant
and Universal in
meeting requirements of NLGI #2,
Joints
Category LB or GC-LB.
Chassis Lubricant
Constant
(GM Part No. U.S. 12377985,
Velocity
in Canada 88901242) or lubricant
Universal Joint meeting requirements of NLGI #2,
Category LB or GC-LB.
Hood Latch
Assembly,
Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol
Secondary
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346293,
Latch, Pivots, in Canada 992723) or lubricant
Spring
meeting requirements of NLGI #2,
Anchor, and
Category LB or GC-LB.
Release Pawl
Usage
Hood and Door
Hinges, Body
Door Hinge
Pins, Liftgate
Hinge and
Linkage,
Folding Seats,
and Fuel Door
Hinge
Outer Tailgate
Handle Pivot
Points and
Hinges
Weatherstrip
Conditioning
Weatherstrip
Squeaks
Fluid/Lubricant
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,
in Canada 10953474).
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,
in Canada 10953474).
Weatherstrip Lubricant
(GM Part No. U.S. 3634770,
in Canada 10953518) or
Dielectric Silicone Grease
(GM Part No. U.S. 12345579,
in Canada 992887).
Synthetic Grease
with Teflon, Superlube
(GM Part No. U.S. 12371287,
in Canada 10953437).
7-11
Maintenance Replacement Parts
Replacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer/retailer.
Part
GM Part Number
ACDelco Part Number
15942429
—
2.9L L4 Engine
19210283
PF46
3.7L L5 Engine
19210285
PF61
5.3L V8 Engine
89017524
PF48
2.9L L4 and 3.7L L5 Engines
12625058
41-103
5.3L V8 Engine
12609877
41-985
Driver Side — 22 in (55 cm)
10389562
—
Passenger Side — 19 in (48 cm)
10389563
—
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
Engine Oil Filter
Spark Plugs
Wiper Blades
7-12
Engine Drive Belt Routing
5.3L Engine
2.9L and 3.7L Engines
7-13
Maintenance Record
After the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service, and the
type of services performed in the boxes provided. Retain all maintenance receipts.
Maintenance Record
Date
7-14
Odometer
Reading
Serviced By
Services Performed
Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Date
Odometer
Reading
Serviced By
Services Performed
7-15
Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Date
7-16
Odometer
Reading
Serviced By
Services Performed
Section 8
Customer Assistance Information
Customer Assistance and Information ...............8-2
Customer Satisfaction Procedure ......................8-2
Online Owner Center ......................................8-5
Customer Assistance for
Text Telephone (TTY) Users .........................8-6
Customer Assistance Offices ............................8-6
GM Mobility Reimbursement Program ................8-7
Roadside Assistance Program ..........................8-7
Scheduling Service Appointments ....................8-10
Courtesy Transportation Program ....................8-10
Collision Damage Repair ................................8-11
Reporting Safety Defects ................................8-14
Reporting Safety Defects to the
United States Government ..........................8-14
Reporting Safety Defects to the
Canadian Government ................................8-15
Reporting Safety Defects to General Motors .....8-15
Service Publications Ordering Information .........8-15
Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy ................8-16
Event Data Recorders ...................................8-17
OnStar® ......................................................8-18
Radio Frequency Identification (RFID) ..............8-18
Radio Frequency Statement ...........................8-18
8-1
Customer Assistance and
Information
Customer Satisfaction Procedure
Your satisfaction and goodwill are important to your
dealer and to GMC. Normally, any concerns with the
sales transaction or the operation of the vehicle will be
resolved by the dealer’s sales or service departments.
Sometimes, however, despite the best intentions of all
concerned, misunderstandings can occur. If your concern
has not been resolved to your satisfaction, the following
steps should be taken:
STEP ONE: Discuss your concern with a member of
dealership management. Normally, concerns can be
quickly resolved at that level. If the matter has already
been reviewed with the sales, service or parts manager,
contact the owner of the dealership or the general
manager.
8-2
STEP TWO: If after contacting a member of dealership
management, it appears your concern cannot be
resolved by the dealership without further help, in the
U.S., call the GMC Consumer Relations Manager at
1-800-GMC-8782 (1-800-462-8782, Customer
Assistance prompt). In Canada, call General Motors of
Canada Customer Communication at 1-800-263-3777
(English) or 1-800-263-7854 (French).
We encourage you to call the toll-free number in order to
give your inquiry prompt attention. Have the following
information available to give the Customer Assistance
Representative:
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). This is available
from the vehicle registration or title, or the plate at the
top left of the instrument panel and visible through
the windshield.
• Dealership name and location.
• Vehicle delivery date and present mileage.
When contacting GMC, remember that your concern will
likely be resolved at a dealer’s facility. That is why we
suggest following Step One first.
STEP THREE — U.S. Owners: Both General Motors
and your dealer are committed to making sure you
are completely satisfied with your new vehicle. However,
if you continue to remain unsatisfied after following
the procedure outlined in Steps One and Two, you can
file with the Better Business Bureau (BBB) Auto Line
Program to enforce your rights.
The BBB Auto Line Program is an out of court program
administered by the Council of Better Business Bureaus
to settle automotive disputes regarding vehicle repairs or
the interpretation of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Although you may be required to resort to this informal
dispute resolution program prior to filling out a court
action, use of the program is free of charge and your case
will generally be heard within 40 days. If you do not agree
with the decision given in your case, you may reject it and
proceed with any other venue for relief available to you.
You may contact the BBB Auto Line Program using the
toll-free telephone number or write them at the following
address:
BBB Auto Line Program
Council of Better Business Bureaus, Inc.
4200 Wilson Boulevard
Suite 800
Arlington, VA 22203-1838
Telephone: 1-800-955-5100
dr.bbb.org/goauto
This program is available in all 50 states and the District
of Columbia. Eligibility is limited by vehicle age,
mileage, and other factors. General Motors reserves the
right to change eligibility limitations and/or discontinue
its participation in this program.
8-3
STEP THREE — Canadian Owners: In the event that
you do not feel your concerns have been addressed after
following the procedure outlined in Steps One and Two,
General Motors of Canada Limited wants you to be aware
of its participation in a no-charge Mediation/Arbitration
Program. General Motors of Canada Limited has
committed to binding arbitration of owner disputes
involving factory-related vehicle service claims.
The program provides for the review of the facts
involved by an impartial third party arbiter, and
may include an informal hearing before the arbiter.
The program is designed so that the entire dispute
settlement process, from the time you file your
complaint to the final decision, should be completed
in approximately 70 days. We believe our impartial
program offers advantages over courts in most
jurisdictions because it is informal, quick, and
free of charge.
8-4
For further information concerning eligibility in the
Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP), call
toll-free 1-800-207-0685, or call the General Motors
Customer Communication Centre, 1-800-263-3777
(English), 1-800-263-7854 (French), or write to:
Mediation/Arbitration Program
c/o Customer Communication Centre
General Motors of Canada Limited
Mail Code: CA1-163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
Telephone: 1-800-955-5100
Your inquiry should be accompanied by the Vehicle
Identification Number (VIN).
Online Owner Center
My GM Canada (Canada) — www.gm.ca
Online Owner Center (U.S.) —
www.gmownercenter.com/gmc
My GM Canada is a password-protected section of
www.gm.ca where you can save information on
GM vehicles, get personalized offers, and use handy
tools and forms with greater ease.
Information and services customized for your specific
vehicle — all in one convenient place.
• Digital owner manual, warranty information,
and more
•
•
•
•
•
Online service and maintenance records
Find GMC dealers for service nationwide
Exclusive privileges and offers
Recall notices for your specific vehicle
®
OnStar and GM Cardmember Services Earnings
summaries
Other Helpful Links:
GMC — www.gmc.com
GMC Merchandise — www.gmccollection.com
Here are a few of the valuable tools and services you
will have access to:
• My Showroom: Find and save information on
vehicles and current offers in your area.
• My Dealers/Retailers: Save details such as address
and phone number for each of your preferred GM
dealers/retailers.
• My Driveway: Access quick links to parts and
service estimates, check trade-in values, or
schedule a service appointment by adding the
vehicles you own to your driveway profile.
• My Preferences: Manage your profile and use tools
and forms with greater ease.
To sign up, visit the My GM Canada section within
www.gm.ca.
Help Center — www.gmc.com/helpcenter
• FAQ
• Contact Us
8-5
Customer Assistance for Text
Telephone (TTY) Users
To assist customers who are deaf, hard of hearing, or
speech-impaired and who use the Text Telephones
(TTYs), GMC has TTY equipment available at its
Customer Assistance Center. Any TTY user can
communicate with GMC by dialing: 1-800-GMC-8583
(462-8583). (TTY users in Canada can dial
1-800-263-3830.)
Customer Assistance Offices
GMC encourages customers to call the toll-free number
for assistance. However, if a customer wishes to
write or e-mail GMC, the letter should be addressed to:
United States
GMC Customer Assistance Center
P.O. Box 33172
Detroit, MI 48232-5172
www.GMC.com
1-800-GMC-8782 (462-8782)
1-800-GMC-8583 (462-8583) (For Text Telephone
devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-GMC-8782 (462-8782)
8-6
From Puerto Rico
1-800-496-9992 (English)
1-800-496-9993 (Spanish)
U.S. Virgin Islands:
1-800-496-9994
Canada
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, CA1-163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
www.gmcanada.com
1-800-263-3777 (English)
1-800-263-7854 (French)
1-800-263-3830 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-268-6800
All Overseas Locations
Please contact the local General Motors Business Unit.
Mexico, Central America and
Caribbean Islands/Countries (Except
Puerto Rico and U.S. Virgin Islands)
General Motors de Mexico, S. de R.L. de C.V.
Customer Assistance Center
Paseo de la Reforma # 2740
Col. Lomas de Bezares
C.P. 11910, Mexico, D.F.
01-800-508-0000
Long Distance: 011-52-53 29 0 800
GM Mobility Reimbursement
Program
Roadside Assistance Program
For U.S. purchased vehicles, call 1-800-GMC-8782
(1-800-462-8782); (Text telephone (TTY):
1-888-889-2438).
For Canadian purchased vehicles, call 1-800-268-6800.
Service is available 24 hours a day, 365 days a year.
Calling for Assistance
When calling Roadside Assistance, have the following
information ready:
This program, available to qualified applicants, can
reimburse you up to $1,000 of the cost of eligible
aftermarket adaptive equipment required for your vehicle,
such as hand controls or a wheelchair/scooter lift.
The offer is available for a very limited period of time
from the date of vehicle purchase/lease. For more
details, or to determine your vehicle’s eligibility, visit
gmmobility.com or call the GM Mobility Assistance
Center at 1-800-323-9935. Text telephone (TTY) users,
call 1-800-833-9935.
General Motors of Canada also has a Mobility Program.
Call 1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483) for details. TTY users
call 1-800-263-3830.
• Your name, home address, and home telephone
number
• Telephone number of your location
• Location of the vehicle
• Model, year, color, and license plate number of the
vehicle
• Odometer reading, Vehicle Identification Number
(VIN), and delivery date of the vehicle
• Description of the problem
8-7
Coverage
Services are provided up to 5 years/100,000 miles
(160 000 km), whichever comes first.
In the U.S., anyone driving the vehicle is covered.
In Canada, a person driving the vehicle without
permission from the owner is not covered.
Roadside Assistance is not a part of the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. GMC and General Motors of Canada
Limited reserve the right to make any changes or
discontinue the Roadside Assistance program at any
time without notification.
GMC and General Motors of Canada Limited reserve
the right to limit services or payment to an owner
or driver if they decide the claims are made too often,
or the same type of claim is made many times.
Services Provided
• Emergency Fuel Delivery: Delivery of enough fuel
for the vehicle to get to the nearest service station.
• Lock-Out Service: Service is provided to unlock the
vehicle if you are locked out. A remote unlock may
be available if you have OnStar®. For security
reasons, the driver must present identification
before this service is given.
8-8
• Emergency Tow From a Public Road or
Highway: Tow to the nearest GMC dealer for
warranty service, or if the vehicle was in a crash
and cannot be driven. Assistance is also given when
the vehicle is stuck in the sand, mud, or snow.
• Flat Tire Change: Service is provided to change a
flat tire with the spare tire. The spare tire, if equipped,
must be in good condition and properly inflated.
It is the owner’s responsibility for the repair or
replacement of the tire if it is not covered by the
warranty.
• Battery Jump Start: Service is provided to jump
start a dead battery.
• Trip Routing Service: Detailed maps of North
America are provided when requested either with
the most direct route or the most scenic route.
Additional travel information is also available.
Allow three weeks for delivery.
• Trip Interruption Benefits and Assistance: If your
trip is interrupted due to a warranty failure, incidental
expenses may be reimbursed during the 5 years/
100,000 miles (160 000 km) Powertrain warranty
period. Items considered are hotel, meals, and
rental car.
Services Not Included in Roadside
Assistance
• Impound towing caused by violation of any laws.
• Legal fines.
• Mounting, dismounting or changing of snow tires,
chains, or other traction devices.
• Towing or services for vehicles driven on a
non-public road or highway.
Services Specific to Canadian
Purchased Vehicles
• Fuel delivery: Reimbursement is approximately
$5 Canadian. Diesel fuel delivery may be
restricted. Propane and other fuels are not provided
through this service.
• Trip Interruption Benefits and Assistance: Must
be over 250 kilometres from where your trip was
started to qualify. General Motors of Canada Limited
requires pre-authorization, original detailed receipts,
and a copy of the repair orders. Once authorization
has been received, the Roadside Assistance advisor
will help you make arrangements and explain how to
receive payment.
• Alternative Service: If assistance cannot be
provided right away, the Roadside Assistance
advisor may give you permission to get local
emergency road service. You will receive payment,
up to $100, after sending the original receipt to
Roadside Assistance. Mechanical failures may be
covered, however any cost for parts and labor for
repairs not covered by the warranty are the owner
responsibility.
• Lock-Out Service: Vehicle registration is required.
• Trip Routing Service: Limit of six requests
per year.
8-9
Scheduling Service Appointments
Courtesy Transportation is not a part of the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. A separate booklet entitled “Warranty
and Owner Assistance Information” furnished with
each new vehicle provides detailed warranty coverage
information.
When your vehicle requires warranty service, contact
your dealer/retailer and request an appointment.
By scheduling a service appointment and advising your
service consultant of your transportation needs, your
dealer/retailer can help minimize your inconvenience.
Transportation Options
If your vehicle cannot be scheduled into the service
department immediately, keep driving it until it can be
scheduled for service, unless, of course, the problem is
safety-related. If it is, please call your dealership/retailer,
let them know this, and ask for instructions.
Warranty service can generally be completed while you
wait. However, if you are unable to wait, GM helps
to minimize your inconvenience by providing several
transportation options. Depending on the circumstances,
your dealer can offer you one of the following:
If the dealer/retailer requests you to bring the vehicle for
service, you are urged to do so as early in the work
day as possible to allow for the same day repair.
Shuttle Service
Courtesy Transportation Program
To enhance your ownership experience, we and
our participating dealers are proud to offer Courtesy
Transportation, a customer support program for vehicles
with the New Vehicle Limited Warranty (Base Warranty
Coverage period in Canada) and extended powertrain,
and hybrid specific warranty in both the U.S. and
Canada.
Several courtesy transportation options are available to
assist in reducing your inconvenience when warranty
repairs are required.
8-10
Shuttle service is the preferred means of offering
Courtesy Transportation. Dealers may provide you
with shuttle service to get you to your destination with
minimal interruption of your daily schedule. This includes
one-way or round trip shuttle service within reasonable
time and distance parameters of the dealer’s area.
Public Transportation or Fuel
Reimbursement
If your vehicle requires overnight warranty repairs,
and public transportation is used instead of the
dealer’s shuttle service, the expense must be
supported by original receipts and can only be
up to the maximum amount allowed by GM for
shuttle service.
In addition, for U.S. customers, should you arrange
transportation through a friend or relative, limited
reimbursement for reasonable fuel expenses may be
available. Claim amounts should reflect actual costs
and be supported by original receipts. See your dealer
for information regarding the allowance amounts for
reimbursement of fuel or other transportation costs.
Additional Program Information
Courtesy Rental Vehicle
General Motors reserves the right to unilaterally modify,
change or discontinue Courtesy Transportation at
any time and to resolve all questions of claim eligibility
pursuant to the terms and conditions described
herein at its sole discretion.
Your dealer may arrange to provide you with a courtesy
rental vehicle or reimburse you for a rental vehicle that
you obtain if your vehicle is kept for an overnight warranty
repair. Rental reimbursement will be limited and must
be supported by original receipts. This requires that you
sign and complete a rental agreement and meet state/
provincial, local, and rental vehicle provider requirements.
Requirements vary and may include minimum age
requirements, insurance coverage, credit card, etc.
You are responsible for fuel usage charges and may also
be responsible for taxes, levies, usage fees, excessive
mileage, or rental usage beyond the completion of the
repair.
All program options, such as shuttle service, may not be
available at every dealer. Please contact your dealer
for specific information about availability. All Courtesy
Transportation arrangements will be administered
by appropriate dealer personnel.
Collision Damage Repair
If your vehicle is involved in a collision and it is
damaged, have the damage repaired by a qualified
technician using the proper equipment and quality
replacement parts. Poorly performed collision repairs
diminish your vehicle’s resale value, and safety
performance can be compromised in subsequent
collisions.
It may not be possible to provide a like-vehicle as a
courtesy rental.
8-11
Collision Parts
Repair Facility
Genuine GM Collision parts are new parts made with the
same materials and construction methods as the parts
with which your vehicle was originally built. Genuine GM
Collision parts are your best choice to ensure that your
vehicle’s designed appearance, durability, and safety are
preserved. The use of Genuine GM parts can help
maintain your GM New Vehicle Warranty.
We recommend that you choose a collision repair facility
that meets your needs before you ever need collision
repairs. Your dealer/retailer may have a collision repair
center with GM-trained technicians and state of the art
equipment, or be able to recommend a collision repair
center that has GM-trained technicians and comparable
equipment.
Recycled original equipment parts may also be used for
repair. These parts are typically removed from vehicles
that were total losses in prior crashes. In most cases, the
parts being recycled are from undamaged sections of the
vehicle. A recycled original equipment GM part, may be
an acceptable choice to maintain your vehicle’s originally
designed appearance and safety performance, however,
the history of these parts is not known. Such parts are not
covered by your GM New Vehicle Limited Warranty, and
any related failures are not covered by that warranty.
Insuring Your Vehicle
Aftermarket collision parts are also available. These are
made by companies other than GM and may not have
been tested for your vehicle. As a result, these parts may
fit poorly, exhibit premature durability/corrosion problems,
and may not perform properly in subsequent collisions.
Aftermarket parts are not covered by your GM New
Vehicle Limited Warranty, and any vehicle failure related
to such parts are not covered by that warranty.
8-12
Protect your investment in your GM vehicle with
comprehensive and collision insurance coverage.
There are significant differences in the quality of
coverage afforded by various insurance policy terms.
Many insurance policies provide reduced protection to
your GM vehicle by limiting compensation for damage
repairs by using aftermarket collision parts. Some
insurance companies will not specify aftermarket collision
parts. When purchasing insurance, we recommend that
you assure your vehicle will be repaired with GM original
equipment collision parts. If such insurance coverage is
not available from your current insurance carrier,
consider switching to another insurance carrier.
If your vehicle is leased, the leasing company may
require you to have insurance that assures repairs with
Genuine GM Original Equipment Manufacturer (OEM)
parts or Genuine Manufacturer replacement parts. Read
your lease carefully, as you may be charged at the end of
your lease for poor quality repairs.
If a Crash Occurs
Here is what to do if you are involved in a crash.
• Check to make sure that you are all right. If you are
uninjured, make sure that no one else in your
vehicle, or the other vehicle, is injured.
• If there has been an injury, call emergency services
for help. Do not leave the scene of a crash until all
matters have been taken care of. Move your vehicle
only if its position puts you in danger or you are
instructed to move it by a police officer.
• Give only the necessary and requested information
to police and other parties involved in the crash.
Do not discuss your personal condition, mental frame
of mind, or anything unrelated to the crash. This will
help guard against post-crash legal action.
• If you need roadside assistance, call GM Roadside
Assistance. See Roadside Assistance Program on
page 8-7 for more information.
• If your vehicle cannot be driven, know where the
towing service will be taking it. Get a card from the
tow truck operator or write down the driver’s name,
the service’s name, and the phone number.
• Remove any valuables from your vehicle before it is
towed away. Make sure this includes your insurance
information and registration if you keep these items
in your vehicle.
• Gather the important information you will need from
the other driver. Things like name, address, phone
number, driver’s license number, vehicle license
plate, vehicle make, model and model year, Vehicle
Identification Number (VIN), insurance company and
policy number, and a general description of the
damage to the other vehicle.
• If possible, call your insurance company from the
scene of the crash. They will walk you through the
information they will need. If they ask for a police
report, phone or go to the police department
headquarters the next day and you can get a copy of
the report for a nominal fee. In some states/provinces
with “no fault” insurance laws, a report may not be
necessary. This is especially true if there are no
injuries and both vehicles are driveable.
• Choose a reputable collision repair facility for your
vehicle. Whether you select a dealer/retailer or a
private collision repair facility to fix the damage,
make sure you are comfortable with them.
Remember, you will have to feel comfortable with
their work for a long time.
• Once you have an estimate, read it carefully and
make sure you understand what work will be
performed on your vehicle. If you have a question,
ask for an explanation. Reputable shops welcome
this opportunity.
8-13
Managing the Vehicle Damage Repair
Process
Reporting Safety Defects
In the event that your vehicle requires damage repairs,
GM recommends that you take an active role in its repair.
If you have a pre-determined repair facility of choice, take
your vehicle there, or have it towed there. Specify to the
facility that any required replacement collision parts be
original equipment parts, either new Genuine GM parts or
recycled original GM parts. Remember, recycled parts
will not be covered by your GM vehicle warranty.
Reporting Safety Defects to the
United States Government
Insurance pays the bill for the repair, but you must live
with the repair. Depending on your policy limits, your
insurance company may initially value the repair using
aftermarket parts. Discuss this with your repair
professional, and insist on Genuine GM parts. Remember
if your vehicle is leased you may be obligated to have the
vehicle repaired with Genuine GM parts, even if your
insurance coverage does not pay the full cost.
If another party’s insurance company is paying for the
repairs, you are not obligated to accept a repair valuation
based on that insurance company’s collision policy repair
limits, as you have no contractual limits with that
company. In such cases, you can have control of the
repair and parts choices as long as cost stays within
reasonable limits.
8-14
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which
could cause a crash or could cause injury or death,
you should immediately inform the National
Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in
addition to notifying General Motors.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open
an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect
exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall
and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot
become involved in individual problems between
you, your dealer, or General Motors.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle
Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236
(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to
http://www.safercar.gov; or write to:
Administrator, NHTSA
1200 New Jersey Avenue, S.E.
Washington, D.C. 20590
You can also obtain other information about motor
vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.
Reporting Safety Defects to the
Canadian Government
Service Publications Ordering
Information
If you live in Canada, and you believe that your
vehicle has a safety defect, notify Transport Canada
immediately, in addition to notifying General Motors of
Canada Limited. Call them at 1-800-333-0510 or write to:
Service Manuals
Transport Canada
Road Safety Branch
2780 Sheffield Road
Ottawa, Ontario K1B 3V9
Reporting Safety Defects to
General Motors
In addition to notifying NHTSA (or Transport Canada) in
a situation like this, please notify General Motors.
Call 1-800-GMC-8782 (1-800-462-8782), or write:
GMC Customer Assistance Center
P.O. Box 33172
Detroit, MI 48232-5172
In Canada, call 1-800-263-3777 (English) or
1-800-263-7854 (French), or write:
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, CA1-163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
Service Manuals have the diagnosis and repair
information on engines, transmission, axle suspension,
brakes, electrical, steering, body, etc.
Service Bulletins
Service Bulletins give additional technical service
information needed to knowledgeably service
General Motors cars and trucks. Each bulletin
contains instructions to assist in the diagnosis
and service of your vehicle.
Owner Information
Owner publications are written specifically for owners
and intended to provide basic operational information
about the vehicle. The owner manual includes the
Maintenance Schedule for all models.
In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio, Owner Manual, and
Warranty Booklet.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $35.00 (U.S.) plus processing fee
Without Portfolio: Owner Manual only.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $25.00 (U.S.) plus processing fee
8-15
Current and Past Model Order Forms
Technical Service Bulletins and Manuals are available
for current and past model GM vehicles. To request
an order form, specify year and model name of
the vehicle.
ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-551-4123
Monday-Friday 8:00 AM - 6:00 PM
Eastern Time
For Credit Card Orders Only
(VISA-MasterCard-Discover), visit Helm, Inc.
on the World Wide Web at: helminc.com
Or you can write to:
Helm, Incorporated
P.O. Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207
Prices are subject to change without notice and without
incurring obligation. Allow ample time for delivery.
Note to Canadian Customers: All listed prices are
quoted in U.S. funds. Canadian residents are to make
checks payable in U.S. funds.
8-16
Vehicle Data Recording and
Privacy
Your GM vehicle has a number of sophisticated
computers that record information about the vehicle’s
performance and how it is driven. For example, your
vehicle uses computer modules to monitor and control
engine and transmission performance, to monitor the
conditions for airbag deployment and deploy airbags in a
crash and, if so equipped, to provide antilock braking to
help the driver control the vehicle. These modules may
store data to help your dealer/retailer technician service
your vehicle. Some modules may also store data about
how you operate the vehicle, such as rate of fuel
consumption or average speed. These modules may also
retain the owner’s personal preferences, such as radio
pre-sets, seat positions, and temperature settings.
Event Data Recorders
This vehicle has an Event Data Recorder (EDR).
The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain
crash or near crash-like situations, such as an airbag
deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist
in understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed.
The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle
dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time,
typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is
designed to record such data as:
• How various systems in your vehicle were operating
• Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts
were buckled/fastened
• How far, if at all, the driver was pressing the
accelerator and/or brake pedal
• How fast the vehicle was traveling
This data can help provide a better understanding of the
circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.
Important: EDR data is recorded by your vehicle only
if a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data is recorded
by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no
personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash
location) is recorded. However, other parties, such as law
enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the type
of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a
crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment
is required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR
is needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer,
other parties, such as law enforcement, that have the
special equipment, can read the information if they
have access to the vehicle or the EDR.
GM will not access this data or share it with others
except: with the consent of the vehicle owner or, if the
vehicle is leased, with the consent of the lessee; in
response to an official request of police or similar
government office; as part of GM’s defense of litigation
through the discovery process; or, as required by law.
Data that GM collects or receives may also be used for
GM research needs or may be made available to others
for research purposes, where a need is shown and the
data is not tied to a specific vehicle or vehicle owner.
8-17
OnStar®
Radio Frequency Statement
If the vehicle has OnStar and you subscribe to the
OnStar services, please refer to the OnStar Terms and
Conditions for information on data collection and use.
This vehicle has systems that operate on a radio
frequency that comply with Part 15 of the Federal
Communications Commission (FCC) Rules and with
RSS-210/211 of Industry and Science Canada.
Radio Frequency
Identification (RFID)
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
RFID technology is used in some vehicles for functions
such as tire pressure monitoring and ignition system
security, as well as in connection with conveniences
such as key fobs for remote door locking/unlocking and
starting, and in-vehicle transmitters for garage door
openers. RFID technology in GM vehicles does not use
or record personal information or link with any other
GM system containing personal information.
8-18
1. The device may not cause interference.
2. The device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Changes or modifications to any of these systems by
other than an authorized service facility could void
authorization to use this equipment.
A
ABS (Antilock Brake System) FAULT ................. 4-37
AC (Air Conditioning) OFF ............................... 4-37
Accessories and Modifications ............................ 6-3
Accessory Power ............................................ 3-18
Accessory Power Outlets ................................. 4-15
Adding Washer Fluid ....................................... 6-38
Additional Factors Affecting System Operation ..... 2-78
Additional Program Information ......................... 8-11
Additional Required Services .............................. 7-5
Additives, Fuel ................................................. 6-6
Add-On Electrical Equipment ........................... 6-111
Add-On Equipment .......................................... 5-40
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade) .............. 4-48
Adjustment
Chime Level ............................................... 4-63
Adjustments
Headlamp Range .......................................... 2-8
After Off-Road Driving ..................................... 5-24
Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine ................................. 6-20
Air Conditioning .............................................. 4-16
Airbag
Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle ................................................... 2-80
Airbag System
How Does an Airbag Restrain? ...................... 2-71
Passenger Sensing System ........................... 2-73
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle .......... 2-79
What Makes an Airbag Inflate? ...................... 2-71
What Will You See After an Airbag Inflates? .... 2-72
When Should an Airbag Inflate? .................... 2-69
Where Are the Airbags? ............................... 2-67
Airbags ......................................................... 2-81
Passenger Status Indicator ........................... 4-23
Readiness Light .......................................... 4-22
System Check ............................................. 2-64
All Overseas Locations ...................................... 8-6
AM ............................................................... 4-62
AM-FM Radio ................................................. 4-43
Antenna
Fixed Mast ................................................. 4-63
Antenna, XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System ..... 4-63
Antilock Brake System (ABS) ............................. 5-5
Warning Light ............................................. 4-26
Appearance Care
Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels ............. 6-108
Care of Safety Belts ................................... 6-105
Chemical Paint Spotting .............................. 6-109
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses .................. 6-106
Fabric/Carpet ............................................ 6-103
Finish Care ............................................... 6-107
1
Appearance Care (cont.)
Finish Damage .......................................... 6-109
Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other
Plastic Surfaces ..................................... 6-105
Interior Cleaning ........................................ 6-102
Leather .................................................... 6-104
Sheet Metal Damage .................................. 6-109
Tires ........................................................ 6-108
Underbody Maintenance ............................. 6-109
Washing Your Vehicle ................................. 6-106
Weatherstrips ............................................ 6-105
Windshield and Wiper Blades ...................... 6-107
Approaching a Hill .......................................... 5-18
Ashtray ......................................................... 4-16
Assist Handles ............................................... 3-40
Assistance Program, Roadside ........................... 8-7
Audio System ................................................. 4-42
Radio Reception .......................................... 4-61
Setting the Clock ......................................... 4-43
Theft-Deterrent Feature ................................ 4-61
XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System ............ 4-63
Audio System(s) ............................................. 4-43
Automatic Headlamp System ............................ 4-12
Automatic Transmission
Fluid .......................................................... 6-21
Operation ................................................... 3-21
Automatic Transmission Shift Lock Control
System Check .............................................. 7-8
Axle, Rear ..................................................... 6-47
2
B
Backing Up .................................................... 5-57
Battery .......................................................... 6-42
Electric Power Management .......................... 4-14
Run-Down Protection ................................... 4-15
Battery Replacement ......................................... 3-4
Before You Go Off-Roading .............................. 5-13
Belt Routing, Engine ....................................... 7-13
Blizzard Conditions .......................................... 5-30
Brake
Emergencies ................................................ 5-5
Brake Adjustment ............................................ 6-41
Brake Fluid .................................................... 6-39
Brake Pedal Travel ......................................... 6-41
Brake Wear ................................................... 6-41
BRAKES ....................................................... 4-38
Brakes .......................................................... 6-39
Antilock ....................................................... 5-5
Parking ...................................................... 3-30
System Warning Light .................................. 4-25
Braking ........................................................... 5-3
Braking in Emergencies ..................................... 5-5
Break-In, New Vehicle ..................................... 3-16
Bulb Replacement ........................................... 6-54
Center High-Mounted Stoplamp (CHMSL) ........ 6-52
Fog Lamps ................................................. 4-12
Front Turn Signal, Parking and Daytime
Running Lamps ........................................ 6-52
Bulb Replacement (cont.)
Halogen Bulbs ............................................
Headlamp Aiming ........................................
Headlamps ......................................... 6-50,
License Plate Lamps ....................................
Taillamps, Turn Signal, Stoplamps and
Back-up Lamps ........................................
Buying New Tires ...........................................
6-50
6-50
6-51
6-54
6-53
6-73
C
Calibration ..................................................... 3-37
California
Perchlorate Materials Requirements ................. 6-4
Warning ....................................................... 6-4
California Fuel .................................................. 6-6
Calling for Assistance ........................................ 8-7
Canada ........................................................... 8-6
Canadian Owners ............................................... iii
Canadian Owners (Propriétaires Canadiens) ........... iii
Capacities and Specifications .......................... 6-118
Carbon Monoxide
Engine Exhaust ........................................... 3-34
Tailgate ........................................................ 3-8
Winter Driving ............................................. 5-29
Care of
Safety Belts .............................................. 6-105
CD Messages ................................................ 4-55
CD, MP3 ....................................................... 4-56
Cellular Phone Usage ...................................... 4-62
Center Console Storage ................................... 3-40
Center High-Mounted Stoplamp (CHMSL) ........... 6-52
Certification/Tire Label ..................................... 5-38
Chains, Tire ................................................... 6-78
CHANGE OIL ................................................. 4-38
Charging System Light .................................... 4-24
Check
Engine Lamp .............................................. 4-28
Check Engine Light ......................................... 4-28
Checking Brake Fluid ...................................... 6-40
Checking Coolant ............................................ 6-31
Checking Engine Oil ........................................ 6-15
Checking Things Under the Hood ...................... 6-10
Chemical Paint Spotting ................................. 6-109
Child Restraints
Infants and Young Children ........................... 2-38
Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children .......... 2-46
Older Children ............................................. 2-35
Securing a Child Restraint in a
Rear Seat Position ................................... 2-58
Securing a Child Restraint in the
Center Front Seat Position ........................ 2-60
Securing a Child Restraint in the
Right Front Seat Position .......................... 2-60
Systems ..................................................... 2-42
Where to Put the Restraint ........................... 2-44
Chime Level Adjustment .................................. 4-63
Cigarette Lighter ............................................. 4-16
3
Circuit Breakers ............................................ 6-111
Cleaning
Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels ............. 6-108
Exterior Lamps/Lenses ................................ 6-106
Fabric/Carpet ............................................ 6-103
Finish Care ............................................... 6-107
Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other Plastic
Surfaces ............................................... 6-105
Interior ..................................................... 6-102
Leather .................................................... 6-104
Tires ........................................................ 6-108
Underbody Maintenance ............................. 6-109
Washing Your Vehicle ................................. 6-106
Weatherstrips ............................................ 6-105
Windshield and Wiper Blades ...................... 6-107
Cleaning the Mirror ................................. 3-36, 3-37
Climate Control System ................................... 4-16
Outlet Adjustment ........................................ 4-18
Climate Controls ............................................. 1-14
Clock, Setting ................................................. 4-43
Clutch, Hydraulic ............................................. 6-26
Cold Temperature Operation ............................. 6-17
Collision Damage Repair .................................. 8-11
Collision Parts ................................................ 8-12
Compass ....................................................... 3-37
Compass Calibration ....................................... 3-37
Compass Operation ......................................... 3-37
Compass Variance .......................................... 3-38
Content Theft-Deterrent .................................... 3-13
Control of a Vehicle .......................................... 5-3
4
Coolant
Engine ....................................................... 6-29
Engine Temperature Gage ............................ 4-27
Cooling System .............................................. 6-27
Courtesy Transportation Program ...................... 8-10
Coverage ........................................................ 8-8
Cruise Control .................................................. 4-7
Light .......................................................... 4-32
Cupholders .................................................... 3-40
Current and Past Model Order Forms ................ 8-16
Customer Assistance ......................................... 8-6
Offices ......................................................... 8-6
Text Telephone (TTY) Users ........................... 8-6
Customer Information
Service Publications Ordering Information ........ 8-15
Customer Satisfaction Procedure ........................ 8-2
D
Damage Repair, Collision ................................. 8-11
Data Recorders, Event .................................... 8-17
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) ......................... 4-11
Defensive Driving ............................................. 5-2
Dinghy Towing ................................................ 5-42
Disc, MP3 ...................................................... 4-56
Doing Your Own Service Work ........................... 6-4
Dolly Towing .................................................. 5-44
Dome Lamp ................................................... 4-13
Dome Lamp Override ...................................... 4-14
Door
Locks .......................................................... 3-5
Power Locks ................................................ 3-6
Programmable Automatic Door Locks ............... 3-6
Rear Door Security Locks ............................... 3-7
Rear Doors .................................................. 3-7
DOORS ......................................................... 4-38
Driver Information Center (DIC) ......................... 4-33
DIC Operation and Displays .......................... 4-33
DIC Warnings and Messages ........................ 4-37
Driving
At Night ..................................................... 5-25
Before a Long Trip ...................................... 5-27
Defensive ..................................................... 5-2
Drunk .......................................................... 5-2
Highway Hypnosis ....................................... 5-27
Hill and Mountain Roads .............................. 5-28
In Rain and on Wet Roads ........................... 5-26
Loss of Control ........................................... 5-12
Off-Road .................................................... 5-13
Off-Road Recovery ...................................... 5-11
Recovery Hooks .......................................... 5-32
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out ................. 5-32
Winter ........................................................ 5-29
Driving Across an Incline .................................. 5-22
Driving Downhill .............................................. 5-21
Driving
Driving
Driving
Driving
Driving
Driving
Driving
Driving
for Better Fuel Economy .......................
in Mud, Sand, Snow, or Ice ...................
in Water ..............................................
On Grades ..........................................
on Hills ...............................................
on Snow or Ice ....................................
Uphill ..................................................
with a Trailer .......................................
1-19
5-23
5-24
5-58
5-17
5-29
5-18
5-56
E
EDR ............................................................. 8-16
Electrical Equipment, Add-On .......................... 6-111
Electrical System
Engine Compartment Fuse Block ................. 6-112
Fuses and Circuit Breakers ......................... 6-111
Windshield Wiper Fuses ............................. 6-111
Electronic Immobilizer
PASS-Key® III+ ........................................... 3-15
Electronic Immobilizer Operation
PASS-Key® III+ ........................................... 3-15
Emissions Inspection and
Maintenance Programs ................................. 4-31
ENG (Engine) HOT ......................................... 4-38
5
Engine
Air Cleaner/Filter ......................................... 6-20
Check and Service Engine Soon Lamp ........... 4-28
Compartment Overview ................................ 6-12
Coolant ...................................................... 6-29
Coolant Heater ............................................ 3-20
Coolant Temperature Gage ........................... 4-27
Cooling System ........................................... 6-27
Drive Belt Routing ....................................... 7-13
Exhaust ..................................................... 3-34
Fan Noise .................................................. 6-36
Oil ............................................................. 6-15
Overheating ................................................ 6-35
Starting ...................................................... 3-18
Engine Identification ...................................... 6-110
Engine Oil
Life System ................................................ 6-18
Engine Oil Additives / Engine Oil Flushes ........... 6-18
Engine Oil Life System .................................... 4-34
Environmental Concerns .................................. 5-15
Event Data Recorders ..................................... 8-17
Exit Lighting ................................................... 4-14
Express-Down Windows ................................... 3-12
Extender, Safety Belt ....................................... 2-34
Exterior Cargo Lamps ...................................... 4-13
Exterior Lamps ............................................... 4-10
Exterior Mirrors ............................................... 1-11
6
F
Federal Communications Commission (FCC) and
Industry and Science Canada ........................ 6-67
Filter
Engine Air Cleaner ...................................... 6-20
Finding a Program Type (PTY) Station
(RDS and XM) ............................................ 4-49
Finding a Station ............................................ 4-46
Finish Damage ............................................. 6-109
Fixed Mast Antenna ........................................ 4-63
Flashers, Hazard Warning .................................. 4-3
Flash-to-Pass ................................................... 4-5
Flat Tire ........................................................ 6-79
Flat Tire, Changing ......................................... 6-80
Flat Tire, Storing ............................................. 6-96
FLUID ........................................................... 4-38
Fluid
Automatic Transmission ................................ 6-21
Power Steering ........................................... 6-37
Windshield Washer ...................................... 6-38
FM Stereo ..................................................... 4-62
Fog Lamps
Bulb Replacement ....................................... 4-12
Following Distance .......................................... 5-57
Four-Wheel Drive .................................... 3-25, 6-48
Front Axle ...................................................... 6-49
Front Turn Signal, Parking and Daytime
Running Lamps ........................................... 6-52
Fuel ............................................................... 6-5
Additives ...................................................... 6-6
California Fuel .............................................. 6-6
Filling a Portable Fuel Container .................... 6-10
Filling the Tank ............................................. 6-8
Fuels in Foreign Countries .............................. 6-7
Gage ......................................................... 4-32
Gasoline Octane ........................................... 6-5
Gasoline Specifications .................................. 6-6
FUEL CAP ..................................................... 4-39
Fuel Economy
Driving for Better ......................................... 1-19
Fuses
Engine Compartment Fuse Block ................. 6-112
Fuses and Circuit Breakers ......................... 6-111
Windshield Wiper ....................................... 6-111
G
Gages
Engine Coolant Temperature .........................
Fuel ..........................................................
Speedometer ..............................................
Tachometer .................................................
Trip Odometer .............................................
4-27
4-32
4-20
4-20
4-20
Gasoline
Octane ........................................................ 6-5
Specifications ............................................... 6-6
Getting Familiar with Off-Road Driving ................ 5-15
Glove Box ..................................................... 3-40
GM Mobility Reimbursement Program .................. 8-7
H
Halogen Bulbs ................................................ 6-50
Hazard Warning Flashers ................................... 4-3
Head Restraints ......................................... 1-9, 2-8
Headlamps .................................................... 6-51
Aiming ....................................................... 6-50
Bulb Replacement ....................................... 6-50
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) ..................... 4-11
Exterior Lamps ............................................ 4-10
Flash-to-Pass ............................................... 4-5
High/Low Beam Changer ................................ 4-5
On Reminder .............................................. 4-11
Range Adjustment ......................................... 2-8
Heated Seats ................................................... 2-4
Heater ........................................................... 4-16
Engine Coolant ........................................... 3-20
Highbeam On Light ......................................... 4-32
High-Speed Operation, Tires ............................. 6-65
Highway Hypnosis ........................................... 5-27
7
Hill and Mountain Roads .................................. 5-28
Hitches .......................................................... 5-55
Hood
Checking Things Under ................................ 6-10
Release ..................................................... 6-11
Horn ............................................................... 4-3
How OnStar Service Works .............................. 1-21
How to Add Automatic Transmission Fluid .......... 6-24
How to Add Coolant to the Radiator .................. 6-32
How to Add Fluid ............................................ 6-26
How to Check ........................................ 6-25, 6-65
How to Check and Add Fluid ............................ 6-27
How to Check Automatic Transmission Fluid ....... 6-22
How to Check Lubricant .......................... 6-47, 6-49
How to Check Power Steering Fluid .................. 6-37
How to Inspect the Engine Air Cleaner/Filter ....... 6-20
How to Reset the Engine Oil Life System ........... 6-19
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ................... 2-18
How to Add Coolant to the Recovery Tank ............. 6-32
Hydraulic Clutch ............................................. 6-26
Hydroplaning .................................................. 5-26
8
I
If a Crash Occurs ........................................... 8-13
If No Steam is Coming from the Engine
Compartment .............................................. 6-36
If Steam is Coming from the Engine
Compartment .............................................. 6-35
If the Off Indicator is Lit for an Adult-Size
Occupant ................................................... 2-78
If the On Indicator is Lit for a Child Restraint ...... 2-77
Ignition Positions ............................................. 3-17
Ignition Transmission Lock Check ....................... 7-9
Infants and Young Children, Restraints ............... 2-38
Inflation - Tire Pressure ................................... 6-64
Instrument Panel
Brightness .................................................. 4-13
Cluster ....................................................... 4-19
Insuring Your Vehicle ....................................... 8-12
Interior Mirror ................................................. 1-11
Introduction ...................................................... 7-2
J
Jump Starting ................................................. 6-43
K
Keyless Entry
Remote (RKE) System ................................... 3-3
Keyless Entry System ....................................... 3-3
Keys ............................................................... 3-2
L
Labeling, Tire Sidewall ..................................... 6-58
Lamps
Daytime Running (DRL) ................................ 4-11
Dome ........................................................ 4-13
Dome Lamp Override ................................... 4-14
Exterior Cargo ............................................. 4-13
License Plate .............................................. 6-54
Malfunction Indicator .................................... 4-28
Lap Belt ........................................................ 2-33
Lap-Shoulder Belt ........................................... 2-27
LATCH System for Child Restraints ................... 2-46
Latches, Seatback ............................................ 2-9
Leaving After Parking on a Hill ......................... 5-59
Leaving the Vehicle With the Engine Running
(Automatic Transmission) .............................. 3-32
Lighting
Exit ........................................................... 4-14
Lights
Airbag Readiness ........................................ 4-22
Antilock Brake System (ABS) Warning ............ 4-26
Brake System Warning ................................. 4-25
Charging System ......................................... 4-24
Cruise Control ............................................. 4-32
Exterior Lamps ............................................ 4-10
Flash-to-Pass ............................................... 4-5
Highbeam On ............................................. 4-32
High/Low Beam Changer ................................ 4-5
Oil Pressure ............................................... 4-31
On Reminder .............................................. 4-11
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator .................. 4-23
Safety Belt Reminders .................................. 4-21
Security ..................................................... 4-32
StabiliTrak®/Traction Control System (TCS)
Warning Light .......................................... 4-26
Tire Pressure .............................................. 4-28
Up-Shift ..................................................... 4-24
Limited-Slip Rear Axle ....................................... 5-9
Loading Your Vehicle ....................................... 5-33
Loading Your Vehicle for Off-Road Driving .......... 5-14
9
Locks
Door ........................................................... 3-5
Lockout Protection ......................................... 3-7
Power Door .................................................. 3-6
Programmable Automatic Door Locks ............... 3-6
Rear Door Security Locks ............................... 3-7
Loss of Control ............................................... 5-12
LOW FUEL .................................................... 4-39
LOW TIRE ..................................................... 4-39
Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children ............. 2-46
Lumbar
Manual Controls ............................................ 2-3
Power Controls ............................................. 2-4
M
Maintenance Schedule
Maintenance Record .................................... 7-14
Maintenance Replacement Parts .................... 7-12
Owner Checks and Services ........................... 7-8
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ............. 7-10
Scheduled Maintenance ................................. 7-3
Maintenance When Trailer Towing ..................... 5-60
Maintenance I .................................................. 7-3
Maintenance II ................................................. 7-4
Making Turns ................................................. 5-57
Malfunction Indicator Lamp ............................... 4-28
Managing the Vehicle Damage Repair Process .... 8-14
10
Manual Door Locks ........................................... 1-4
Manual Lumbar Controls .................................... 2-3
Manual Reclining Seatbacks ............................... 2-5
Manual Seats ............................................ 1-7, 2-2
Manual Transmission
Fluid .......................................................... 6-25
Operation ................................................... 3-23
Manual Windows ...................................... 1-6, 3-10
Message
DIC Warnings and Messages ........................ 4-37
Mexico, Central America and Caribbean Islands/
Countries (Except Puerto Rico and
U.S. Virgin Islands) ....................................... 8-6
Mirrors
Automatic Dimming Rearview ........................ 3-36
Manual Rearview ......................................... 3-36
Outside Convex Mirror ................................. 3-39
Outside Manual Mirrors ................................ 3-38
Outside Power Mirrors .................................. 3-38
MP3 ............................................................. 4-56
MP3/WMA CD-R Disc ...................................... 4-56
My GM Canada (Canada) — www.gm.ca ............. 8-5
N
New Vehicle Break-In ...................................... 3-16
Non-RDS Radios ............................................ 4-61
O
P
Odometer ...................................................... 4-20
Trip ........................................................... 4-20
Off-Road ....................................................... 5-13
Driving ....................................................... 5-13
Recovery .................................................... 5-11
OIL ............................................................... 4-39
Oil
Engine ....................................................... 6-15
Engine Oil Life System ................................. 6-18
Pressure Light ............................................. 4-31
Older Children, Restraints ................................ 2-35
Online Owner Center ........................................ 8-5
Online Owner Center
(U.S.) — www.gmownercenter.com/gmc ............ 8-5
OnStar, Privacy .............................................. 8-18
Other Rainy Weather Tips ................................ 5-26
Outlet Adjustment ............................................ 4-18
Outlets
Accessory Power ......................................... 4-15
Outside
Convex Mirror ............................................. 3-39
Manual Mirrors ............................................ 3-38
Power Mirrors ............................................. 3-38
Owner Checks and Services .............................. 7-8
Owner Information ........................................... 8-15
Owners, Canadian .............................................. iii
Paint, Damage .............................................. 6-109
Park
Shifting Into ................................................ 3-31
Shifting Out of ............................................ 3-32
PARK BRK (Brake) ......................................... 4-39
Parking
Brake ........................................................ 3-30
Over Things That Burn ................................. 3-33
Parking Brake and Automatic Transmission
P (Park) Mechanism Check ............................. 7-9
Parking on Hills .............................................. 5-58
Parking Your Vehicle ....................................... 3-33
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator ..................... 4-23
Passenger Safety Belt Reminder Light ............... 4-21
Passenger Sensing System .............................. 2-73
Passing ................................................. 5-11, 5-57
PASS-Key® III+ Electronic Immobilizer ............... 3-15
PASS-Key® III+ Electronic Immobilizer
Operation ................................................... 3-15
Passlock® ...................................................... 3-14
Perchlorate Materials Requirements, California ...... 6-4
Personalization Features .................................. 4-34
Pickup Conversion to Chassis Cab .................... 5-40
Playing a CD (Radio with Single CD Player) ....... 4-52
Playing an MP3/WMA CD-R Disc ...................... 4-55
Playing the Radio ........................................... 4-45
11
Power
Door Locks .................................................. 3-6
Lumbar Controls ........................................... 2-4
Retained Accessory (RAP) ............................ 3-18
Seat ............................................................ 2-3
Steering Fluid ............................................. 6-37
Windows .................................................... 3-11
Power Door Locks ............................................ 1-5
Power Lumbar ................................................. 1-8
Power Reclining Seatbacks ................................ 2-6
Power Seats .................................................... 1-7
Power Steering ................................................ 5-9
Power Windows ............................................... 1-6
Pregnancy, Using Safety Belts .......................... 2-33
Privacy .......................................................... 8-16
Navigation System ....................................... 8-18
OnStar ....................................................... 8-18
Radio Frequency Identification (RFID) ............. 8-18
Program
Courtesy Transportation ................................ 8-10
Programmable Automatic Door Locks .................. 3-6
Programming Transmitters to the Vehicle ............. 3-4
Proposition 65 Warning, California ....................... 6-4
Pulling A Trailer .............................................. 5-49
12
Q
Questions and Answers About Safety Belts ......... 2-17
R
Radio Data System (RDS) ............................... 4-44
Radio Frequency
Identification (RFID) ..................................... 8-18
Statement ................................................... 8-18
Radio Messages ............................................. 4-52
Radio with CD (MP3/WMA) .............................. 4-43
Radio(s) ........................................................ 4-43
Radios
Reception ................................................... 4-61
Setting the Clock ......................................... 4-43
Theft-Deterrent ............................................ 4-61
Range Adjustment, Headlamps ........................... 2-8
RDS Messages .............................................. 4-51
RDS Radios ................................................... 4-61
Rear Axle ...................................................... 6-47
Limited-Slip .................................................. 5-9
Rear Door Security Locks .................................. 3-7
Rear Doors ...................................................... 3-7
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides ...................... 2-30
Rear Seat Operation ............................... 2-10, 2-11
Rear Storage ................................................. 3-41
Rearview Mirrors ............................................. 3-36
Automatic Dimming ...................................... 3-36
Reclining Seatbacks ................................... 1-8, 2-5
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ................. 7-10
Recovery Hooks ............................................. 5-32
Recreational Vehicle Towing ............................. 5-41
REDUCED POWER ........................................ 4-40
Reimbursement Program, GM Mobility ................. 8-7
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System .................. 3-3
Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the
Spare Tire .................................................. 6-85
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools ................... 6-81
Repair Facility ................................................ 8-12
Replacement Bulbs ......................................... 6-54
Replacement Parts
Maintenance ............................................... 7-12
Replacing Brake System Parts .......................... 6-42
Reporting Safety Defects
Canadian Government .................................. 8-15
General Motors ........................................... 8-15
U.S. Government ......................................... 8-14
Restraint System Check
Checking the Restraint Systems .................... 2-81
Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash .......................................... 2-82
Retained Accessory Power (RAP) ...................... 3-18
Ride Control Systems
Limited Slip Rear Axle ................................... 5-9
Roadside Assistance Program ............................ 8-7
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out .................... 5-32
Roof
Sunroof ...................................................... 3-42
Running the Vehicle While Parked ..................... 3-34
S
Safety Belt Pretensioners ................................. 2-29
Safety Belt Reminder Light ............................... 4-21
Safety Belts ................................................... 2-81
Care of .................................................... 6-105
Extender .................................................... 2-34
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ................ 2-18
Lap Belt ..................................................... 2-33
Lap-Shoulder Belt ........................................ 2-27
Reminders .................................................. 4-21
Safety Belts Are for Everyone ....................... 2-13
Use During Pregnancy ................................. 2-33
Safety Chains ................................................. 5-55
Safety Defects Reporting
Canadian Government .................................. 8-15
General Motors ........................................... 8-15
U.S. Government ......................................... 8-14
Safety Warnings and Symbols .............................. iv
Scanning the Terrain ....................................... 5-16
13
Scheduled Maintenance ..................................... 7-3
Scheduling Appointments ................................. 8-10
Seatback Latches ............................................. 2-9
Seats
Heated Seats ............................................... 2-4
Manual Lumbar ............................................. 2-3
Power Lumbar .............................................. 2-4
Power Seats ................................................. 2-3
Rear Seat Operation ............................ 2-10, 2-11
Reclining Seatbacks ...................................... 2-5
Secondary Latch System ................................. 6-93
Securing a Child Restraint
Center Front Seat Position ............................ 2-60
Rear Seat Position ...................................... 2-58
Right Front Seat Position .............................. 2-60
Securing an Add-On Child Restraint in the
Vehicle ....................................................... 2-43
Securing the Child Within the Child Restraint ...... 2-43
Security
Light .......................................................... 4-32
SERV (Service) 4WD (Four-Wheel Drive) ........... 4-40
SERV (Service) TPM (Tire Pressure Monitor) ...... 4-40
SERV (Service) VEH (Vehicle) .......................... 4-40
Service ........................................................... 6-3
Accessories and Modifications ......................... 6-3
Adding Equipment to the Outside of the
Vehicle ..................................................... 6-5
Doing Your Own Work ................................... 6-4
14
Service (cont.)
Engine Soon Lamp ...................................... 4-28
Parts Identification Label ............................. 6-110
Publications Ordering Information ................... 8-15
Scheduling Appointments .............................. 8-10
Service Bulletins ............................................. 8-15
SERVICE CHARG (Charge) SYS (System) ......... 4-41
Service Manuals ............................................. 8-15
SERVICE STAB (Stability) SYS (System) ........... 4-41
Services Not Included in Roadside Assistance ...... 8-9
Services Provided ............................................. 8-8
Services Specific to Canadian Purchased
Vehicles ....................................................... 8-9
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle .............. 2-79
Setting Preset PTYs (RDS) Only ....................... 4-50
Setting Preset Stations ............................ 1-15, 4-47
Setting the Clock .................................... 1-15, 4-43
Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble) .......................... 4-47
Sheet Metal Damage ..................................... 6-109
Shift Speeds .................................................. 3-25
Shifting
Out of Park ................................................ 3-32
Shifting Into Park ............................................ 3-31
Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster ........................... 2-29
Signals, Turn and Lane-Change .......................... 4-4
Skidding ........................................................ 5-12
Sliding Rear Windows ..................................... 3-12
Spare Tire .................................................... 6-101
Installing .................................................... 6-85
Removing ................................................... 6-81
Storing ....................................................... 6-96
Specifications and Capacities .......................... 6-118
Speedometer .................................................. 4-20
STAB (Stability) SYS (System) OFF .................. 4-41
StabiliTrak® System .......................................... 5-6
StabiliTrak®/TCS Warning Light ......................... 4-26
Stalling on an Incline ....................................... 5-23
Starter Switch Check ........................................ 7-8
Starting the Engine ......................................... 3-18
Steering .......................................................... 5-9
Steering in Emergencies .................................. 5-10
Steering Tips ................................................... 5-9
Steering Wheel, Tilt Wheel ................................. 4-3
Storage Areas
Center Console ........................................... 3-40
Cupholders ................................................. 3-40
Glove Box .................................................. 3-40
Rear .......................................................... 3-41
Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snow ..................... 5-31
Sun Visors ..................................................... 3-12
Sunroof ......................................................... 3-42
T
Tachometer .................................................... 4-20
Tailgate ........................................................... 3-8
Taillamps
Turn Signal, Stoplamps and Back-up Lamps .... 6-53
Temperature Display ........................................ 3-37
Temperature – A, B, C .................................... 6-76
Testing the Alarm ............................................ 3-14
Text Telephone (TTY) Users ............................... 8-6
Theft-Deterrent Feature .................................... 4-61
Theft-Deterrent Systems ................................... 3-13
Content Theft-Deterrent ................................ 3-13
PASS-Key® III+ Electronic Immobilizer ............ 3-15
PASS-Key® III+ Electronic Immobilizer
Operation ................................................ 3-15
Passlock® ................................................... 3-14
Tilt Wheel ........................................................ 4-3
Time, Setting .................................................. 4-43
Tire Size ....................................................... 6-60
Tires ............................................................. 6-57
Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels,
Cleaning ............................................... 6-108
Buying New Tires ........................................ 6-73
Chains ....................................................... 6-78
15
Tires (cont.)
Changing a Flat Tire .................................... 6-80
Cleaning ................................................... 6-108
Different Size .............................................. 6-75
High-Speed Operation .................................. 6-65
If a Tire Goes Flat ....................................... 6-79
Inflation - Tire Pressure ................................ 6-64
Inspection and Rotation ................................ 6-71
Installing the Spare Tire ................................ 6-85
Pressure Light ............................................. 4-28
Pressure Monitor Operation ........................... 6-67
Pressure Monitor System .............................. 6-66
Removing the Flat Tire ................................. 6-85
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools ............... 6-81
Secondary Latch System .............................. 6-93
Sidewall Labeling ......................................... 6-58
Spare Tire ................................................ 6-101
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools ............ 6-96
Terminology and Definitions ........................... 6-61
Uniform Tire Quality Grading ......................... 6-75
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ................. 6-77
Wheel Replacement ..................................... 6-77
When It Is Time for New Tires ...................... 6-72
To Use the Engine Coolant Heater .................... 3-20
Torque Lock (Automatic Transmission) ............... 3-32
Total Weight on the Vehicle’s Tires .................... 5-54
16
Towing
Recreational Vehicle ..................................... 5-41
Towing a Trailer .......................................... 5-48
Trailer Recommendations .............................. 5-60
Your Vehicle ............................................... 5-41
TPMS Malfunction Light and Message ............... 6-68
TPMS Sensor Matching Process ....................... 6-69
TRAC (Traction) OFF ...................................... 4-41
Traction
Control System (TCS) .................................... 5-8
Limited-Slip Rear Axle .................................... 5-9
StabiliTrak® System ....................................... 5-6
TRACTION FAULT .......................................... 4-41
Traction – AA, A, B, C ..................................... 6-76
Trailer
Towing Recommendations ............................. 5-60
Trailer Brakes ................................................. 5-55
Trailer Wiring Harness ..................................... 5-60
Transfer Case ................................................ 6-48
Transmission
Fluid, Automatic ........................................... 6-21
Fluid, Manual .............................................. 6-25
Transmission Operation, Automatic .................... 3-21
Transmission Operation, Manual ........................ 3-23
Transportation Options ..................................... 8-10
Transportation Program, Courtesy ...................... 8-10
Traveling to Remote Areas ............................... 5-15
Treadwear ..................................................... 6-76
Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A ......... 6-75
Trip Information .............................................. 4-34
Trip Odometer ................................................ 4-20
Truck-Camper Loading Information .................... 5-40
Turn and Lane-Change Signals .......................... 4-4
TURN SIGNAL ............................................... 4-41
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever ........................... 4-4
Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer .................. 5-57
Two-Tiered Loading ......................................... 5-40
U
Uniform Tire Quality Grading ............................ 6-75
United States ................................................... 8-6
Up-Shift Light ......................................... 3-24, 4-24
Used Replacement Wheels .............................. 6-78
Using ABS ....................................................... 5-5
V
Vehicle
Control ........................................................ 5-3
Loading ...................................................... 5-33
Parking Your ............................................... 3-33
Running While Parked .................................. 3-34
Symbols ......................................................... iv
Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy .................. 8-16
Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN) ............................................ 6-110
Service Parts Identification Label .................. 6-110
Vehicle Personalization .................................... 1-16
Vehicle Storage .............................................. 6-42
Ventilation Adjustment ...................................... 4-18
Visors ........................................................... 3-12
W
Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators ............... 4-18
Warnings
DIC Warnings and Messages ........................ 4-37
Hazard Flashers ............................................ 4-3
Safety and Symbols ......................................... iv
Weight of the Trailer ........................................ 5-49
Weight of the Trailer Tongue ............................. 5-52
Weight-Distributing Hitches and Weight Carrying
Hitches ...................................................... 5-55
What Kind of Engine Oil to Use ........................ 6-17
What to Do with Used Oil ................................ 6-19
What to Use .................. 6-30, 6-37, 6-38, 6-47, 6-49
Wheels
Alignment and Tire Balance .......................... 6-77
Different Size .............................................. 6-75
Replacement ............................................... 6-77
When It Is Time for New Tires .......................... 6-72
17
When the Change Oil Message Displays ............. 7-3
When to Add Engine Oil .................................. 6-16
When to Change Engine Oil ............................. 6-18
When to Check ...................................... 6-25, 6-64
When to Check and Change Automatic
Transmission Fluid ....................................... 6-21
When to Check and Change Lubricant ....... 6-47, 6-49
When to Check and What to Use ..................... 6-27
When to Check Power Steering Fluid ................ 6-37
When to Inspect the Engine Air Cleaner/Filter ..... 6-20
Where to Put the Child Restraint ....................... 2-44
Why Safety Belts Work .................................... 2-14
Window Lockout ............................................. 3-12
Windows ....................................................... 3-10
Manual ...................................................... 3-10
Power ........................................................ 3-11
Sliding Rear ................................................ 3-12
Windshield
Washer ........................................................ 4-6
Washer Fluid .............................................. 6-38
Wiper Blade Replacement ............................. 6-55
Wiper Blades, Cleaning .............................. 6-107
Wiper Fuses ............................................. 6-111
Wipers ......................................................... 4-5
Winter Driving ................................................ 5-29
X
XM Radio Messages ....................................... 4-60
XM™ Satellite Radio
Antenna ..................................................... 4-63
XM™ Satellite Radio Service .................... 4-52, 4-62
Y
Your Responsibility .......................................... 1-22
18
Download PDF
Similar pages